[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025113117A1 - Communication method and related device - Google Patents

Communication method and related device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025113117A1
WO2025113117A1 PCT/CN2024/130084 CN2024130084W WO2025113117A1 WO 2025113117 A1 WO2025113117 A1 WO 2025113117A1 CN 2024130084 W CN2024130084 W CN 2024130084W WO 2025113117 A1 WO2025113117 A1 WO 2025113117A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
digital
port
ports
virtual
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/CN2024/130084
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
李芳�
刘凤威
向高
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Publication of WO2025113117A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025113117A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/08Testing, supervising or monitoring using real traffic
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/046Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource the resource being in the space domain, e.g. beams

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of wireless communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and related equipment.
  • MIMO Multiple-input multiple-output
  • the present application provides a communication method and related equipment, which are used to obtain the measurement results of the channel between the network device and the terminal device based on the measurement information.
  • the terminal device can determine and indicate a finer-grained weight based on the measurement results of the reference signal, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing the beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a terminal device, or the method is executed by some components (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.) in the terminal device, or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the terminal device functions.
  • the communication method is described as an example of being executed by a terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives a reference signal, which is sent through M digital ports, M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port of the M digital ports includes N 1 virtual ports, N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the terminal device sends measurement information, and the measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, and the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port.
  • the reference signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, so that the reference signal received by the terminal device can carry the channel information of the wireless channel; thereafter, the measurement information obtained by the terminal device through measuring the reference signal can reflect the channel information, and the subsequent way in which the terminal device sends the measurement information can enable the network device to obtain the measurement result of the channel between the network device and the terminal device based on the measurement information.
  • the measurement information obtained by the terminal device based on the reference signal includes the first information corresponding to the first digital port, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port.
  • the network device can determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port based on the first information. Compared with the way in which the network device obtains the weights of the digital port based on the measurement information fed back by the terminal device, since the first digital port contains the N 1 virtual ports, the network device can determine a finer-grained weight based on the first information.
  • the terminal device can determine and indicate a finer-grained weight based on the measurement result of the reference signal, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing the beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.
  • the reference signals involved in the present application may include a synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (SSB, or SS/PBCH block), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), etc.
  • SSB synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • the weights of the N1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through a first weight vector, and the first weight vector includes N1 elements; wherein the N1 virtual ports respectively correspond to N1 antenna array sets, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays, and the N1 elements are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N1 antenna array sets.
  • the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port of the network device are obtained by the first weight vector, and the weights of the N 1 virtual ports are obtained by the first weight vector including N 1 elements, and the N 1 elements are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • the phases of the antenna arrays it is possible to achieve Transmission of reference signal.
  • the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through a first weight vector, including: the weights of the N 1 virtual ports are obtained through the first weight vector and a second weight vector, and the second weight vector includes N 1 sub-vectors; wherein a dimension of a T-th sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays of a T-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set, and a value of T is 1 to N 1 .
  • the dimension of the T-th subvector in the N 1 subvectors included in the first weight vector is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the T-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • the first weight vector can correspond to the weight of each antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • the first information satisfies any of the following:
  • the first information includes a quantization processing result of the first weight vector
  • the first information includes one element of the N 1 elements corresponding to one of the N 1 virtual ports, and a quantization processing result corresponding to a difference between N 1 -1 elements of the N 1 elements corresponding to other N 1 -1 virtual ports except the one of the virtual ports and the one element;
  • the first information includes a first index and a second index, and the first index and the second index are used to determine a first weight vector of the first digital port in one or more weight vectors included in a codebook set; wherein the first index is a codebook index on a first dimension, and the second index is a codebook index on a second dimension, and in the one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set, each weight vector is determined by a weight on the first dimension and a weight on the second dimension;
  • the first information includes a third index, and the third index is used to determine a first weight vector of the first digital port among one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set.
  • the first information can be implemented through any of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receiving second information, where the second information is used to determine the codebook set.
  • the codebook set is determined by port information of a virtual port in one or more digital ports, and the port information of the virtual port in any digital port includes at least one of the following:
  • the number of virtual ports included in the digital port is N 1 ;
  • the number of virtual ports on the first dimension of the digital port is M 1 ;
  • the number of virtual ports in the second dimension of the digital port is M 2 ;
  • the oversampling factor in the first dimension of the digital port is O 1 ;
  • the oversampling factor in the second dimension of the digital port is O 2 .
  • the terminal device can also receive the second information and determine a codebook set through the second information, and subsequently determine the weights of the N1 virtual ports in the first digital port in the codebook set based on the index indicated by the first information.
  • an index for example, a first index, a second index, a third index, etc.
  • the second information satisfies at least one of the following:
  • the second information includes port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port
  • the second information includes a fourth index, and the fourth index is used to determine the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port in the port information of one or more preconfigured or predefined virtual ports;
  • the second information includes a fifth index, where the fifth index is used to determine the codebook set in one or more preconfigured or predefined codebook sets;
  • the second information is used to indicate some items in the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port, and other items in the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port are determined by the partial items and the port information of one or more pre-configured virtual ports;
  • the second information is used to indicate the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port, and the port information of the virtual port is used to determine the codebook set from one or more preconfigured or predefined codebook sets.
  • the second information can be implemented by at least one of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
  • the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information; wherein the M information is respectively used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports; one of the M information is The first information; the K pieces of information are respectively used to determine the first weight vector of the digital ports included in each digital port group in the K groups of digital ports, wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports in the M digital ports, and K is a positive integer less than or equal to M; one of the K pieces of information is the first information.
  • the measurement information sent by the terminal device may include M information and/or K information.
  • the network device can determine the first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports through the M information and/or the K information.
  • the measurement information satisfies any of the following:
  • the measurement information includes the M pieces of information
  • the measurement information includes the K pieces of information
  • the measurement information includes the M pieces of information
  • the measurement information includes the K pieces of information.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives indication information indicating that the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information. In this way, the terminal device and the network device can clearly understand the information content carried by the measurement information.
  • the indication information is carried in configuration information of a reference signal, or is other message/information/signaling, etc., which is not limited here.
  • port information of virtual ports of different digital ports is the same.
  • the K pieces of information are respectively used to determine the first weight vector of the digital ports included in each digital port group in the K groups of digital ports, wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports in the M digital ports.
  • the port information of the virtual ports of different digital ports is the same. In this way, the feedback process of the measurement information can be simplified and the implementation complexity can be reduced.
  • the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first carrier, the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in M digital ports corresponding to the first carrier, and the first carrier includes one or more carriers;
  • the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first BWP, and the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port among M digital ports corresponding to the first BWP, and the first BWP includes one or more BWPs;
  • the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first bandwidth, and the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports corresponding to the first bandwidth, and the first bandwidth includes one or more sub-bands.
  • the measurement information can be used to determine the first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports corresponding to one or more carriers (or, one or more BWPs, or one or more subbands) to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
  • the reference signal is sent through L 1 first weights in L 1 time units respectively, where L 1 is an integer greater than 1; the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained through the i-th second weight and the third weight among the L 1 second weights, the L 1 second weights are orthogonal, and the value of i is 1 to L 1 .
  • the measurement information obtained by the terminal device based on the reference signal measurement may include the first information corresponding to the first digital port, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port.
  • the L 1 second weights corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports on the L 1 time units are orthogonal. In this way, after the terminal device measures the reference signal carried by the L 1 time units to obtain the measurement result, the terminal device can determine the better (or optimal) weight of the virtual port in the first digital port based on the measurement result, and indicate the weight through the first information, and the subsequent network device can communicate with the terminal device based on the weight.
  • the network device when the antenna array is large, the network device sends reference signals based on orthogonal second weights at different time units (generally, reference signals sent based on different weights can be understood as reference signals sent based on different beams).
  • the terminal device can determine and indicate a better (or optimal) weight based on the measurement results of different time units, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.
  • the terminal device can determine a better (or optimal) weight of the virtual port in the first digital port based on the measurement result and a mathematical method.
  • the mathematical method may include power maximization criteria, capacity maximization criteria, etc.
  • each time unit can be one or more symbols, one or more mini-slots, one or more time slots, one or more subframes, etc.
  • the L 1 time units are continuous in the time domain. Since the channel information of different continuous time units in the time domain is highly correlated, in this way, the different measurement results corresponding to the reference signals of the L 1 time units of the terminal device can reflect the same or similar channel information as much as possible, so as to obtain more accurate measurement information.
  • At least two time units among the L 1 time units are discontinuous in the time domain.
  • the reference signal is sent through L1 first weights in L1 time units respectively, and it can be understood that L1 time units correspond to L1 first weights one by one.
  • the weight of the reference signal in the i-th time unit in the L1 time units is the i-th first weight in the L1 first weights.
  • the reference signal on each time unit can be regarded as one reference signal, that is, "the reference signal carried on L 1 time units" can be regarded as L 1 reference signals. Accordingly, the above method can be performed once or multiple times, that is, the sending and receiving process of one or more L 1 reference signals is respectively implemented through one or more L 1 time units.
  • the reference signal on each L 1 time unit can be regarded as one reference signal, that is, "the reference signal carried on L 1 time unit" can be regarded as 1 reference signal. Accordingly, the above method can be performed once or multiple times, that is, the sending and receiving process of one or more reference signals is respectively implemented through one or more L 1 time units.
  • L1 second weights are orthogonal, which can be understood as any two second weights in the L1 second weights are mutually orthogonal, or different second weights in the L1 second weights are orthogonal to each other. It should be understood that L1 second weights are orthogonal, and the i-th first weight in the L1 first weights is obtained by the i-th second weight in the L1 second weights and the third weight. In other words, the L1 first weights are obtained based on the L1 second weights. Among them, the different weights in the L1 first weights can be orthogonal or non-orthogonal, which is not limited here.
  • the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained by the i-th second weight among the L 1 second weights and the third weight, including: the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained by multiplying the N 1 elements of the i-th second weight among the L 1 second weights by the N 1 sub-vectors in the third weight.
  • the reference signal is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein a weight corresponding to a first digital port among the M digital ports in the L 1 time units is the L 1 first weights; the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, the second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, and N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the weights of the M digital ports sending reference signals may be the same (for example, all are the L 1 first weights), or, the weights of the M digital ports sending reference signals may be different from each other (for example, the weight corresponding to the first digital port is the L 1 first weights, while the weights corresponding to other digital ports are different from the L 1 first weights), or, the weights of the M digital ports sending reference signals may be partially the same (for example, the weight corresponding to the first digital port is the L 1 first weights, while the weights corresponding to some of the other digital ports are different from the L 1 first weights, and the weights corresponding to another part of the other digital ports are the same as the L 1 first weights).
  • the second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, and in the L 1 second weights, the number of elements included in each second weight is N 1.
  • each second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports.
  • different second weights can be orthogonal, so in the L 1 second weights, the N 1 elements included in different second weights are not completely the same.
  • virtual port can be replaced by other terms, such as analog port, virtual subarray, analog subarray, subarray, etc.
  • the reference signal is sent through L 1 first weights in L 1 time units respectively, and the L 1 first weights can be the weights of the first digital port among the M digital ports.
  • the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and the second weights include N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, that is, the corresponding L 1 second weights of the virtual ports included in the first digital port in the L 1 time units are orthogonal. In this way, the weights of the virtual ports included in the same digital port in different time units are orthogonal.
  • L 1 is an integer multiple of N 1.
  • N 1 is equal to L 1 .
  • the frequency domain resources occupied by the N 1 virtual ports in different time units of the L 1 time units are the same. In this way, the implementation complexity of sending and receiving reference signals in different time units can be reduced as much as possible.
  • the terminal device may also receive indication information indicating that the number of virtual ports included in the first digital port is N 1 , and/or, the terminal device may also receive indication information indicating that the number of time units of the reference signal is L 1. These two indication information may be carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or may be carried in other information/messages/signaling, which is not limited here.
  • N 1 and L 1 are pre-configured information and are not limited here.
  • a digital port includes one or more virtual ports (for example, a first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and a second digital port described later includes N 2 virtual ports, etc.), and it can be understood that the signal of the digital port is sent and received through the one or more virtual ports.
  • the digital port sends the signal through the one or more virtual ports; for another example, in the process of signal reception, the signal received by one or more virtual ports can be understood as the signal received by the digital port.
  • the N1 virtual ports respectively correspond to N1 antenna array sets
  • each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays
  • the N1 elements are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N1 antenna array sets.
  • the N 1 virtual ports refer to virtual ports for sending reference signals (i.e., virtual ports of network devices), and accordingly, the N 1 antenna array sets corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports are antenna array sets for sending reference signals (i.e., antenna array sets of network devices).
  • N 1 virtual ports correspond to N 1 antenna array sets respectively, which can be understood as, N 1 virtual ports correspond to N 1 antenna array sets one-to-one, or, the i-th virtual port in the N 1 virtual ports corresponds to the i-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • N 1 elements are respectively used to adjust the phase of the N 1 antenna array sets, which can be understood as, N 1 elements correspond to N 1 antenna array sets one-to-one, or, the i-th element in the N 1 elements is used to adjust the phase of the i-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set, and i ranges from 1 to N 1 .
  • the N 1 virtual ports included in the first digital port correspond to N 1 antenna array sets respectively, and the N 1 elements included in the second weights are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays.
  • the N 1 elements included in the second weights are used to adjust the phases of the antenna arrays corresponding to different virtual ports in the digital port, that is, the L 1 orthogonal second weights are used to achieve orthogonal phases of the antenna arrays corresponding to different virtual ports.
  • the third weight includes N 1 subvectors, a dimension of a P th subvector in the N 1 subvectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays in a P th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets, and a value of P is 1 to N 1 .
  • the dimension of the Pth sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors included in the third weight is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the Pth antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • the third weight can correspond to the weight of each antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • the N 1 elements included in the second weight are respectively used to adjust the phase of the N 1 antenna array set
  • the third weight includes N 1 subvectors and is also used to adjust the phase of the N 1 antenna array set
  • the first weight is also used to adjust the phase of the N 1 antenna array set.
  • the phase of the N 1 antenna array set can be determined based on the N 1 elements included in the second weight and the first weight determined by the N 1 subvectors included in the third weight.
  • the third weight may be determined by other reference signals.
  • the terminal device may feed back multiple signal quality information based on the different beams.
  • the network device may determine the third weight based on the signal quality information with the best signal quality among the multiple signal quality information, or the network device may determine the third weight based on the signal quality information greater than a threshold among the multiple signal quality information, or the network device may determine the third weight based on the quality of one or more reference signals fed back by the terminal (for example, RSRP).
  • the first weight and the third weight have the same dimension.
  • the first weight and the third weight have the same dimension, that is, the first weight used to send the reference signal can determine the weight of each antenna element set in the N1 antenna element sets.
  • the value of M is 1.
  • the reference signal when the value of M is 1, the reference signal can be sent through a digital port (i.e., the first digital port), so that the solution is suitable for the scenario where the network device is configured with a single digital port, and the transmission and measurement of the reference signal of the virtual port contained in the single digital port can be realized.
  • the value of M is greater than 1, wherein the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the following:
  • time domain resources and frequency domain resources used by different digital ports among the M digital ports to send the reference signal are the same, and different digital ports among the M digital ports are code division multiplexed;
  • time domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different (optionally, different digital ports among the M digital ports are not code-division multiplexed);
  • the M digital ports belong to Q groups of digital ports, each group of digital ports includes one or more digital ports.
  • Q is a positive integer; wherein the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different groups of digital ports in the Q groups of digital ports are different, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports in the Q groups of digital ports are the same, and the sending of the one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports is code division multiplexing (CDM).
  • CDM code division multiplexing
  • the code division multiplexing type of the one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports is frequency domain code division multiplexing.
  • the reference signal resource refers to the resource used to carry the reference signal, that is, the reference signal resource can be the resource for the network device to send the reference signal, or the reference signal resource can be the resource for the terminal device to receive the reference signal.
  • weight vector weight, weighted value, weighted vector, etc.
  • first weight vector can be replaced with "weight”, such as the seventh weight.
  • second weight vector described later can also be replaced with "weight”, such as the eighth weight.
  • weight in the first weight, the third weight, the fourth weight, and the sixth weight can also be replaced with a simulated weight.
  • the reference signal when the value of M is greater than 1, the reference signal can be sent through two or more digital ports (i.e., the first digital port and other digital ports), so that the solution is applicable to the scenario where the network device is configured with two or more digital ports, and realizes the transmission and measurement of the reference signal of the virtual port included in the two or more digital ports.
  • the resource of the reference signal meets one of the above items to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receiving indication information indicating that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the items.
  • the indication information is carried in configuration information of a reference signal, or is other message/information/signaling, etc., which is not limited here.
  • the terminal device can also receive indication information indicating that the resource of the reference signal meets one of the items, so that the terminal device can clarify the resource configuration method of different digital ports among the M digital ports based on the indication information.
  • the terminal device determines through preconfiguration that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the above items.
  • a second digital port among the M digital ports includes N 2 virtual ports; wherein the reference signal is sent through L 2 fourth weights in L 2 time units respectively, and L 2 is an integer greater than 1; the j-th fourth weight among the L 2 fourth weights is obtained through the j-th fifth weight and the sixth weight among the L 2 fifth weights, and the L 2 fifth weights are orthogonal.
  • the reference signal received by the terminal device is sent through L 2 fourth weights in L 2 time units, and the j-th fourth weight among the L 2 fourth weights is obtained through the j-th fifth weight and the sixth weight among the L 2 fifth weights, and the L 2 fifth weights are orthogonal.
  • the reference signal transmitted in L 2 time units is sent through L 2 fifth weights that are orthogonal to each other.
  • the terminal device's measurements of the reference signals carried on different time units are relatively independent, and then L 1 relatively independent channel information is obtained to obtain measurement information with higher accuracy.
  • L1 first weights and L2 fourth weights may be the same; when the weights of the reference signals sent by the first digital port and the second digital port are different, the L1 first weights are different from the L2 fourth weights.
  • L1 is equal to L2 .
  • L1 time units and L2 time units may be the same time units, that is, the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by the first digital port among the M digital ports and the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by the second digital port may be the same. In this way, the same time unit can be reused as much as possible to save communication resources and reduce implementation complexity.
  • N1 is equal to N2 . That is, the number of virtual ports included in the first digital port and the number of virtual ports included in the second digital port among the M digital ports may be the same. In this way, the implementation complexity can be reduced.
  • the implementation process of the second digital port can refer to the implementation process of the first digital port in the foregoing text.
  • the correspondence between L2 time units and L2 fourth weights can refer to the correspondence between L1 time units and L1 first weights
  • the correspondence between L2 fourth weights and L2 fifth weights can refer to the correspondence between L1 first weights and L1 second weights, etc.
  • the time domain resources and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, and when different digital ports are code division multiplexed, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports include the same M frequency domain units in the frequency domain.
  • M is greater than 1, and the time domain resources and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, and when different digital ports are code division multiplexed, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports in the frequency domain all include the same M frequency domain units.
  • different digital ports can send reference signals in a code division multiplexed manner on the same frequency domain unit, and the same frequency domain unit can be reused as much as possible to save communication resources and reduce implementation complexity.
  • each frequency domain unit may include one or more subcarriers/resource elements (RE).
  • RE subcarriers/resource elements
  • the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and in the case of no code division multiplexing (no CDM) by different digital ports among the M digital ports, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports include M different frequency domain units in the frequency domain.
  • M is greater than 1, and the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and when different digital ports among the M digital ports are not code-division multiplexed, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports include M frequency domain units that are different from each other in the frequency domain. In this way, different digital ports can send reference signals on different frequency domain resources without code-division multiplexing, which can improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives indication information indicating the M different frequency domain units, so that the terminal device specifies the resource location of each frequency domain unit based on the indication information.
  • the indication information is carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or other messages/information/signaling, etc., which are not limited here.
  • the second aspect of the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a network device, or the method is executed by some components in the network device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the network device functions.
  • the communication method is described as an example of being executed by a network device.
  • the network device sends a reference signal, which is sent through M digital ports, M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port of the M digital ports includes N 1 virtual ports, N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the network device receives measurement information, and the measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, and the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports.
  • the reference signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, so that the reference signal received by the terminal device can carry the channel information of the wireless channel; thereafter, the measurement information obtained by the terminal device through measuring the reference signal can reflect the channel information, and the subsequent way in which the terminal device sends the measurement information can enable the network device to obtain the measurement result of the channel between the network device and the terminal device based on the measurement information.
  • the measurement information obtained by the terminal device based on the reference signal includes the first information corresponding to the first digital port, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port.
  • the network device can determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port based on the first information. Compared with the way in which the network device obtains the weights of the digital port based on the measurement information fed back by the terminal device, since the first digital port contains the N 1 virtual ports, the network device can determine a finer-grained weight based on the first information.
  • the terminal device can determine and indicate a finer-grained weight based on the measurement result of the reference signal, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing the beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.
  • the weights of the N1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through a first weight vector, and the first weight vector includes N1 elements; wherein the N1 virtual ports respectively correspond to N1 antenna array sets, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays, and the N1 elements are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N1 antenna array sets.
  • the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port of the network device are obtained by the first weight vector, and the weights of the N 1 virtual ports are obtained by the first weight vector including N 1 elements, and the N 1 elements are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • the reference signal can be sent at different virtual ports.
  • the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through a first weight vector, including: the weights of the N 1 virtual ports are obtained through the first weight vector and a second weight vector, and the second weight vector includes N 1 sub-vectors; wherein a dimension of a T-th sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays of a T-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set, and a value of T is 1 to N 1 .
  • the dimension of the T-th subvector in the N 1 subvectors included in the first weight vector is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the T-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • the first weight vector can correspond to the weight of each antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • the first information satisfies any of the following:
  • the first information includes a quantization processing result of the first weight vector
  • the first information includes one element of the N 1 elements corresponding to one of the N 1 virtual ports, and a quantization processing result corresponding to a difference between N 1 -1 elements of the N 1 elements corresponding to other N 1 -1 virtual ports except the one of the virtual ports and the one element;
  • the first information includes a first index and a second index, and the first index and the second index are used to determine a first weight vector of the first digital port in one or more weight vectors included in a codebook set; wherein the first index is a codebook index on a first dimension, and the second index is a codebook index on a second dimension, and in the one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set, each weight vector is determined by a weight on the first dimension and a weight on the second dimension;
  • the first information includes a third index, and the third index is used to determine a first weight vector of the first digital port among one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set.
  • the first information can be implemented through any of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receiving second information, where the second information is used to determine the codebook set.
  • the codebook set is determined by port information of a virtual port in one or more digital ports, and the port information of the virtual port in any digital port includes at least one of the following:
  • the number of virtual ports included in the digital port is N 1 ;
  • the number of virtual ports on the first dimension of the digital port is M 1 ;
  • the number of virtual ports in the second dimension of the digital port is M 2 ;
  • the oversampling factor in the first dimension of the digital port is O 1 ;
  • the oversampling factor in the second dimension of the digital port is O 2 .
  • the terminal device can also receive the second information and determine a codebook set through the second information, and subsequently determine the weights of the N1 virtual ports in the first digital port in the codebook set based on the index indicated by the first information.
  • an index for example, a first index, a second index, a third index, etc.
  • the second information satisfies at least one of the following:
  • the second information includes port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port
  • the second information includes a fourth index, and the fourth index is used to determine the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port in the port information of one or more preconfigured or predefined virtual ports;
  • the second information includes a fifth index, where the fifth index is used to determine the codebook set in one or more preconfigured or predefined codebook sets;
  • the second information is used to indicate some items in the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port, and other items in the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port are determined by the partial items and the port information of one or more pre-configured virtual ports;
  • the second information is used to indicate the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port, and the port information of the virtual port is used to determine the codebook set from one or more preconfigured or predefined codebook sets.
  • the second information can be implemented by at least one of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
  • the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information; wherein the M information is respectively used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports; one of the M information is the first information; the K information is respectively used to determine a first weight vector of a digital port included in each digital port group in K groups of digital ports, wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports in the M digital ports, and K is a positive integer less than or equal to M; one of the K information is the first information.
  • the measurement information sent by the terminal device may include M information and/or K information.
  • the network device can determine the first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports through the M information and/or the K information.
  • the measurement information satisfies any of the following:
  • the measurement information includes the M pieces of information
  • the measurement information includes the K pieces of information
  • the measurement information packet Enclose the M information
  • the measurement information includes the K pieces of information.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives indication information indicating that the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information. In this way, the terminal device and the network device can clearly understand the information content carried by the measurement information.
  • the indication information is carried in configuration information of a reference signal, or is other message/information/signaling, etc., which is not limited here.
  • port information of virtual ports of different digital ports is the same.
  • the K pieces of information are respectively used to determine the first weight vector of the digital ports included in each digital port group in the K groups of digital ports, wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports in the M digital ports.
  • the port information of the virtual ports of different digital ports is the same. In this way, the feedback process of the measurement information can be simplified and the implementation complexity can be reduced.
  • the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first carrier, the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in M digital ports corresponding to the first carrier, and the first carrier includes one or more carriers;
  • the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first bandwidth part (bandwidth part, BWP), and the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in M digital ports corresponding to the first BWP, and the first BWP includes one or more BWPs;
  • BWP bandwidth part
  • the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first bandwidth, and the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports corresponding to the first bandwidth, and the first bandwidth includes one or more sub-bands.
  • the measurement information can be used to determine the first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports corresponding to one or more carriers (or, one or more BWPs, or one or more subbands) to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
  • the reference signal is sent through L 1 first weights in L 1 time units respectively, where L 1 is an integer greater than 1; the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained through the i-th second weight and the third weight among the L 1 second weights, the L 1 second weights are orthogonal, and the value of i is 1 to L 1 .
  • the measurement information obtained by the terminal device based on the reference signal measurement may include the first information corresponding to the first digital port, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port.
  • the L 1 second weights corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports on the L 1 time units are orthogonal. In this way, after the terminal device measures the reference signal carried by the L 1 time units to obtain the measurement result, the terminal device can determine the better (or optimal) weight of the virtual port in the first digital port based on the measurement result, and indicate the weight through the first information, and the subsequent network device can communicate with the terminal device based on the weight.
  • the network device when the antenna array is large, the network device sends reference signals based on orthogonal second weights at different time units (generally, reference signals sent based on different weights can be understood as reference signals sent based on different beams).
  • the terminal device can determine and indicate a better (or optimal) weight based on the measurement results of different time units, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.
  • the terminal device can determine a better (or optimal) weight of the virtual port in the first digital port based on the measurement result and a mathematical method.
  • the mathematical method may include power maximization criteria, capacity maximization criteria, etc.
  • each time unit can be one or more symbols, one or more mini-slots, one or more time slots, one or more subframes, etc.
  • the L 1 time units are continuous in the time domain. Since the channel information of different continuous time units in the time domain is highly correlated, in this way, the different measurement results corresponding to the reference signals of the L 1 time units of the terminal device can reflect the same or similar channel information as much as possible, so as to obtain more accurate measurement information.
  • At least two time units among the L 1 time units are discontinuous in the time domain.
  • the reference signal is sent through L1 first weights in L1 time units respectively, and it can be understood that L1 time units correspond to L1 first weights one by one.
  • the weight of the reference signal in the i-th time unit in the L1 time units is the i-th first weight in the L1 first weights.
  • the reference signal on each time unit can be regarded as one reference signal, that is, "the reference signal carried on L 1 time units" It can be regarded as L 1 reference signals. Accordingly, the above method can be performed once or multiple times, that is, the sending and receiving process of one or more L 1 reference signals can be implemented respectively through one or more L 1 time units.
  • the reference signal on each L 1 time unit can be regarded as one reference signal, that is, "the reference signal carried on L 1 time unit" can be regarded as 1 reference signal. Accordingly, the above method can be performed once or multiple times, that is, the sending and receiving process of one or more reference signals is respectively implemented through one or more L 1 time units.
  • the L1 second weights are orthogonal, and the i-th first weight among the L1 first weights is obtained by the i-th second weight among the L1 second weights and the third weight.
  • the L1 first weights are obtained based on the L1 second weights.
  • different weights in the L1 first weights may be orthogonal or non-orthogonal, which is not limited here.
  • the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained by the i-th second weight among the L 1 second weights and the third weight, including: the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained by multiplying the N 1 elements of the i-th second weight among the L 1 second weights by the N 1 sub-vectors in the third weight.
  • the reference signal is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein the weight corresponding to the first digital port among the M digital ports in the L 1 time units is the L 1 first weights; the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and the second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, where N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the virtual port can be replaced by other terms, such as analog port, virtual sub-array, analog sub-array, sub-array, etc.
  • the reference signal is sent through L 1 first weights in L 1 time units respectively, and the L 1 first weights can be the weights of the first digital port among the M digital ports.
  • the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and the second weights include N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, that is, the corresponding L 1 second weights of the virtual ports included in the first digital port in the L 1 time units are orthogonal. In this way, the weights of the virtual ports included in the same digital port in different time units are orthogonal.
  • L 1 is an integer multiple of N 1.
  • N 1 is equal to L 1 .
  • the frequency domain resources occupied by the N 1 virtual ports in different time units of the L 1 time units are the same. In this way, the implementation complexity of sending and receiving reference signals in different time units can be reduced as much as possible.
  • the terminal device may also receive indication information indicating that the number of virtual ports included in the first digital port is N 1 , and/or, the terminal device may also receive indication information indicating that the number of time units of the reference signal is L 1. These two indication information may be carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or may be carried in other information/messages/signaling, which is not limited here.
  • N 1 and L 1 are pre-configured information and are not limited here.
  • a digital port includes one or more virtual ports (for example, a first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and a second digital port described later includes N 2 virtual ports, etc.), and it can be understood that the signal of the digital port is sent and received through the one or more virtual ports.
  • the digital port sends the signal through the one or more virtual ports; for another example, in the process of signal reception, the signal received by one or more virtual ports can be understood as the signal received by the digital port.
  • the N1 virtual ports correspond to N1 antenna array sets respectively, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays, and the N1 elements are used to adjust the phases of the N1 antenna array sets respectively.
  • the N 1 virtual ports included in the first digital port correspond to N 1 antenna array sets respectively, and the N 1 elements included in the second weights are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays.
  • the N 1 elements included in the second weights are used to adjust the phases of the antenna arrays corresponding to different virtual ports in the digital port, that is, the L 1 orthogonal second weights are used to achieve orthogonal phases of the antenna arrays corresponding to different virtual ports.
  • the third weight includes N 1 subvectors, a dimension of a P th subvector in the N 1 subvectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays in a P th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets, and a value of P is 1 to N 1 .
  • the dimension of the Pth sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors included in the third weight is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the Pth antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • the third weight can correspond to the weight of each antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • the first weight and the third weight have the same dimension.
  • the first weight and the third weight have the same dimension, that is, the first weight used to send the reference signal can determine the weight of each antenna element set in the N1 antenna element sets.
  • the value of M is 1.
  • the reference signal when the value of M is 1, the reference signal can be sent through a digital port (i.e., the first digital port), so that the solution is suitable for the scenario where the network device is configured with a single digital port, and the transmission and measurement of the reference signal of the virtual port contained in the single digital port can be realized.
  • the value of M is greater than 1, wherein the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the following:
  • time domain resources and frequency domain resources used by different digital ports among the M digital ports to send the reference signal are the same, and different digital ports among the M digital ports are code division multiplexed;
  • time domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and different digital ports among the M digital ports are not code-division multiplexed;
  • the M digital ports belong to Q groups of digital ports, each group of digital ports includes one or more digital ports, and Q is a positive integer; wherein the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different groups of digital ports in the Q groups of digital ports are different, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports in the Q groups of digital ports are the same, and the one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports send code division multiplexing (code division multiplexing, CDM).
  • code division multiplexing type of the one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports is frequency domain code division multiplexing.
  • the reference signal when the value of M is greater than 1, the reference signal can be sent through two or more digital ports (i.e., the first digital port and other digital ports), so that the solution is applicable to the scenario where the network device is configured with two or more digital ports, and realizes the transmission and measurement of the reference signal of the virtual port included in the two or more digital ports.
  • the resource of the reference signal meets one of the above items to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
  • the method further includes: the network device sending indication information indicating that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the items.
  • the indication information is carried in configuration information of a reference signal, or is other message/information/signaling, etc., which is not limited here.
  • the network device may also send indication information indicating that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the items, so that the terminal device can clearly understand the resource configuration mode of different digital ports among the M digital ports based on the indication information.
  • the terminal device/network device determines through preconfiguration that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the above items.
  • a second digital port among the M digital ports includes N 2 virtual ports; wherein the reference signal is sent through L 2 fourth weights in L 2 time units respectively, and L 2 is an integer greater than 1; the j-th fourth weight among the L 2 fourth weights is obtained through the j-th fifth weight and the sixth weight among the L 2 fifth weights, and the L 2 fifth weights are orthogonal.
  • the reference signal received by the terminal device is sent through L 2 fourth weights in L 2 time units, and the j-th fourth weight among the L 2 fourth weights is obtained through the j-th fifth weight and the sixth weight among the L 2 fifth weights, and the L 2 fifth weights are orthogonal.
  • the reference signal transmitted in L 2 time units is sent through L 2 fifth weights that are orthogonal to each other.
  • the terminal device's measurements of the reference signals carried on different time units are relatively independent, and then L 1 relatively independent channel information is obtained to obtain measurement information with higher accuracy.
  • L1 is equal to L2 .
  • L1 time units and L2 time units may be the same time units, that is, the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by the first digital port among the M digital ports and the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by the second digital port may be the same. In this way, the same time unit can be reused as much as possible to save communication resources and reduce implementation complexity.
  • N1 is equal to N2 . That is, the number of virtual ports included in the first digital port and the number of virtual ports included in the second digital port among the M digital ports may be the same. In this way, the implementation complexity can be reduced.
  • the implementation process of the second digital port can refer to the implementation process of the first digital port in the foregoing text.
  • the correspondence between L2 time units and L2 fourth weights can refer to the correspondence between L1 time units and L1 first weights
  • the correspondence between L2 fourth weights and L2 fifth weights can refer to the correspondence between L1 first weights and L1 second weights, etc.
  • the time domain resources and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, and when different digital ports are code division multiplexed, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports include the same M frequency domain units in the frequency domain.
  • M is greater than 1, and the time domain resources and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, and when different digital ports are code division multiplexed, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports are different in the frequency domain. All of them include the same M frequency domain units. In this way, different digital ports can send reference signals in a code division multiplexing manner on the same frequency domain unit, and the same frequency domain unit can be reused as much as possible to save communication resources and reduce implementation complexity.
  • each frequency domain unit may include one or more subcarriers/resource elements (RE).
  • RE subcarriers/resource elements
  • the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and in the case of no code division multiplexing (no CDM) by different digital ports among the M digital ports, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports include M different frequency domain units in the frequency domain.
  • M is greater than 1, and the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and when different digital ports among the M digital ports are not code-division multiplexed, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports include M frequency domain units that are different from each other in the frequency domain. In this way, different digital ports can send reference signals on different frequency domain resources without code-division multiplexing, which can improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends indication information indicating the M different frequency domain units, so that the terminal device specifies the resource location of each frequency domain unit based on the indication information.
  • the indication information is carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or other messages/information/signaling, etc., which are not limited here.
  • a communication device which is a terminal device, or the device is a partial component in the terminal device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the terminal device.
  • the communication device is described as an example of executing the terminal device.
  • the device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit; the transceiver unit is used to receive a reference signal, which is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port among the M digital ports includes N1 virtual ports, where N1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the processing unit is used to determine measurement information, and the transceiver unit is also used to send measurement information, the measurement information including first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N1 channel information, the N1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signals sent by the N1 virtual ports, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N1 virtual ports in the first digital port.
  • the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the first aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
  • the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the first aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
  • a communication device which is a network device, or the device is a partial component in the network device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the network device functions.
  • the communication device is described as an example of a network device.
  • the device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit; the processing unit is used to determine a reference signal, and the transceiver unit is used to send the reference signal, the reference signal is sent through M digital ports, M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port among the M digital ports includes N1 virtual ports, N1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the transceiver unit is also used to receive measurement information, the measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N1 channel information, and the N1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signals sent by the N1 virtual ports.
  • the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the second aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
  • the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the second aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
  • the present application provides a communication device, comprising at least one processor, wherein the at least one processor is coupled to a memory; the memory is used to store programs or instructions; the at least one processor is used to execute the program or instructions so that the device implements the method described in any possible implementation method of any one of the first to second aspects.
  • the present application provides a communication device, comprising at least one logic circuit and an input/output interface; the logic circuit is used to execute the method described in any possible implementation method of any one of the first to second aspects above.
  • a seventh aspect of the present application provides a communication system, which includes the above-mentioned first communication device and second communication device.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is used to store one or more computer-executable instructions.
  • the processor executes a method as described in any possible implementation of any one of the first to second aspects above.
  • a ninth aspect of the present application provides a computer program product (or computer program).
  • the processor executes the method described in any possible implementation of any one of the first to second aspects above.
  • the present application provides a chip system, which includes at least one processor for supporting a communication device to implement the method described in any possible implementation of any one of the first to second aspects.
  • the chip system may also include a memory for storing program instructions and data necessary for the communication device.
  • the chip system may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices.
  • the chip system also includes an interface circuit, which provides program instructions and/or data for the at least one processor.
  • the technical effects brought about by any design method in the third aspect to the tenth aspect can refer to the technical effects brought about by the different design methods in the above-mentioned first aspect to the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG1a is a schematic diagram of a signal transmission method involved in the present application.
  • FIG1b is another schematic diagram of a signal transmission method involved in the present application.
  • FIG1c is another schematic diagram of a signal transmission method involved in the present application.
  • FIG1d is a schematic diagram of a signal transmission process involved in the present application.
  • FIG. 1e is another schematic diagram of the signal transmission process involved in the present application.
  • FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a communication system involved in the present application.
  • FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided by the present application.
  • FIG4a is a schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application.
  • FIG4b is another schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application.
  • FIG5 is another schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application.
  • FIG6 is another schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application.
  • FIG7 is another schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application.
  • FIG8 is another schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application.
  • FIG9 is another schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application.
  • FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided by the present application.
  • FIG11 is another schematic diagram of a communication device provided by the present application.
  • FIG12 is another schematic diagram of a communication device provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is another schematic diagram of the communication device provided in the present application.
  • Configuration and pre-configuration In this application, configuration and pre-configuration will be used at the same time. Configuration refers to the base station or server and other network devices sending some parameter configuration information or parameter values to the terminal through messages or signaling, so that the terminal can determine the communication parameters or resources during transmission based on these values or information. Pre-configuration is similar to configuration. It can be a method in which a base station or server and other network devices send parameter information or values to the terminal through a communication link or carrier; it can also be a definition of corresponding parameters or parameter values given in the standard, or by setting the relevant parameters or values in the terminal device in advance. This application does not limit this. Furthermore, these values and parameters can be changed or updated.
  • used for indication may include being used for direct indication and being used for indirect indication.
  • the indication information carries A, directly indicates A, or indirectly indicates A.
  • the information indicated by the indication information is called the information to be indicated.
  • the information to be indicated there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated, for example, it can be implemented by direct indication, such as by indicating the information to be indicated itself or the index of the information to be indicated. It can also be implemented by indicating other information to be indirectly indicated, where there is an association between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only part of the information to be indicated, while the other part of the information to be indicated is known or agreed in advance.
  • the indication of specific information can also be achieved by using the arrangement order of each information agreed in advance (for example, stipulated by the protocol), thereby reducing the indication overhead to a certain extent.
  • the information to be indicated can be sent as a whole, or divided into multiple sub-information and sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending time of these sub-information can be the same or different.
  • the specific sending method is not limited in this application.
  • the sending period and/or sending time of these sub-information can be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to the protocol, or configured by the transmitting device by sending configuration information to the receiving device.
  • the configuration information can include, for example, but not limited to, one or a combination of at least two of radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling, media access control (media access control, MAC) layer signaling and physical layer signaling.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC media access control
  • MAC layer signaling for example, includes MAC control element (control element, CE); physical layer signaling, for example, includes downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI).
  • Reference signal also known as pilot signal.
  • RS pilot signal
  • RE resource elements
  • uplink communication may include transmission of uplink physical channels and uplink signals.
  • uplink physical channels include random access channel (PRACH), uplink control channel (PUCCH), uplink data channel (PUSCH), etc.
  • uplink signals include sounding reference signal (SRS), uplink control channel demodulation reference signal (PUCCH de-modulation reference signal, PUCCH-DMRS), uplink data channel demodulation reference signal (PUSCH de-modulation reference signal, PUSCH-DMRS), uplink phase noise tracking signal (PTRS), uplink positioning signal (uplink positioning RS), etc.
  • PRACH random access channel
  • PUCCH uplink control channel demodulation reference signal
  • PUCCH-DMRS uplink data channel demodulation reference signal
  • PUSCH de-DMRS uplink phase noise tracking signal
  • uplink positioning signal uplink positioning signal
  • downlink communication may include transmission of downlink physical channels and downlink signals.
  • the downlink physical channels include broadcast channel (physical broadcast channel, PBCH), downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH), downlink data channel (physical downlink shared channel, PDSCH), etc.
  • Downlink signals include primary synchronization signal (primary synchronization signal, PSS)/secondary synchronization signal (secondary synchronization signal, SSS), downlink control channel demodulation reference signal (PDCCH de-modulation reference signal, PDCCH-DMRS), downlink data channel demodulation reference signal (PDSCH de-modulation reference signal, PDSCH-DMRS), phase noise tracking signal PTRS, channel status information reference signal (channel status information reference signal, CSI-RS), cell reference signal (Cell reference signal, CRS), tracking reference signal (tracking reference signal, TRS), positioning reference signal (positioning RS), etc.
  • primary synchronization signal primary synchronization signal
  • PSS primary synchronization signal
  • SSS secondary synchronization signal
  • PDCCH-DMRS downlink control channel demodulation reference signal
  • PDSCH de-modulation reference signal downlink data channel demodulation reference signal
  • phase noise tracking signal PTRS phase noise tracking signal
  • channel status information reference signal channel status information reference signal
  • CSI-RS channel status information reference signal
  • system and “network” in the embodiments of the present application can be used interchangeably.
  • “At least one” means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist.
  • a and/or B can represent: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A and B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the objects associated with each other are in an “or” relationship.
  • “At least one of the following” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items.
  • At least one of A, B and C includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC or ABC.
  • the ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or importance of multiple objects.
  • “Send” and “receive” in the embodiments of the present application indicate the direction of signal transmission.
  • “send information to device X” can be understood as the destination of the information is device X, which can include direct sending through the air interface, and also include indirect sending through the air interface by other units or modules.
  • “Receive information from device Y” can be understood as the source of the information is device Y, which can include direct receiving from device Y through the air interface, and also include indirect receiving from device Y through the air interface from other units or modules.
  • “Send” can also be understood as the "output” of the chip interface, and “receive” can also be understood as the "input” of the chip interface.
  • entity A sends information to entity B
  • entity B receives information from entity A
  • entity B directly receives the information sent by entity A
  • entity B indirectly receives the information sent by entity A through other entities.
  • Bodies A and B may be radio access network (RAN) nodes or terminals, or modules inside RAN nodes or terminals.
  • RAN radio access network
  • the sending and receiving of information may be information interaction between a RAN node and a terminal, for example, information interaction between a base station and a terminal; the sending and receiving of information may also be information interaction between two RAN nodes, for example, information interaction between a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU); the sending and receiving of information may also be information interaction between different modules inside a device, for example, information interaction between a terminal chip and other modules of the terminal, or information interaction between a base station chip and other modules in the base station.
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • Precoding technology When the channel state is known, the transmitter can use a precoding matrix that matches the channel to process the signal to be transmitted and then transmit it, so that the precoded signal is adapted to the channel. Therefore, compared with the process of receiving the non-precoded signal and eliminating the influence between channels, the complexity of the process of receiving the precoded signal and eliminating the influence between channels is reduced. Therefore, by precoding the signal to be transmitted, the quality of the received signal (such as signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)) can be improved.
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • the use of precoding technology can also realize the transmission of the transmitter and multiple receivers on the same time-frequency resources, that is, multiple user multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) is realized.
  • MU-MIMO multiple user multiple input multiple output
  • the sending end may be a network device, and the receiving end may be a terminal device; or, the sending end may be a terminal device, and the receiving end may be a terminal device.
  • multiple input multiple output (MIMO) technology is used to increase system capacity and improve throughput.
  • y the received signal
  • H the channel information of the MIMO channel
  • x the transmitted signal
  • n the noise.
  • precoding is used to reduce system overhead and maximize the system capacity of MIMO on the one hand, and to reduce the complexity of the receiver to eliminate the impact between channels on the other hand.
  • P can be selected from a predefined set of matrices (or vectors), which is called a codebook.
  • the method is also called a codebook-based transmission method. If the transmitter can obtain all the information of H, then P can be obtained by itself at the transmitter. This method is also called a non-codebook transmission method (NCB).
  • NCB non-codebook transmission method
  • the transmitting end can also perform precoding in other ways. For example, when channel information (such as but not limited to the channel matrix) cannot be obtained, a pre-set precoding matrix or a weighted processing method is used for precoding. For the sake of brevity, the specific content is not repeated herein.
  • Precoding Matrix Indicator can be used to indicate the precoding matrix.
  • the precoding matrix can be, for example, a precoding matrix determined by the terminal device based on a channel matrix of a frequency domain unit.
  • the channel matrix can be determined by the terminal device through channel estimation or based on channel reciprocity.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to determine the precoding matrix is not limited to the above description.
  • the specific implementation method can be referred to in relevant literature. For the sake of brevity, it is not listed here one by one.
  • the precoding matrix can be obtained by performing singular value decomposition (SVD) on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix, or by performing eigenvalue decomposition (EVD) on the covariance matrix of the channel matrix.
  • SVD singular value decomposition
  • EVD eigenvalue decomposition
  • the network device can determine the channel state information (CSI) RS port, the frequency domain discrete Fourier transform (DFT) vector and the merging coefficient of the space-frequency vector used to construct the precoding vector based on the feedback of the terminal device, and then determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit.
  • the precoding matrix can be used directly for downlink data transmission; or it can be subjected to some beamforming methods, such as zero forcing (ZF), regularized zero-forcing (RZF), minimum mean squared error (MMSE), maximization of signal-to-leakage-and-noise (SLNR), etc., to obtain the final precoding matrix for downlink data transmission.
  • ZF zero forcing
  • RZF regularized zero-forcing
  • MMSE minimum mean squared error
  • SLNR maximization of signal-to-leakage-and-noise
  • the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device can be understood as the precoding matrix to be fed back.
  • the terminal device can indicate the precoding matrix to be fed back through a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), so that the network device can provide feedback based on the PMI. Restore the precoding matrix.
  • PMI precoding matrix indicator
  • the precoding matrix restored by the network device based on the PMI can be the same as or similar to the precoding matrix to be fed back.
  • Antenna port It can be referred to as port for short. It can be understood as a transmitting antenna identified by the receiving end, or a transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space.
  • An antenna port can be pre-configured for each virtual antenna. Each virtual antenna can be a weighted combination of multiple physical antennas. Each antenna port can correspond to a reference signal. Therefore, each antenna port can be called a reference signal port, for example, a CSI-RS port, a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), an SRS port, etc.
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • the antenna port is a logical concept, and there is generally no direct correspondence between an antenna port and a physical antenna.
  • the antenna port is usually associated with a reference signal, and its meaning can be understood as a transceiver interface on the channel that the reference signal passes through.
  • an antenna port may correspond to one or more antenna elements, which jointly send reference signals. The receiver can treat them as a whole without distinguishing these elements.
  • the antenna port may correspond to a beam. Similarly, the receiver only needs to regard this beam as an interface without distinguishing each element.
  • a port group may refer to a collection corresponding to multiple antenna ports.
  • One way is to group multiple digital ports of a network device to form multiple port groups.
  • a port group may be multiple digital ports corresponding to the same analog beam, also referred to as a port group, or a digital-analog port group.
  • a port group may be a collection of digital ports corresponding to multiple analog beams, also referred to as a port group, or a digital-analog port group.
  • multiple digital ports of the same analog beam are divided into multiple subsets, each of which is called a port group, or a digital-analog port group.
  • Channel state information (CSI) report In a wireless communication system, information used to describe the channel properties of a communication link reported by a receiving end (such as a terminal device) to a transmitting end (such as a network device).
  • a CSI report may include, but is not limited to, precoding matrix indication (PMI), rank indication (RI), channel quality indication (CQI), channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), CSI-RS resource indicator (CSI-RS resource indicator, CRI) and layer indicator (LI). It should be understood that the specific contents of the CSI listed above are only exemplary and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
  • CSI may include one or more of the above-listed items, and may also include other information used to characterize CSI in addition to the above-listed items, and the present application does not limit this.
  • Beam is a communication resource. Beam can be divided into transmit beam and receive beam.
  • the technology for forming beam can be beamforming technology or other technical means. Beamforming includes transmit beamforming and receive beamforming.
  • a beam is a communication resource.
  • a beam can be a wide beam, a narrow beam, or other types of beams.
  • the technology for forming a beam can be a beamforming technology or other technical means.
  • the beamforming technology can be specifically a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, and a hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology. Different beams can be considered as different resources.
  • the same information or different information can be sent through different beams.
  • multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics can be regarded as a beam.
  • a beam can include one or more antenna ports for transmitting data channels, control channels, and detection signals, etc.
  • a transmit beam can refer to the distribution of signal strength formed in different directions of space after the signal is transmitted by the antenna
  • a receive beam can refer to the distribution of signal strength of wireless signals received from the antenna in different directions of space.
  • one or more antenna ports that form a beam can also be regarded as an antenna port set.
  • the embodiment of the beam in the protocol can still be a spatial filter.
  • the transmitting end device transmits a signal with a certain beamforming weight, so that the transmitted signal forms a beam with spatial directivity.
  • the transmitting end device can be a terminal; in the downlink direction, the transmitting end device can be a network device.
  • Receive beam The receiving device receives the signal with a certain beamforming weight, so that the received signal forms a beam with spatial directivity.
  • the receiving device can be a network device; in the downlink direction, the receiving device can be a terminal.
  • Transmit beamforming When a transmitting device with an antenna array transmits a signal, a specific amplitude and phase are set on each antenna element of the antenna array so that the transmitted signal has a certain spatial directivity, that is, the signal power is high in some directions and low in some directions. The direction with the highest signal power is the direction of the transmit beam.
  • the antenna array includes multiple antenna elements, and the specific amplitude and phase attached are the beamforming weights.
  • Receive beamforming When a receiving device with an antenna array receives a signal, a specific amplitude and phase are set on each antenna element of the antenna array so that the power gain of the received signal has directionality, that is, the power gain is high when receiving signals in certain directions, and low when receiving signals in other directions.
  • the direction with the highest power gain when receiving a signal is the direction of the receive beam.
  • the antenna array includes multiple antenna elements, and the specific amplitude and phase added are the beamforming weights.
  • using a certain transmit beam to send a signal can be understood as using a certain beamforming weight to send a signal.
  • using a receiving beam to receive a signal may be understood as using a certain beamforming weight to receive a signal.
  • a beam pair is based on the concept of beams.
  • a beam pair usually includes a transmit beam of a transmitting device and a receive beam of a receiving device.
  • base stations and terminals in some frequency bands usually use large-scale array antennas (for example, from 500 to more than 1000 antenna units) to counteract the path loss caused by the increase in frequency band through higher array gain, thereby improving coverage capabilities.
  • array weighting methods that is, different beamforming methods
  • DBF digital beamforming
  • Each antenna unit or a group of antenna units is directly connected to a digital channel.
  • This structure is a typical structure of massive MIMO in the low-frequency band. Since each antenna signal is directly converted to the digital domain, the subsequent array weighting is performed in the digital domain, so it is called digital beamforming.
  • the digital domain has the highest degree of freedom in signal processing and can support very complex signal processing methods. Therefore, under the same array scale, the performance of the DBF architecture is also the best.
  • due to the high power consumption and cost of digital to analog converters (DAC)/analog to digital converters (ADC) (especially under large bandwidth conditions). Generally speaking, under the same array scale, the cost of DBF is also the highest.
  • ABF analog beamforming
  • Each antenna unit or a group of antenna units is connected to an analog phase shifter, and then multiple antenna units are combined in the analog domain and passed through a digital-to-analog/analog-to-digital converter.
  • the entire ABF array only corresponds to one digital-to-analog/analog-to-digital converter, so the biggest advantage of the ABF architecture is low cost and power consumption.
  • the bottleneck of ABF is also obvious.
  • the phase shifter setting in the analog domain determines the beam direction after beamforming. Since the signal is directly combined in the analog domain, it cannot be weighted by digital signal processing like DBF.
  • ABF must pre-configure the phase shifter setting during transmission and reception (that is, point the analog beam to the target terminal). This process needs to be completed through beam scanning during the link establishment phase, which brings additional delay. Generally, once the analog beam is blocked or moved to cause misalignment, the link quality of the system will rapidly degrade or even terminate, so the communication reliability of ABF is not as good as DBF.
  • HBF hybrid beamforming
  • FIG. 1c Another implementation method is hybrid beamforming (HBF), whose structure is shown in Figure 1c. It is an intermediate form between ABF and DBF.
  • the figure shows an example of a HBF architecture with 3 channels and 2 analog phase shifters for each channel.
  • HBF has a certain number of digital ports to support digital beamforming, and each digital port drives an ABF subarray.
  • the analog subarray driven by each digital channel is smaller (4 in Figure 1c vs. 6 in Figure 1b), so the beam is wider, the reliability is better, and the beam scanning overhead is smaller.
  • the ratio of HBF digital ports and analog phase shifters is inconsistent with different frequencies and system design requirements.
  • the number of digital ports in the high-frequency band is very small (4 to 16), and the analog phase shifters corresponding to a single digital channel are more (16 to 32), which is closer to ABF, while the digital ports of the low-frequency band system are more (32 to 128), and the analog phase shifters of a single digital channel are fewer (for example, 2 to 10).
  • both HBF and ABF architectures have analog beams.
  • the direction of the analog beam (determined by the beam weight) needs to be configured before sending and receiving.
  • Beam scanning is usually performed by the base station sending reference signals using different analog beam weights. The terminal measures the reference signals respectively and feeds back its measurement results to help the base station determine which beam has the best quality.
  • the pilot pattern refers to the mapping method of the pilot port in the time-frequency resource, including the arrangement method of the port time division and port frequency division and the corresponding scrambling code information.
  • the pilot configuration information includes at least one of the following: configuration parameter index, number of ports, density (indicating that a group of pilots is mapped in every 1/ ⁇ RB), code division multiplexing type (code division multiplexing type, CDM type), code division multiplexing group time-frequency information, code division multiplexing group index, frequency domain resource index information within the code division multiplexing group, frequency domain resource index information within the code division multiplexing group, and time domain resource index information within the code division multiplexing group.
  • the code division multiplexing type includes:
  • noCDM no code division multiplexing
  • Frequency domain code division denoted as -FD#, or fd-CDM#
  • # is a number, indicating that there are # ports in frequency domain code division in a CDM group.
  • Time domain code division denoted as -TD#, or td-CDM#
  • # is a number, indicating that there are # ports in time domain code division in a CDM group.
  • cdm4-FD2-TD2 means that there are 4 ports in a CDM group, which are multiplexed in 2 frequency division dimensions and 2 time division dimensions.
  • a CDM group which are multiplexed in 2 frequency division dimensions and 2 time division dimensions.
  • the CDM type defined in the protocol is 'cdm4-FD2-TD2'.
  • the orthogonal codes of the 4 ports in the group are shown in the four rows of information with index numbers 0-3 in Table 1.
  • wf frequency domain code division
  • wt time domain code division, each with two groups of orthogonal codes.
  • the frequency domain codes of port 0 and port 1 are orthogonal
  • the time domain codes of port 0 and port 2 are orthogonal
  • the time and frequency codes of port 0 and port 3 are orthogonal.
  • 0 ⁇ 3, 4 ⁇ 7 belong to two code division multiplexing groups respectively (physical meaning: the same time and frequency resources are occupied in the group, the ports are distinguished by code division, and the resources between code groups are orthogonal).
  • the network device uses port 1 and port 2 to send a reference signal to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can estimate the precoding matrix V of the transmitter.
  • the method for obtaining the matrix V belongs to the algorithm implementation of the terminal device itself.
  • a classic implementation method is SVD decomposition. Assume that the channel matrix H received by the receiving end can be decomposed into:
  • U and V are both unitary matrices, and D is a diagonal matrix.
  • the terminal device can feed back the matrix V (or the column vector of V, depending on the number of streams to be transmitted) to the transmitter as a precoding matrix.
  • Method 1 The network equipment estimates the downlink channel matrix H based on the measurement of the uplink SRS and the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, and then obtains V. This method can be applied in the time division duplexing (TDD) system. Method 1 is also called SRS-based precoding.
  • TDD time division duplexing
  • Mode 2 The terminal estimates the channel matrix H based on the measurement of the downlink reference signal, and then obtains V, and then feeds V back to the network device side. Mode 2 is also called PMI-based precoding.
  • a limited number of quantized feedback protocols are defined for the precoding matrix V.
  • These limited number of optional precoding quantized value matrices are also called codebooks, and the precoding matrices in the codebooks are numbered.
  • the terminal can feedback the relevant numbers or parameters of these codebooks. Exemplarily, the implementation process will be described in three steps below.
  • Step 1 The network device sends configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information includes the number of horizontal and vertical ports and the DFT oversampling multiple.
  • the configuration information may include one or more of the number of CSI-RS ports, N1, N2, O1, and O2.
  • N1 represents the number of logical antenna ports in a certain direction of the same polarization, generally refers to the horizontal direction
  • N2 represents the number of logical antenna ports in another direction of the same polarization, generally refers to the vertical direction
  • O1 represents the DFT oversampling multiple in the direction of N1 (horizontal direction)
  • O2 represents the DFT oversampling multiple in the direction of N2 (vertical direction).
  • Step 2 The terminal device determines the codebook set.
  • the terminal device can determine that the value of N1 is 4 and the value of N2 is 2, or that the value of N1 is 8 and the value of N2 is 1.
  • the physical meaning of N1 and N2 is that when beamforming is performed, a total of N1*N2 weight vectors with a horizontal dimension of N1 and a vertical dimension of N2 can be formed. These weight vectors are mutually orthogonal, that is, there is no interference between the beams formed after weighting these weight vectors.
  • O1 and O2 The physical meaning of O1 and O2 is that the number of weight vectors is increased in the horizontal and vertical directions through DFT oversampling, so more weight vectors can be generated.
  • the values of O1 and O2 also determine the beam density in the horizontal and vertical directions when the antenna shape is certain, that is, when N1 and N2 are determined. The larger the values of O1 and O2, the smaller the step size of the beam during beam scanning and the higher the accuracy, but the cost is that the weight vectors are no longer orthogonal, that is, there is interference between beams.
  • N1*O1 determines the number of weight vectors in the horizontal direction of the beam set
  • N2*O2 determines the number of weight vectors in the vertical direction of the beam set.
  • N1 and N2 are (4, 2), O1 and O2 are (4, 4).
  • the DFT codebook set consists of dark blue codebooks.
  • the horizontal and vertical weight vectors are:
  • X1 is the weight vector in the horizontal direction, and its length is N1.
  • the specific number of vectors is determined by the number of values of l, that is, l also indicates which set of weights is selected in the horizontal direction.
  • X2 is the weight vector in the vertical direction, and its length is N2.
  • the specific number of vectors is determined by the number of values of k, that is, k also indicates which set of weights is selected in the vertical direction.
  • the codebook set W satisfies:
  • the result represented by the Kronecker product of X1 and X2 may be the weight result on one group of polarized antennas, which is generally in a diagonal block form with the other group of polarized antennas.
  • Step 3 The terminal device measures the pilot signal (in this application, the pilot signal and the reference signal can be interchangeable) and feeds back the codebook.
  • the terminal measures the pilot signal and determines an optimal codebook feedback.
  • the Kronecker product of X1 and X2 also determines the beam in a specific direction on the same polarized antenna.
  • codebook feedback taking Type I Single-Panel Codebook as an example, the terminal device needs to feed back two parameters i1 and i2 , and i1 contains multiple parameters, and the number of parameters is determined by the number of layers.
  • i 2 represents the polarization phase quantization index.
  • i 1,1 represents the vertical dimension beam index.
  • i 1,2 represents the horizontal beam index.
  • i 1,3 represents the selection of horizontal and vertical rotation factors, which is mainly related to the shape and number of ports of the antenna array.
  • the communication system includes a radio access network (RAN) 100 and a core network 200.
  • the communication system 1000 may also include the Internet 300.
  • the RAN 100 includes at least one RAN node (such as 110a and 110b in Figure 2, collectively referred to as 110), and may also include at least one terminal (such as 120a-120j in Figure 2, collectively referred to as 120).
  • the RAN 100 may also include other RAN nodes, for example, wireless relay equipment and/or wireless backhaul equipment (not shown in Figure 2).
  • the terminal 120 is connected to the RAN node 110 in a wireless manner, and the RAN node 110 is connected to the RAN node 110 via a wireless mode.
  • the core network device in the core network 200 and the RAN node 110 in the RAN 100 may be independent and different physical devices, or may be the same physical device that integrates the logical functions of the core network device and the logical functions of the RAN node. Terminals and RAN nodes may be connected to each other by wire or wirelessly.
  • RAN100 may be an evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) system, a new radio (NR) system, and a future radio access system defined in the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP). RAN100 may also include two or more of the above different radio access systems. RAN100 may also be an open RAN (O-RAN).
  • E-UTRA evolved universal terrestrial radio access
  • NR new radio
  • 3GPP 3rd generation partnership project
  • RAN100 may also include two or more of the above different radio access systems.
  • RAN100 may also be an open RAN (O-RAN).
  • RAN nodes also known as radio access network equipment, RAN entities or access nodes, are used to help terminals access the communication system wirelessly.
  • a RAN node can be a base station, an evolved NodeB (eNodeB), a transmission reception point (TRP), a next generation NodeB (gNB) in a fifth generation (5G) mobile communication system, a next generation NodeB in a sixth generation (6G) mobile communication system, or a base station in a future mobile communication system.
  • a RAN node can be a macro base station (such as 110a in FIG. 2 ), a micro base station or an indoor station (such as 110b in FIG. 2 ), or a relay node or a donor node.
  • the cooperation of multiple RAN nodes can help the terminal achieve wireless access, and different RAN nodes respectively implement part of the functions of the base station.
  • the RAN node can be a centralized unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU) or a radio unit (RU).
  • the CU here completes the functions of the radio resource control protocol and the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) of the base station, and can also complete the function of the service data adaptation protocol (SDAP);
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • the DU completes the functions of the radio link control layer and the medium access control (MAC) layer of the base station, and can also complete the functions of part or all of the physical layer.
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • MAC medium access control
  • RU can be used to implement the transceiver function of the radio frequency signal.
  • CU and DU can be two independent RAN nodes, or they can be integrated in the same RAN node, such as integrated in the baseband unit (BBU).
  • the RU may be included in a radio frequency device, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) or an active antenna unit (AAU).
  • RRU remote radio unit
  • AAU active antenna unit
  • the CU may be further divided into two types of RAN nodes: CU-control plane and CU-user plane.
  • RAN nodes may have different names.
  • CU may also be called O-CU (open CU)
  • DU may also be called O-DU
  • CU-CP may also be called O-CU-CP
  • CU-UP may also be called O-CU-UP
  • RU may also be called O-RU.
  • this application uses CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU and RU as examples for description.
  • Any unit in the CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU and RU in this application may be implemented by a software module, a hardware module, or a combination of a software module and a hardware module.
  • the protocol layer may include a control plane protocol layer and a user plane protocol layer.
  • the control plane protocol layer may include at least one of the following: a radio resource control (RRC) layer, a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, a radio link control (RLC) layer, a media access control (MAC) layer, or a physical (PHY) layer.
  • the user plane protocol layer may include at least one of the following: a service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, a MAC layer, or a physical layer.
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • a base station is taken as an example of a RAN node for description below.
  • a terminal is a device with wireless transceiver functions that can send signals to a base station or receive signals from a base station.
  • a terminal can also be called a terminal device, user equipment (UE), mobile station, mobile terminal, etc.
  • Terminals can be widely used in various scenarios. For example, device-to-device (D2D), vehicle to everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things (IOT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, autonomous driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, etc.
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • MTC machine-type communication
  • IOT Internet of Things
  • virtual reality augmented reality
  • industrial control autonomous driving
  • telemedicine smart grid
  • smart furniture smart office
  • smart wear smart transportation
  • smart city etc.
  • the terminal can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a wearable device, a vehicle, an airplane, a ship, a robot, a mechanical arm, a smart home device, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal.
  • Base stations and terminals can be fixed or movable. Base stations and terminals can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on the water surface; they can also be deployed on airplanes, balloons, and artificial satellites. The embodiments of this application do not limit the application scenarios of base stations and terminals.
  • the helicopter or drone 120i in FIG. 2 can be configured as a mobile base station.
  • the terminal 120j that accesses the wireless access network 100 through 120i
  • the terminal 120i is a base station; but for the base station 110a, 120i is a terminal, that is, 110a and 120i communicate through the wireless air interface protocol.
  • 110a and 120i can also communicate through the interface protocol between base stations.
  • relative to 110a, 120i is also a base station. Therefore, base stations and terminals can be collectively referred to as communication devices.
  • 110a and 110b in FIG. 2 can be referred to as communication devices with base station functions
  • 120a-120j in FIG. 2 can be referred to as communication devices with terminal functions.
  • Base stations and terminals, base stations and base stations, and terminals and terminals can communicate through authorized spectrum, unauthorized spectrum, or both; they can communicate through spectrum below 6 gigahertz (GHz), spectrum above 6 GHz, or spectrum below 6 GHz and spectrum above 6 GHz.
  • GHz gigahertz
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the spectrum resources used for wireless communication.
  • the functions of the base station may also be performed by a module (such as a chip) in the base station, or by a control subsystem including the base station function.
  • the control subsystem including the base station function here may be a control center in the above-mentioned application scenarios such as smart grid, industrial control, smart transportation, and smart city.
  • the functions of the terminal may also be performed by a module (such as a chip or a modem) in the terminal, or by a device including the terminal function.
  • MIMO technology as a key technology for wireless communication, can be used to meet the needs of high-speed transmission.
  • the network device in order to send data to a terminal device, can perform precoding on the digital port and select appropriate coding and modulation orders.
  • the role of precoding is to make the antenna (or beam) more matched with the channel to ensure better signal quality and less interference when the transmitted data reaches the terminal side, while a better modulation order and code rate can ensure that the channel transmission capacity is maximized under the condition of reliable data transmission.
  • MCS precoding and modulation coding scheme
  • the setting of precoding and modulation coding scheme (MCS) needs to be determined according to the channel quality and channel response. In other words, the network device can achieve the transmission quality of data transmission based on the measurement results of the channel.
  • FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
  • the method executed by the network device can also be executed by a module of the network device (such as a chip, a chip system, or a processor), and can also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module, or software that can implement all or part of the network device.
  • the method executed by the terminal device can also be executed by a module of the terminal device (such as a chip, a chip system, or a processor), and can also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module, or software that can implement all or part of the terminal device functions.
  • the method shown in FIG3 includes steps S301 to S302 , and each step will be described below.
  • a network device sends a reference signal, and a terminal device receives the reference signal accordingly.
  • the reference signal is sent via M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein a first digital port of the M digital ports includes N1 virtual ports, where N1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the network device may send configuration information of the reference signal, and thereafter, the network device sends the reference signal based on the configuration information in step S301.
  • the terminal device may receive the configuration information of the reference signal, and receive the reference signal based on the configuration information in step S301.
  • the configuration information may include time domain resource configuration information, frequency domain resource configuration information, etc. of the reference signal.
  • the terminal device may measure the received reference signal to obtain measurement information, and then execute step S302.
  • the terminal device sends measurement information, and the network device receives the measurement information accordingly.
  • the measurement information is obtained by measuring based on the reference signal.
  • the measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port.
  • the reference signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, so that the reference signal received by the terminal device can carry the channel information of the wireless channel; thereafter, the measurement information obtained by the terminal device through measuring the reference signal can reflect the channel information, and the subsequent way in which the terminal device sends the measurement information in step S302 can enable the network device to obtain the measurement result of the channel between the network device and the terminal device based on the measurement information.
  • the measurement information obtained by the terminal device based on the reference signal includes the first information corresponding to the first digital port, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port.
  • the network device can determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port based on the first information. Compared with the way in which the network device obtains the weights of the digital port based on the measurement information fed back by the terminal device, since the first digital port contains the N 1 virtual ports, the network device can determine a finer-grained weight based on the first information.
  • the terminal device can determine and indicate a finer-grained weight based on the measurement result of the reference signal, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing the beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.
  • a common method is to send a downlink reference signal through the network device, and the terminal device feeds back the corresponding channel state information according to the downlink reference signal, including precoding information, the number of transmission streams supported by the channel (i.e. RI) and CQI (used to feed back the MCS recommended by the terminal under the current channel quality).
  • This process is called channel state information feedback (CSI feedback).
  • the network device will send a reference signal independently in each beam for different beams, and the terminal device will measure the reference signal corresponding to each beam and feed back the measurement result of each beam.
  • the network device will configure multiple resources for the terminal, each resource corresponds to a transmission beam of the network device, and the terminal device feeds back the beam measurement result.
  • the size of antenna arrays used to send and receive communication signals has become larger, and the number of beams will also increase.
  • the number of symbols scanned by the beam increases, resulting in an increase in the overhead of beam scanning; on the other hand, the increase in the array leads to narrower beams, which poses a greater challenge to terminal mobility.
  • the reference signal received by the terminal device in step S301 can be sent through L 1 first weights respectively in L 1 time units, and the i-th first weight in the L 1 first weights is obtained through the i-th second weight and the third weight in the L 1 second weights, and the L 1 second weights are orthogonal, and the value of i is 1 to L 1.
  • the reference signal is sent through orthogonal weights at different times, so the terminal device can obtain the beam channel of the subarray according to the inversion, and then obtain the optimal virtual port weight by calculating a certain criterion (such as power maximization criterion, capacity maximum criterion, etc.).
  • the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 can be used to determine the weight. In this way, when the antenna array is large in scale, the beam scanning overhead can be reduced and fast beam tracking can be achieved.
  • phase adjustments of s 00 and s 10 are performed on virtual port 0 and virtual port 1 respectively.
  • s 00 and s 10 can form a second weight value among L 1 second weight values.
  • a first weight value among L 1 first weight values can be expressed as The terminal device at this time
  • the signal G0 received at the inter-unit 0 satisfies:
  • phase adjustments of s 01 and s 11 are performed on virtual port 0 and virtual port 1 respectively.
  • s 01 and s 11 can form another second weight value among L 1 second weight values.
  • another first weight value among L 1 first weight values can be expressed as The terminal receives the signal G1 in the time unit 1 and satisfies:
  • the terminal can obtain the following equation based on the received signal of L 1 time units and L 1 orthogonal first weights:
  • the optimal second weight can be obtained according to the following principle:
  • the network device can obtain a 0 corresponding to antenna array set 0 and a 1 corresponding to antenna array set 1. Further, when performing data transmission (such as data transmission or data reception), the analog weights of antenna array set 0 and antenna array set 1 in the network device can be ⁇ 0 w 0 and ⁇ 1 w 1.
  • the network device can obtain the analog weights of different antenna array sets without multiple beam scanning processes with different accuracies, the beam scanning overhead can be reduced, and the delay of beam scanning can be reduced to achieve fast beam tracking.
  • the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 can be used to determine the simulated weights (eg, ⁇ 0 w 0 and ⁇ 1 w 1 ) of the antenna array set in the network device.
  • the simulated weights eg, ⁇ 0 w 0 and ⁇ 1 w 1 .
  • the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is N 1 channel information, that is, channel information of N 1 virtual ports. It can be understood from the above description that after the terminal device receives the reference signal, the terminal device can determine the N 1 channel information through the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device receives the signal G 0 at the time unit 0 and the terminal device receives the signal G 1 at the time unit 1, the signal G 0 and the signal G 1 satisfy:
  • the first information can include quantized feedback values of N1 channel information (i.e., [ H0w0H1w1 ]), or the first information can include PMI obtained based on N1 channel information ( i.e. , [ H0w0H1w1 ]).
  • the network device can determine ⁇ according to the received N1 channel information corresponding to the N1 virtual ports, and criteria such as power maximization criteria and capacity maximization criteria , so as to determine the weights of the N1 virtual ports.
  • the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 includes first information obtained by measuring the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, and the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port.
  • the terminal device can determine the better (or optimal) weight of the virtual port in the first digital port based on the measurement result, and indicate the weight through the first information, and the subsequent network device can communicate with the terminal device based on the weight.
  • the network device when the antenna array is large, the network device sends reference signals based on orthogonal second weights at different time units (generally, reference signals sent based on different weights can be understood as reference signals sent based on different beams).
  • the terminal device can determine and indicate a better (or optimal) weight based on the measurement results of different time units, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.
  • the terminal device can determine a better (or optimal) weight of the virtual port in the first digital port based on the measurement result and a mathematical method, for example, the mathematical method may include power maximization criteria, capacity maximization criteria determination, etc.
  • the network device sends data, if the data is transmitted with reference to the aforementioned reference signal, the weights of the N 1 virtual ports can be determined using the first information fed back by the terminal device.
  • the weights of the N1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained by a first weight vector, the first weight vector includes N1 elements; wherein the N1 virtual ports correspond to N1 antenna array sets respectively, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays, and the N1 elements are used to adjust the phases of the N1 antenna array sets respectively.
  • the reference signal can be sent at different virtual ports.
  • the first weight vector includes N 1 elements
  • the second weight described above includes N 1 elements corresponding to N 1 virtual ports
  • the implementation process of the first weight vector can refer to the implementation process of the second weight below.
  • the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through a first weight vector, including: the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through the first weight vector and a second weight vector, the second weight vector includes N 1 sub-vectors; wherein the dimension of the T-th sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays of the T-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set, and the value of T is 1 to N 1.
  • the first weight vector can correspond to the weight of each antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set.
  • the second weight vector includes N 1 sub-vectors
  • the third weight described above includes N 1 sub-vectors
  • the implementation process of the second weight vector can refer to the implementation process of the third weight described below.
  • the virtual weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the network device can be expressed as ⁇ 0 w 0 and ⁇ 1 w 1 . Accordingly, in this example, the N 1 elements included in the first weight vector are ⁇ 0 and ⁇ 1 , respectively, and the N 1 subvectors included in the second weight vector are w 0 and w 1 , respectively.
  • the first information satisfies any one of the following manners A to D.
  • the first information included in the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 includes the quantization processing result of the first weight vector.
  • the terminal device directly quantizes the first weight vector and feeds back the first weight vector.
  • the first weight vector includes N 1 elements
  • the terminal device quantizes the phases of the N 1 elements, and feeds back the quantization results of the N 1 elements.
  • the feedback phase range is 0 to 2 ⁇ and the quantization accuracy is 0.1 ⁇
  • the feedback value of each element can occupy A (A is a positive integer) bits
  • the phase feedback of N 1 elements occupies N 1 *A bits.
  • the value of A is (indicates rounding up log 2 21), or A is 21, or A is other value determined based on 21, which is not limited here.
  • the network device configures the quantization accuracy of the phase corresponding to the element in the first weight vector, for example, by configuring through configuration information of the reference signal, or by configuring through other information/message/signaling.
  • the first information included in the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 includes one element of the N 1 elements corresponding to one of the N 1 virtual ports, and a quantization processing result corresponding to the difference between N 1 -1 elements of the N 1 elements corresponding to other N 1 -1 virtual ports except the one of the virtual ports and the one element.
  • the feedback phase ranges from 0 to 2 ⁇ , and the quantization accuracy of the first element is 0.1 ⁇ . Then the feedback phase has 21 values, and the first element feedback requires A bits; the remaining elements feedback the difference with the first element, and the quantization accuracy of the element is 0.2 ⁇ . Feedback of the remaining elements, then the feedback phase has 11 values, and each element requires B bits.
  • N 1 elements feedback a total of A+(N 1 -1)B bits.
  • a takes a value of And B is Alternatively, A takes the value of 21 and B takes the value of 11, or A takes the value of other values determined based on 21 and B takes the value of other values determined based on 11, which is not limited here.
  • the first information included in the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 includes a first index and a second index, and the first index and the second index are used to determine the first weight vector of the first digital port in one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set.
  • the first index is a codebook index on the first dimension
  • the second index is a codebook index on the second dimension
  • each weight vector is determined by the weight on the first dimension and the weight on the second dimension.
  • the first information included in the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 includes a third index, and the third index is used to determine the first weight vector of the first digital port in one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set.
  • codebook sets involved in mode C and mode D may be determined in a variety of ways, which will be described below in conjunction with some implementation examples.
  • a first method for determining the codebook set is to determine the codebook set based on the port information of the virtual port included in the digital port.
  • the port information of the virtual port in any digital port includes at least one of the following information A to information F:
  • each index value represents a combination of a virtual port splitting method, an oversampling factor, and a virtual port number.
  • the network device can indicate the index value, and the terminal device can determine the virtual port splitting method, the oversampling factor, and the number of virtual ports.
  • the values corresponding to the "index" are shown in Table 3 below.
  • the virtual port splitting method can be understood as the number of virtual ports on the first dimension and the number of virtual ports on the second dimension.
  • the oversampling factor can be understood as the oversampling factor on the first dimension and the oversampling factor on the second dimension.
  • the number of virtual ports included in the digital port is N 1.
  • the number of virtual ports N of each digital port is used to instruct the network device to split the array plane into N sub-arrays in total (taking the example that the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports in the previous text, the array plane of the first digital port is split into N 1 sub-arrays, wherein the N 1 sub-arrays are the N 1 antenna array element sets corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, that is, each of the N 1 sub-arrays includes one or more antenna array elements).
  • N M 1 *M 2 .
  • the number of virtual ports in the first dimension of the digital port is M 1.
  • the horizontal number of virtual ports of each digital port is M 1 , which is used to instruct the network device to split the array horizontally into M 1 sub-arrays. It can also be understood that the first dimension of each digital port includes M 1 virtual ports.
  • the number of virtual ports in the second dimension of the digital port is M 2.
  • the vertical number of virtual ports of each digital port is M 2 , which is used to instruct the network device to vertically split the array into M 2 sub-arrays. It can also be understood that the second dimension of each digital port includes M 2 virtual ports.
  • the oversampling factor in the first dimension of the digital port is O 1.
  • the oversampling factor O 1 in the horizontal dimension of each digital port can also be understood as the oversampling factor in the first dimension of each digital port.
  • the oversampling factor in the second dimension of the digital port is O 2.
  • the oversampling factor O 2 in the vertical dimension of each digital port can also be understood as the oversampling factor in the second dimension of each digital port.
  • the terminal device does not need to perceive and can use the same index value.
  • a set of analog codebooks can be determined between the terminal device and the network device.
  • M 1 O 1 codebooks can be determined on the first dimension
  • v l represents the lth codebook (a vector with a length of M 1 )
  • the value range of l is All codebooks of the first dimension (i.e., all v l ) are recorded as Y 1
  • the number of virtual ports on the second dimension being M 2 and the oversampling factor on the second dimension being O 2
  • um represents the mth codebook (a vector of length M 2 )
  • the value range of m is All codebooks of the second dimension (ie, all um ) are recorded as Y 2
  • the codebook set is finally determined to be Y.
  • the network device may send second information to the terminal device, and the second information may be used to determine the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port, and then determine the codebook set used in mode C or mode D based on the port information.
  • the second information may include port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port (eg, at least one item of the above information A to information F).
  • the second information may include one or more parameters of one row in Table 3.
  • the second information may include a fourth index
  • the fourth index is used to determine the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port in the port information of one or more preconfigured or predefined virtual ports, wherein the port information of each virtual port may include at least one item of the above information A to information F.
  • the fourth index included in the second information may be one of the indexes in Table 3, so that the network device determines one row of parameters in Table 3 based on the index.
  • the network device sends the port information of one or more virtual ports and the corresponding indexes, as shown in Table 3.
  • the second information may include some items in information A to information F, and other items in information A to information F are determined by the partial items and port information of one or more preconfigured or predefined virtual ports.
  • the second information may include some items in information A to information F, and other items in information A to information F are determined by the some items.
  • the first digital port is one of the M digital ports.
  • M is greater than 1
  • different digital ports may be configured or the port information of the corresponding virtual port may be specified by the protocol in any one or more of the following ways:
  • each digital port uses the same virtual port splitting method (same number of virtual ports on the first dimension, same number of virtual ports on the second dimension), the same oversampling factor (same oversampling factor on the first dimension, same oversampling factor on the second dimension), and the same number of virtual ports.
  • the network device configures or dynamically indicates the port information of the virtual port of each digital port for the terminal device (i.e., at least one of the above information A to information F).
  • the network device configures the measurement resources of one or more digital ports, and each digital port includes one or more virtual ports.
  • the network device configures or dynamically indicates the port information of the virtual port of each digital port for the terminal device.
  • the measurement resource can be SSB, CSI-RS, etc., which is not limited here.
  • the network device configures or dynamically indicates some items of information A to information F for each digital port for the terminal device, and other items of information A to information F are determined by the partial items and/or the port information of one or more preconfigured or predefined virtual ports.
  • the network device directly configures or indicates the fourth index corresponding to each digital port to the terminal through signaling.
  • the signaling can be one or more of RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling, DCI signaling, etc., and can also be other signaling, which is not limited here.
  • the network device configuration or protocol specifies one or more digital port groups, each digital port group contains one or more digital ports, and one digital port group corresponds to the same port information of the virtual port.
  • the network device configures a type of virtual port port information for each digital port group, and each digital port in the digital port group has the same virtual port port information.
  • the network configuration or protocol specifies the port information of one or more virtual ports, and the protocol specifies that each k digital ports use the port information of one virtual port. For example, if the network configuration or protocol specifies the port information of two virtual ports, and there are 8 digital ports in total, then the protocol specifies that 0 to 3 use the port information of the first virtual port, and 4 to 7 use the port information of the second virtual port. Of course, 0, 2, 4, and 6 can also use the first type, and 1, 3, 5, and 7 can use the second type. This is similar to the default rule.
  • Y1 to include the codebooks in these four horizontal directions, which can be expressed as:
  • Y 2 to include the codebooks in these two vertical directions, which can be expressed as:
  • codebook set can be expressed as:
  • the four rows of the matrix represent four virtual ports, and the columns represent eight codebooks (ie, eight weight vectors).
  • the network device can determine the sixth weight vector as the first weight vector of the first digital port in the above 8 codebooks based on the index value "2, 1" carried by the first information.
  • the network device determines the final codebook as the first weight vector:
  • a second method for determining a codebook set is to determine a codebook set used in method C or method D from one or more codebook sets based on an instruction from a network device.
  • the network device may send second information to the terminal device, where the second information may be used to determine a codebook set used in mode C or mode D from one or more codebook sets.
  • the second information may include a fifth index, where the fifth index is used to determine the codebook set in one or more preconfigured or predefined codebook sets.
  • the codebook set in the process of determining the codebook set, it is associated with one or more items of information A to information F. Accordingly, the mapping relationship between "one or more items of information A to information F" and "one or more codebook sets" can be preconfigured or predefined.
  • the third information sent by the network device may indicate one or more items of information A to information F (for example, in Table 3), and the subsequent terminal device may determine, based on one or more items of information A to information F and the "mapping relationship", that one of the codebook sets in the one or more codebook sets is the codebook set used in method C or method D.
  • the terminal device may determine the one or more codebook sets in a preconfigured or predefined manner.
  • the terminal device may receive signaling from the network device and determine the one or more codebook sets through the signaling.
  • the signaling may include one or more of RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling, DCI signaling, etc.
  • the network device may indicate the codebook set used in mode C or mode D in the one or more codebook sets in a variety of ways.
  • the first digital port is one of the M digital ports.
  • M is greater than 1
  • the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 can be used to determine the weight of the virtual port included in each digital port (i.e., the weight for data transmission), which will be described below in conjunction with more implementation examples.
  • the measurement information includes any one of the following examples A to C:
  • Example A M pieces of information.
  • Example B K pieces of information.
  • Example C M information and K information.
  • the M information is used to determine the first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports (for example, the i-th (i is 1 to M) information in the M information is used to determine the first weight vector of the i-th digital port in the M digital ports, and for example, the M information corresponds one-to-one to the M digital ports); one of the M information is the first information; the K information is used to determine the first weight vector of each digital port group in the K groups of digital ports (for example, the i-th (i is 1 to K) information in the K information is used to determine the first weight vector of the digital ports included in the i-th digital port group in the K digital port groups, and for example, the K information corresponds one-to-one to the K digital port groups), wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports in the M digital ports, and K is a positive integer less than or equal to M; one of the K information is the first information.
  • the K information is used to determine the first weight vector of each digital port
  • the measurement information sent by the terminal device may include M information and/or K information.
  • the network device can determine the first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports through the M information and/or the K information.
  • the port information of virtual ports of different digital ports is the same.
  • the K pieces of information are respectively used to determine the first weight vector of the digital ports included in each digital port group in the K groups of digital ports, wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports among the M digital ports.
  • the port information of virtual ports of different digital ports is the same. In this way, the feedback process of the measurement information can be simplified, and the implementation complexity can be reduced.
  • the network device configures each digital port of the terminal device to independently feedback the first weight vector.
  • the network device configures the terminal to feedback the first weight vectors of different digital ports in an order. It can also be agreed to follow a certain order, such as from small to large, or from large to small according to the digital port index; it can also be in the order of horizontal digital ports first and then vertical digital ports, or vertical first and then horizontal, etc.
  • Example B when the measurement information includes K pieces of information, multiple digital ports feed back a same first weight vector.
  • the network device configures the number of groups of digital ports (ie, configures the value of K).
  • the network device configures one or more digital port groups, each of which includes one or more digital ports, and the network device configures each digital port group to feedback a same first weight vector.
  • the network device configures the number of first weight vectors that need to be fed back (i.e., the number of digital ports included in each digital port group in the K digital port groups).
  • the number of groups configured by the network device for the digital ports is 2 (i.e., the value of K is configured to be 2), or the number of first weight vectors that the network device needs to feedback is configured to be 2 (i.e., the number of digital ports included in each digital port group in the K digital port groups is 4), then digital ports 0 to 3 can feedback a first weight vector, and digital ports 4 to 7 can feedback a first weight vector.
  • the same first weight vector is fed back. The terminal device does not perceive the polarization mode, but only the digital port.
  • the terminal device feeds back an identical first weight vector according to the digital ports configured with the identical virtual port splitting mode.
  • the terminal device feeds back the first weight vector of each digital port individually, and also feeds back the same first weight vector corresponding to multiple digital ports.
  • the measurement information satisfies any of the following:
  • the measurement information includes the M pieces of information
  • the measurement information includes the K pieces of information
  • the measurement information includes the M pieces of information
  • the measurement information includes the K pieces of information.
  • the network device when the network device is configured with different Rank numbers, different digital ports in the terminal device feed back the same or different first weight vectors. Since the rank number is related to the rank of the channel, when the Rank number is large, it means that the multipath of the channel is relatively rich, so beam coverage in different directions can be achieved, so different first weight vectors can be fed back to different digital ports. Conversely, when the Rank number is small, it means that the channel path is small, so the same first weight vector can be fed back to different digital ports. For example, the terminal device can feed back a first weight vector for different digital ports, which can save overhead.
  • the network device configuration or protocol stipulates that when the rank number of the terminal feedback channel information is 1, the terminal feeds back the same first weight vector for all digital ports, that is, different digital ports of the terminal only need to feed back one first weight vector.
  • the network device configuration or protocol stipulates that when the configured rank number is N, the terminal feeds back N first weight vectors.
  • the terminal device feeds back the digital port index corresponding to each first weight vector in the N first weight vectors.
  • the network device configuration or protocol stipulates a rank threshold.
  • the terminal device independently feeds back the first weight vector for each digital port; when the rank is less than the threshold, different digital ports of the terminal device feed back the same first weight vector, that is, different digital ports of the terminal only need to feed back one first weight vector.
  • the network device configuration or protocol specifies a CQI threshold.
  • the CQI of the feedback channel information is greater than the threshold, the first weight vector is fed back per port.
  • the CQI of the feedback channel information is less than the threshold, different digital ports of the terminal device feed back the same first weight vector.
  • CQI mainly reflects the quality of the channel. When the CQI is relatively large, it means that the channel quality is good, and each digital port can independently measure and determine the first weight vector; when the CQI is relatively small, it means that the channel quality is not good, and multiple digital ports need to jointly estimate the first weight vector, so multiple digital ports feed back a first weight vector.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives indication information indicating that the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information. In this way, the terminal device and the network device can clearly understand the information content carried by the measurement information.
  • the indication information is carried in configuration information of a reference signal, or is other message/information/signaling, etc., which is not limited here.
  • the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first carrier
  • the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports corresponding to the first carrier
  • the first carrier includes one or more carriers (optionally, when the first carrier includes multiple carriers, it can also be understood that the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to multiple carriers (for example, a second carrier, a third carrier, etc.));
  • the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first BWP, and the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports corresponding to the first BWP, and the first BWP includes one or more BWPs (optionally, when the first BWP includes multiple BWPs, it can also be understood that the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to multiple BWPs (such as a second BWP, a third BWP, etc.));
  • the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first bandwidth
  • the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port of the M digital ports corresponding to the first bandwidth
  • the first bandwidth includes one or more sub-bands (optionally, when the first bandwidth includes multiple sub-bands, it can also be understood that the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to multiple bandwidths (for example, the second bandwidth, the third bandwidth, etc.)).
  • the measurement information may be used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in M digital ports corresponding to one or more carriers (or one or more BWPs, or one or more subbands) to enhance the flexibility of the solution implementation.
  • the measurement information is taken as the measurement information corresponding to the first carrier.
  • the terminal device can measure the channel information of the one carrier based on the reference signal in step S301, and the measurement information of the terminal device in step S302 is used to determine the weights of the virtual ports of the M digital ports corresponding to the one carrier.
  • the terminal device can measure the channel information of the D carriers based on the reference signal in step S301, and the measurement information of the terminal device in step S302 is used to determine the weights of the virtual ports of the M digital ports corresponding to the D carriers.
  • the measurement information may include the weight of the virtual port of the M digital ports corresponding to one of the carriers (denoted as weight 1), and the weights of the M virtual ports corresponding to different carriers are the same, that is, the network device can determine that the weights of the virtual ports of the M digital ports corresponding to the D carriers are all weight 1.
  • the measurement information may include weights of the virtual ports of the M digital ports corresponding to the D carriers (denoted as weight 1...weight D), and the network device may determine the weights of the virtual ports of the M digital ports corresponding to the D carriers based on weight 1...weight D respectively.
  • the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to the first bandwidth (or the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to the first bandwidth)
  • step S301 the reference signal may be sent via L1 first weights in L1 time units.
  • step S301 describes step S301 and its related processes by way of example.
  • the L 1 time units used to send the reference signal are continuous in the time domain. Since the channel information of different continuous time units in the time domain is highly correlated, in this way, the different measurement results corresponding to the reference signal of the L 1 time unit of the terminal device can reflect the same or similar channel information as much as possible, so as to obtain more accurate measurement information.
  • step S301 at least two time units among the L1 time units used to send the reference signal are discontinuous in the time domain.
  • the reference signal is sent through L1 first weights in L1 time units respectively, and it can be understood that L1 time units correspond to L1 first weights one by one.
  • the weight of the reference signal in the i-th time unit in the L1 time units is the i-th first weight in the L1 first weights, and i ranges from 1 to L1 .
  • the reference signal on each time unit can be regarded as one reference signal, that is, "the reference signal carried on L 1 time units" can be regarded as L 1 reference signals. Accordingly, the above method can be performed once or multiple times, that is, the sending and receiving process of one or more L 1 reference signals is respectively implemented through one or more L 1 time units.
  • the reference signal on each L 1 time unit can be regarded as one reference signal, that is, "the reference signal carried on L 1 time unit" can be regarded as 1 reference signal. Accordingly, the above method can be performed once or multiple times, that is, the sending and receiving process of one or more reference signals is respectively implemented through one or more L 1 time units.
  • the L1 second weights are orthogonal, and the i-th first weight among the L1 first weights is obtained by the i-th second weight among the L1 second weights and the third weight.
  • the L1 first weights are obtained based on the L1 second weights.
  • different weights in the L1 first weights may be orthogonal or non-orthogonal, which is not limited here.
  • the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained by the i-th second weight among the L 1 second weights and the third weight, including: the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained by multiplying the N 1 elements of the i-th second weight among the L 1 second weights by the N 1 sub-vectors in the third weight.
  • the multiplication of the N 1 elements in the ith second weight and the N 1 subvectors in the third weight may be the product of an element and a subvector.
  • the obtained second weight is [a 0 f 0 , a 1 f 1 ]
  • the obtained second weight is [a 0 f 0 , a 1 f 1 ]
  • the N 1 elements in the i-th second weight are multiplied with the N 1 subvectors in the third weight, and a diagonal matrix of the N 1 subvectors is formed, and then the matrix is multiplied with the vector composed of N 1 elements.
  • N 1 subvectors contained in the third weight are f 0 , f 1 respectively.
  • f 0 , f 1 are two row vectors
  • the N 1 elements contained in the second weight are a 0 , a 1 respectively, satisfying:
  • the second weight contains N 1 elements a 0 , a 1 , respectively, satisfying:
  • the reference signal sent by the network device is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein the weight corresponding to the first digital port among the M digital ports in the L 1 time units is the L 1 first weight; the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and the second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, where N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the reference signal is sent through L 1 first weights in L 1 time units, respectively, and the L 1 first weights may be the weight of the first digital port among the M digital ports.
  • the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports
  • the second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, that is, the corresponding L 1 second weights of the virtual ports included in the first digital port in the L 1 time units are orthogonal. In this way, the weights of the virtual ports included in the same digital port in different time units are orthogonal.
  • the virtual port can be replaced by other terms, such as analog port, virtual sub-array, analog sub-array, sub-array, etc.
  • L 1 is an integer multiple of N 1.
  • N 1 is equal to L 1 .
  • the frequency domain resources occupied by the N 1 virtual ports in different time units of the L 1 time units are the same. In this way, the implementation complexity of sending and receiving reference signals in different time units can be reduced as much as possible.
  • the terminal device may also receive indication information indicating that the number of virtual ports included in the first digital port is N 1 , and/or, the terminal device may also receive indication information indicating that the number of time units of the reference signal is L 1. These two indication information may be carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or may be carried in other information/messages/signaling, which is not limited here.
  • N 1 and L 1 are pre-configured information and are not limited here.
  • a digital port includes one or more virtual ports (for example, a first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and a second digital port described later includes N 2 virtual ports, etc.), and it can be understood that the signal of the digital port is sent and received through the one or more virtual ports.
  • the digital port sends the signal through the one or more virtual ports; for another example, in the process of signal reception, the signal received by one or more virtual ports can be understood as the signal received by the digital port.
  • step S301 From the description of step S301 above, it can be seen that the reference signal is sent via L 1 first weights in L 1 time units respectively, and the L 1 first weights are determined by the second weight and the third weight.
  • the implementation process of the second weight and the third weight is described exemplarily below.
  • the second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports.
  • the N 1 virtual ports included in the first digital port of the M digital ports correspond to N 1 antenna array sets, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays, and the N 1 elements are used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • the N 1 virtual ports included in the first digital port correspond to N 1 antenna array sets, and the N 1 elements included in the second weight are used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets.
  • each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays.
  • the N 1 elements included in the second weight are used to adjust the phases of the antenna arrays corresponding to different virtual ports in the digital port, that is, the L 1 orthogonal second weights are used to achieve orthogonality of the phases of the antenna array sets corresponding to different virtual ports.
  • the third weight includes N 1 sub-vectors
  • the dimension of the P-th sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the P- th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set
  • the value of P is 1 to N 1.
  • the dimension of the P-th sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors included in the third weight is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the P-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set. In this way, the third weight can correspond to the weight of each antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set.
  • the third weight is determined by the network device according to the beam measurement result (for example, reference signal received power, RSRP) fed back by the terminal device.
  • the beam measurement result for example, reference signal received power, RSRP
  • different analog weights are used for weighting.
  • the corresponding measurement result is fed back.
  • the third weight can be the transmission analog weight corresponding to the reference signal with the maximum RSRP in the feedback result, or it can be the transmission analog weight corresponding to a certain reference signal in the feedback result.
  • the third weight can be determined by other reference signals. For example, after the network device sends the other reference signal through different beams (or different weights), the terminal device can feed back multiple signal quality information based on the different beams.
  • the network device can determine the third weight based on the signal quality information with the best signal quality among the multiple signal quality information, or the network device can determine the third weight based on the signal quality information greater than the threshold among the multiple signal quality information, or the network device can determine the third weight based on the quality of one or more reference signals fed back by the terminal (for example, RSRP).
  • the terminal for example, RSRP
  • the first weight and the third weight have the same dimension, that is, the first weight used to send the reference signal can determine the weight of each antenna element set in the N1 antenna element sets.
  • w′ k is an N 1 ⁇ 1 vector, corresponding to the phase information of N 1 virtual sub-arrays on the kth time unit.
  • the matrix W may be a DFT matrix or a Hadamard matrix.
  • the columns of the matrix W represent different time units (i.e., the matrix W includes L 1 columns), and the rows represent different virtual ports contained in a digital port (i.e., the matrix W includes N 1 rows).
  • the matrix W satisfies:
  • Each element wx ,y in the matrix W represents the phase information of the virtual sub-array y at symbol x (i.e., x is the matrix column index and y is the matrix row index), where e is a natural constant, j is the imaginary number sign, and N1 is the number of virtual ports.
  • the second-order Hadamard matrix can be expressed as
  • the fourth-order Hadamard matrix can be expressed as
  • n 2 to the zth power, and z is a positive integer.
  • the second weights of the two virtual ports are +1 and +1 respectively.
  • the second weights of the two virtual ports are +1 and -1 respectively.
  • the second weights of the four virtual ports are +1, +1, +1, and +1, respectively.
  • the second weights of the four virtual ports are +1, -1, +1, and -1 respectively.
  • the second weights of the four virtual ports are +1, +1, -1, and -1 respectively.
  • the second weights of the four virtual ports are +1, -1, -1, and +1 respectively.
  • L1 second weights are orthogonal, which can be understood as any two second weights among the L1 second weights are mutually orthogonal, or different second weights among the L1 second weights are orthogonal to each other.
  • phase information of each virtual port included in each of the M digital ports may be configured independently, or the phase information of the same virtual sub-array may be configured for the M digital ports.
  • the reference signal received by the terminal device in step S301 is sent through L1 first weights in L1 time units respectively, and the i-th first weight in the L1 first weights is obtained through the i-th second weight and the third weight in L1 second weights, and the L1 second weights are orthogonal.
  • the reference signal transmitted in L1 time units is sent through mutually orthogonal L1 second weights.
  • the reference signal may be sent through M digital ports, and M may have multiple value modes, which will be introduced below in conjunction with some implementation examples.
  • Example 1 when the value of M is 1, the reference signal can be sent through a digital port (i.e., the first digital port), so that the solution is applicable to the scenario where the network device is configured with a single digital port, and realizes the transmission and measurement of the reference signal of the virtual port contained in the single digital port.
  • a digital port i.e., the first digital port
  • the M digital ports are the first digital ports.
  • the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and the reference signal sent by the first digital port is sent through L 1 first weights in L 1 time units.
  • N 1 is equal to L 1 .
  • the L 1 time units are continuous in the time domain.
  • the time domain symbol position occupied by the L 1 symbol in a time slot can be configured by the network device (such as the configuration information of the reference signal described above), such as configuring the starting position of the L 1 symbol, configuring the value of L 1 , etc.
  • the numbers of frequency domain resources occupied in different time units may be the same.
  • the resources for sending the reference signal through the first digital port may include the 2 REs in FIG5.
  • the reference signal is sent through the first digital port on 2 symbols.
  • the code sequence encoding on the first symbol and the second symbol in FIG5 can both be "+1", and sent through the code sequence encoding of all 1s, that is, code division multiplexing without digital ports.
  • the resources for sending reference signals through the first digital port may include the 4 REs in FIG6.
  • the reference signal is sent through the first digital port on the 4 symbols.
  • the code sequence encoding on different symbols in the 4 symbols may all be "+1", and sent through the code sequence encoding of all 1s, that is, code division multiplexing without digital ports.
  • multiple time units for sending reference signals through the first digital port may be located in the same time slot.
  • the 2 symbols in Figure 5 and the 4 symbols in Figure 5 may be located in the same time slot.
  • multiple resources for sending reference signals through the first digital port may be located in the same physical resource block (PRB).
  • PRB physical resource block
  • the 2 REs in Figure 5 and the 4 REs in Figure 5 may be located in the same PRB.
  • the reference signal transmitted in step S201 the reference signal may be carried in one or more time slots (or one or more PRBs), and the resource mapping methods of different time slots (or different PRBs) may be the same.
  • the multiple time units for sending the reference signal through the first digital port and/or the multiple resources for sending the reference signal through the first digital port may be sent through configuration information of the network device, for example, may be configured by the configuration of the reference signal sent by the network device.
  • Example 2 The value of M is greater than 1.
  • the reference signal when the value of M is greater than 1, the reference signal can be sent through two or more digital ports (i.e., the first digital port and other digital ports), so that the solution is suitable for the scenario where the network device is configured with two or more digital ports, and realizes the transmission and measurement of the reference signal of the virtual port contained in the two or more digital ports.
  • the M digital ports may also include other digital ports, such as the second digital port.
  • the second digital port includes N 2 virtual ports; the reference signal is sent through L 2 fourth weights on L 2 time units, respectively, and L 2 is an integer greater than 1; the jth fourth weight among the L 2 fourth weights is obtained through the jth fifth weight and the sixth weight among the L 2 fifth weights, and the L 2 fifth weights are orthogonal.
  • the reference signal transmitted in L 2 time units is sent through L 2 fifth weights that are orthogonal to each other.
  • the terminal device makes relatively independent measurements of the reference signals carried on different time units, and then obtains L 1 relatively independent channel information to obtain more accurate measurement information.
  • L1 is equal to L2 .
  • L1 time units and L2 time units may be the same time units, that is, the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by the first digital port among the M digital ports and the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by the second digital port may be the same. In this way, the same time unit can be reused as much as possible to save communication resources and reduce implementation complexity.
  • L1 is equal to L2 .
  • L1 time units and L2 time units may be the same frequency domain units, that is, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by the first digital port among the M digital ports and the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by the second digital port may be the same. In this way, the same frequency domain units can be reused as much as possible to save communication resources and reduce implementation complexity.
  • N1 is equal to N2 . That is, the number of virtual ports included in the first digital port and the number of virtual ports included in the second digital port among the M digital ports may be the same. In this way, the implementation complexity can be reduced.
  • the implementation process of the second digital port can refer to the implementation process of the first digital port in the foregoing text.
  • the correspondence between L2 time units and L2 fourth weights can refer to the correspondence between L1 time units and L1 first weights
  • the correspondence between L2 fourth weights and L2 fifth weights can refer to the correspondence between L1 first weights and L1 second weights, etc.
  • the resources of the reference signal can be implemented in multiple ways.
  • the resources of the reference signal satisfy one of the following ways 1 to 3. These ways are described exemplarily below.
  • Mode 1 In the resources of the reference signal, the time domain resources and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, and different digital ports among the M digital ports are code division multiplexed, and the digital ports are distinguished by orthogonal codes.
  • the M digital ports can share time and frequency resources, and the M digital ports use frequency domain code division (i.e., FD-CDM#M), which can be represented as M digital ports in one CDM group.
  • FD-CDM#M frequency domain code division
  • the number of virtual ports included in the any digital port and the number of time units occupied by the any digital port may be equal (for example, L1 is equal to N1 , and L2 is equal to N2 ).
  • the resources for sending reference signals through the first digital port may include 8 REs corresponding to "digital port 0" in FIG7
  • the resources for sending reference signals through the second digital port may include 8 REs corresponding to "digital port 1" in FIG7.
  • the superimposed orthogonal cover code (OCC) code encoded by the code sequence corresponding to digital port 0 is "+1" and "-1"
  • the OCC code encoded by the code sequence corresponding to digital port 1 is "+1" and "+1”. That is, two digital ports are corresponding to two OCCs. Since it is an orthogonal OCC code of 2REs in the frequency domain, this code division multiplexing is called FD-CDM2.
  • Mode 2 In the resources of the reference signal, the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and different digital ports among the M digital ports have no code division multiplexing (no-CDM). In other words, among the M digital ports, the resources of different digital ports are frequency-divided, and the digital ports are distinguished by frequency division.
  • no-CDM code division multiplexing
  • the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports include M different frequency domain units in the frequency domain.
  • M is greater than 1
  • the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and when there is no code division multiplexing for different digital ports among the M digital ports, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports include M different frequency domain units in the frequency domain.
  • the frequency domain unit may include one or more subcarriers or REs.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives indication information indicating the M different frequency domain units, so that the terminal device specifies the resource location of each frequency domain unit based on the indication information.
  • the indication information is carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or other messages/information/signaling, etc., which are not limited here.
  • the configuration information can configure the starting RE position of each digital port frequency domain, and different digital ports can occupy different frequency domain resources.
  • the M digital ports include the four digital ports of digital port 0, digital port 1, digital port 2 and digital port 3 in the figure as an example, and the first digital port and the second digital port can be any two different digital ports among the four digital ports.
  • each digital port contains two virtual port numbers
  • each digital port occupies two REs in the time domain
  • each digital port occupies 1 RE in the frequency domain
  • each digital port occupies a total of 2 REs
  • the four digital ports can occupy the 1st, 2nd, 4th, and 5th frequency domain REs in a resource block (RB) in turn.
  • different digital ports among the M digital ports have no code division multiplexing (no-CDM) (or, code division multiplexing is not used).
  • the frequency domain resources occupied by the multiple virtual ports included in the same digital port in different time units are the same. In this way, the implementation complexity can be reduced.
  • the numbers of virtual ports of the different digital ports may be the same.
  • Mode 3 In the resources of the reference signal, the M digital ports belong to Q groups of digital ports, each group of digital ports includes one or more digital ports, and Q is a positive integer; wherein the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different groups of digital ports in the Q groups of digital ports are different, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports in the Q groups of digital ports are the same, and the one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports send code division multiplexing (code division multiplexing, CDM).
  • code division multiplexing type of the one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports is frequency domain code division multiplexing.
  • the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports all include the same M frequency domain units in the frequency domain.
  • M is greater than 1
  • the time domain resources and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same
  • the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports all include the same M frequency domain units in the frequency domain.
  • the M digital ports include the four digital ports of digital port 0, digital port 1, digital port 2 and digital port 3 in the figure as an example, and the first digital port and the second digital port can be any two different digital ports among the four digital ports.
  • the M digital ports are first mapped to the measurement resources in ascending order of the OCC sequence index in the CDM group, and then in ascending order of the index of the CDM group. Assume that 2 CDM groups are configured, and each CDM group includes M/2 digital ports.
  • digital ports 0 to M/2-1 belong to the first CDM group (i.e., CDM group 0 including digital port 0 and digital port 1 as shown in the figure), and digital ports M/2 to M belong to the second CDM group (i.e., CDM group 1 including digital port 2 and digital port 3 as shown in the figure).
  • digital port 0 and digital port 1 occupy the same time-frequency resources, belong to CDM group 0, and the two digital ports use frequency domain code division multiplexing FD-CDM2; digital port 2 and digital port 3 occupy the same time-frequency resources, belong to CDM group 1, and the two digital ports use frequency domain code division multiplexing FD-CDM2; digital port 0 and digital port 1 and digital port 2 and digital port 3 use frequency division resources, that is, they occupy different frequency domain resources.
  • Each digital port contains two virtual ports, occupying two time domain symbols, and each digital port occupies two REs in the frequency domain.
  • Example 2 when M is greater than 1, the method further includes: the terminal device receives indication information indicating that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the above methods 1 to 3. In this way, the terminal device can clarify the resource configuration mode of different digital ports among the M digital ports based on the indication information.
  • the indication information is carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or other messages/information/signaling, etc., which are not limited here.
  • the terminal device determines by pre-configuration that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the above methods 1 to 3.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device 1000, which can implement the functions of the terminal device (or network device) in the above method embodiment, and thus can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiment.
  • the communication device 1000 can be a terminal device (or network device), or an integrated circuit or component inside the terminal device (or network device), such as a chip.
  • the following embodiments are described by taking the communication device 1000 as a terminal device or a network device as an example.
  • the apparatus 1000 when the apparatus 1000 is used to execute the method executed by the terminal device in the aforementioned embodiment, the apparatus 1000 includes a processing unit 1001 and a transceiver unit 1002; the transceiver unit 1002 is used to receive a reference signal, which is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port among the M digital ports includes N 1 virtual ports, where N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the processing unit 1001 is used to determine measurement information, and the transceiver unit 1002 is also used to send measurement information, wherein the measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, wherein the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port.
  • the device 1000 when the device 1000 is used to execute the method executed by the network device in the aforementioned embodiment, the device 1000 includes a processing unit 1001 and a transceiver unit 1002; the processing unit 1001 is used to determine a reference signal, and the transceiver unit is used to send a reference signal, and the reference signal is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port among the M digital ports includes N1 virtual ports, and N1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the transceiver unit 1002 is also used to receive measurement information, and the measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N1 channel information, and the N1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signals sent by the N1 virtual ports.
  • Fig. 11 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1100 provided in the present application.
  • the communication device 1100 includes a logic circuit 1101 and an input/output interface 1102.
  • the communication device 1100 may be a chip or an integrated circuit.
  • the transceiver unit 1002 shown in Figure 10 may be a communication interface, which may be the input/output interface 1102 in Figure 11, which may include an input interface and an output interface.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver circuit, which may include an input interface circuit and an output interface circuit.
  • the input/output interface 1102 is used to receive a reference signal, which is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port among the M digital ports includes N 1 virtual ports, where N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the logic circuit 1101 is used to determine measurement information, and the input/output interface 1102 is also used to send measurement information, which includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, which is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port.
  • the logic circuit 1101 and the input/output interface 1102 may also perform other steps performed by the terminal device in the aforementioned embodiment and achieve corresponding beneficial effects, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the logic circuit 1101 is used to determine a reference signal, and the transceiver unit is used to send a reference signal, the reference signal is sent through M digital ports, M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port among the M digital ports includes N 1 virtual ports, N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the input-output interface 1102 is also used to receive measurement information, the measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, and the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports.
  • the logic circuit 1101 and the input-output interface 1102 can also perform other steps performed by the network device in the aforementioned embodiment and achieve corresponding beneficial effects, which will not be repeated here.
  • the processing unit 1001 shown in FIG. 10 may be the logic circuit 1101 in FIG. 11 .
  • the logic circuit 1101 may be a processing device, and the functions of the processing device may be partially or completely implemented by software.
  • the functions of the processing device may be partially or completely implemented by software.
  • the processing device may include a memory and a processor, wherein the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor reads and executes the computer program stored in the memory to perform corresponding processing and/or steps in any one of the method embodiments.
  • the processing device may include only a processor.
  • a memory for storing a computer program is located outside the processing device, and the processor is connected to the memory via a circuit/wire to read and execute the computer program stored in the memory.
  • the memory and the processor may be integrated together, or may be physically independent of each other.
  • the processing device may be one or more chips, or one or more integrated circuits.
  • the processing device may be one or more field-programmable gate arrays (FPGA), application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), system on chip (SoC), central processor unit (CPU), network processor (NP), digital signal processor (DSP), microcontroller unit (MCU), programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips, or any combination of the above chips or processors.
  • FPGA field-programmable gate arrays
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuits
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processor unit
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • MCU microcontroller unit
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • FIG 12 shows a communication device 1200 involved in the above embodiments provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1200 can specifically be a communication device as a terminal device in the above embodiments.
  • the example shown in Figure 12 is that the terminal device is implemented through the terminal device (or a component in the terminal device).
  • the communication device 1200 may include but is not limited to at least one processor 1201 and a communication port 1202.
  • the device may also include at least one of a memory 1203 and a bus 1204 .
  • the at least one processor 1201 is used to control and process the actions of the communication device 1200 .
  • the processor 1201 can be a central processing unit, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a transistor logic device, a hardware component or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute various exemplary logic blocks, modules and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application.
  • the processor can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, and the like.
  • the communication device 1200 shown in Figure 12 can be specifically used to implement the steps implemented by the terminal device in the aforementioned method embodiment, and to achieve the corresponding technical effects of the terminal device.
  • the specific implementation methods of the communication device shown in Figure 12 can refer to the description in the aforementioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here one by one.
  • Figure 13 is a structural diagram of the communication device 1300 involved in the above-mentioned embodiments provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1300 can specifically be a communication device as a network device in the above-mentioned embodiments.
  • the example shown in Figure 13 is that the network device is implemented through the network device (or a component in the network device), wherein the structure of the communication device can refer to the structure shown in Figure 13.
  • the communication device 1300 includes at least one processor 1311 and at least one network interface 1314. Further optionally, the communication device also includes at least one memory 1312, at least one transceiver 1313 and one or more antennas 1315.
  • the processor 1311, the memory 1312, the transceiver 1313 and the network interface 1314 are connected, for example, through a bus. In an embodiment of the present application, the connection may include various interfaces, transmission lines or buses, etc., which are not limited in this embodiment.
  • the antenna 1315 is connected to the transceiver 1313.
  • the network interface 1314 is used to enable the communication device to communicate with other communication devices through a communication link.
  • the network interface 1314 may include a network interface between the communication device and the core network device, such as an S1 interface, and the network interface may include a network interface between the communication device and other communication devices (such as other network devices or core network devices), such as an X2 or Xn interface.
  • the processor 1311 is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire communication device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program, for example, to support the communication device to perform the actions described in the embodiment.
  • the communication device may include a baseband processor and a central processor.
  • the baseband processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data
  • the central processor is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor 1311 in Figure 13 can integrate the functions of the baseband processor and the central processor. It can be understood by those skilled in the art that the baseband processor and the central processor can also be independent processors, interconnected by technologies such as buses.
  • the terminal device can include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network formats, and the terminal device can include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities.
  • the various components of the terminal device can be connected through various buses.
  • the baseband processor can also be described as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the central processor can also be described as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the function of processing the communication protocol and communication data can be built into the processor, or it can be stored in the memory in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the memory 1312 can exist independently and be connected to the processor 1311.
  • the memory 1312 can be integrated with the processor 1311, for example, integrated into a chip.
  • the memory 1312 can store program codes for executing the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 1311.
  • the various types of computer program codes executed can also be regarded as drivers of the processor 1311.
  • FIG13 shows only one memory and one processor.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc.
  • the memory may be a storage element on the same chip as the processor, i.e., an on-chip storage element, or an independent storage element, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the transceiver 1313 can be used to support the reception or transmission of radio frequency signals between the communication device and the terminal, and the transceiver 1313 can be connected to the antenna 1315.
  • the transceiver 1313 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx.
  • one or more antennas 1315 can receive radio frequency signals
  • the receiver Rx of the transceiver 1313 is used to receive the radio frequency signal from the antenna, convert the radio frequency signal into a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal, and provide the digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal to the processor 1311, so that the processor 1311 further processes the digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal, such as demodulation and decoding.
  • the transmitter Tx in the transceiver 1313 is also used to receive a modulated digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal from the processor 1311, and convert the modulated digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal into a radio frequency signal, and send the radio frequency signal through one or more antennas 1315.
  • the receiver Rx can selectively perform one or more stages of down-mixing and analog-to-digital conversion processing on the RF signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal, and the order of the down-mixing and analog-to-digital conversion processing is adjustable.
  • the transmitter Tx can selectively perform one or more stages of up-mixing and digital-to-analog conversion processing on the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal to obtain a RF signal, and the order of the up-mixing and digital-to-analog conversion processing is adjustable.
  • the digital baseband signal and the digital intermediate frequency signal can be collectively referred to as a digital signal.
  • the transceiver 1313 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver device, etc.
  • a device in the transceiver unit for implementing a receiving function may be regarded as a receiving unit
  • a device in the transceiver unit for implementing a sending function may be regarded as a sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a sending unit
  • the receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, an input port, a receiving circuit, etc.
  • the sending unit may be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
  • the communication device 1300 shown in Figure 13 can be specifically used to implement the steps implemented by the network equipment in the aforementioned method embodiment, and to achieve the corresponding technical effects of the network equipment.
  • the specific implementation methods of the communication device 1300 shown in Figure 13 can refer to the description in the aforementioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing one or more computer-executable instructions.
  • the processor executes the method described in the possible implementation method of the communication device (such as a terminal device or a network device) in the above-mentioned embodiment.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product (or computer program).
  • the processor executes a method that may be implemented by the above-mentioned communication device (such as a terminal device or a network device).
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system, which includes at least one processor for supporting a communication device to implement the functions involved in the possible implementation methods of the above-mentioned communication device.
  • the chip system also includes an interface circuit, which provides program instructions and/or data for the at least one processor.
  • the chip system may also include a memory, which is used to store the necessary program instructions and data for the communication device.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices, wherein the communication device can specifically be a terminal device or a network device in the aforementioned method embodiment.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, and the network system architecture includes the terminal device and network device in any of the above embodiments.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into a processing unit, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit. If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), random access memory (RAM, Random Access Memory), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A communication method and a related device, used for obtaining a measurement result of a channel between a network device and a terminal device on the basis of measurement information. In the method, a terminal device receives reference signals, the reference signals being sent by means of M digital ports, M being a positive integer, a first digital port amongst the M digital ports comprising N1 virtual ports, and N1 being an integer greater than or equal to 1; and the terminal device sends measurement information, the measurement information comprising first information obtained by performing measurement on the basis of the reference signal sent by means of the first digital port, the first information being determined on the basis of N1 pieces of channel information, the N1 pieces of channel information being respectively determined on the basis of the reference signals sent by means of the N1 virtual ports, and the first information being used for determining weight values of the N1 virtual ports in the first digital port.

Description

一种通信方法及相关设备A communication method and related equipment

本申请要求于2023年11月27日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202311611775.8、申请名称为“一种通信方法及相关设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on November 27, 2023, with application number 202311611775.8 and application name “A communication method and related equipment”, all contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.

技术领域Technical Field

本申请涉及无线通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及相关设备。The present application relates to the field of wireless communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and related equipment.

背景技术Background Art

多输入多输出(multi-input multi-output,MIMO)技术,作为无线通信的一项关键技术,可以用来满足高速率的传输需求。然而,在基于MIMO技术实现的通信过程中,如何实现信道的测量,是一个亟待解决的技术问题。Multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) technology, as a key technology for wireless communication, can be used to meet the needs of high-speed transmission. However, in the communication process based on MIMO technology, how to achieve channel measurement is a technical problem that needs to be solved urgently.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本申请提供了一种通信方法及相关设备,用于基于测量信息获得网络设备与终端设备之间的信道的测量结果之外,在天线阵列规模较大的情况下,终端设备可以基于参考信号的测量结果确定并指示较细粒度的权值,使得网络设备能够基于该权值进行通信,进而减少波束扫描开销,实现快速的波束跟踪。The present application provides a communication method and related equipment, which are used to obtain the measurement results of the channel between the network device and the terminal device based on the measurement information. In the case of a large antenna array, the terminal device can determine and indicate a finer-grained weight based on the measurement results of the reference signal, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing the beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.

本申请第一方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法由终端设备执行,或者,该方法由终端设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行,或者该方法还可以由能实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。在第一方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信方法由终端设备执行为例进行描述。在该方法中,终端设备接收参考信号,该参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,该M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,N1为大于等于1的整数;该终端设备发送测量信息,该测量信息包括基于该第一数字端口发送的参考信号进行测量得到的第一信息;其中,该第一信息是基于N1个信道信息确定的,该N1个信道信息分别是通过该N1个虚拟端口发送的参考信号确定的,该第一信息用于确定该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值。In a first aspect, the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a terminal device, or the method is executed by some components (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.) in the terminal device, or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the terminal device functions. In the first aspect and its possible implementation, the communication method is described as an example of being executed by a terminal device. In the method, the terminal device receives a reference signal, which is sent through M digital ports, M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port of the M digital ports includes N 1 virtual ports, N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the terminal device sends measurement information, and the measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, and the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port.

基于上述技术方案,网络设备在发送参考信号之后,由于参考信号经过无线信道的传输,使得终端设备接收的参考信号能够携带该无线信道的信道信息;此后,终端设备对该参考信号进行测量得到的测量信息能够反映出该信道信息,后续终端设备发送测量信息的方式,能够使得网络设备基于该测量信息获得网络设备与终端设备之间的信道的测量结果。Based on the above technical solution, after the network device sends the reference signal, the reference signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, so that the reference signal received by the terminal device can carry the channel information of the wireless channel; thereafter, the measurement information obtained by the terminal device through measuring the reference signal can reflect the channel information, and the subsequent way in which the terminal device sends the measurement information can enable the network device to obtain the measurement result of the channel between the network device and the terminal device based on the measurement information.

此外,终端设备基于参考信号进行测量得到的测量信息中,包括第一数字端口对应的第一信息,并且,第一信息用于确定第一数字端口中的N1个虚拟端口的权值。换言之,网络设备基于该第一信息可以确定该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值。相比于网络设备基于终端设备反馈的测量信息获得数字端口的权值的方式,由于第一数字端口包含该N1个虚拟端口,使得网络设备基于该第一信息可以确定更细粒度的权值。从而,在天线阵列规模较大的情况下,终端设备可以基于参考信号的测量结果确定并指示较细粒度的权值,使得网络设备能够基于该权值进行通信,进而减少波束扫描开销,实现快速的波束跟踪。In addition, the measurement information obtained by the terminal device based on the reference signal includes the first information corresponding to the first digital port, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port. In other words, the network device can determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port based on the first information. Compared with the way in which the network device obtains the weights of the digital port based on the measurement information fed back by the terminal device, since the first digital port contains the N 1 virtual ports, the network device can determine a finer-grained weight based on the first information. Thus, in the case of a large antenna array, the terminal device can determine and indicate a finer-grained weight based on the measurement result of the reference signal, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing the beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.

可选地,本申请涉及的参考信号可以包括同步信号/物理广播信道块(synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block,SSB,或SS/PBCH block),信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)等。Optionally, the reference signals involved in the present application may include a synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (SSB, or SS/PBCH block), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), etc.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过第一权值向量得到的,该第一权值向量包括N1个元素;其中,该N1个虚拟端口分别对应N1个天线阵子集合,每个天线阵子集合包含一个或多个天线阵子,该N1个元素分别用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the weights of the N1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through a first weight vector, and the first weight vector includes N1 elements; wherein the N1 virtual ports respectively correspond to N1 antenna array sets, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays, and the N1 elements are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N1 antenna array sets.

基于上述技术方案,网络设备在第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过第一权值向量得到的,并且,该N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过包括N1个元素的第一权值向量得到的,该N1个元素分别用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位。换言之,通过调整天线阵子的相位的方式,能够在不同虚拟端口实现 参考信号的发送。Based on the above technical solution, the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port of the network device are obtained by the first weight vector, and the weights of the N 1 virtual ports are obtained by the first weight vector including N 1 elements, and the N 1 elements are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets. In other words, by adjusting the phases of the antenna arrays, it is possible to achieve Transmission of reference signal.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过第一权值向量得到的,包括:该N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过该第一权值向量和第二权值向量得到的,该第二权值向量包括N1个子向量;其中,该N1个子向量中的第T个子向量的维度与该N1个天线阵子集合中的第T个天线阵子集合的天线阵子数相同,T的取值为1至N1In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through a first weight vector, including: the weights of the N 1 virtual ports are obtained through the first weight vector and a second weight vector, and the second weight vector includes N 1 sub-vectors; wherein a dimension of a T-th sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays of a T-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set, and a value of T is 1 to N 1 .

基于上述技术方案,第一权值向量包含的N1个子向量中的第T个子向量的维度,与该N1个天线阵子集合中的第T个天线阵子集合的天线阵子数相同。通过这种方式,使得第一权值向量能够分别对应N1个天线阵子集合中的每个天线阵子集合的权值。Based on the above technical solution, the dimension of the T-th subvector in the N 1 subvectors included in the first weight vector is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the T-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets. In this way, the first weight vector can correspond to the weight of each antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一信息满足以下任一项:In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the first information satisfies any of the following:

该第一信息包括该第一权值向量的量化处理结果;The first information includes a quantization processing result of the first weight vector;

该第一信息包括对该N1个虚拟端口中的其中一个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素中的一个元素,以及,除了该其中一个虚拟端口之外的其他N1-1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素中的N1-1个元素相对于该一个元素的差值对应的量化处理结果;The first information includes one element of the N 1 elements corresponding to one of the N 1 virtual ports, and a quantization processing result corresponding to a difference between N 1 -1 elements of the N 1 elements corresponding to other N 1 -1 virtual ports except the one of the virtual ports and the one element;

该第一信息包括第一索引和第二索引,该第一索引和该第二索引用于在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中确定该第一数字端口的第一权值向量;其中,该第一索引为第一维度上的码本索引,该第二索引为第二维度上的码本索引,在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中,每个权值向量是通过第一维度上的权值与第二维度上的权值确定的;The first information includes a first index and a second index, and the first index and the second index are used to determine a first weight vector of the first digital port in one or more weight vectors included in a codebook set; wherein the first index is a codebook index on a first dimension, and the second index is a codebook index on a second dimension, and in the one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set, each weight vector is determined by a weight on the first dimension and a weight on the second dimension;

该第一信息包括第三索引,该第三索引用于在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中确定该第一数字端口的第一权值向量。The first information includes a third index, and the third index is used to determine a first weight vector of the first digital port among one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set.

基于上述技术方案,第一信息可以通过上述任一项方式实现,以提升方案实现的灵活性。Based on the above technical solution, the first information can be implemented through any of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收第二信息,该第二信息用于确定该码本集合。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: the terminal device receiving second information, where the second information is used to determine the codebook set.

可选地,该码本集合是通过一个或多个数字端口中的虚拟端口的端口信息确定的,任一数字端口中的虚拟端口的端口信息包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the codebook set is determined by port information of a virtual port in one or more digital ports, and the port information of the virtual port in any digital port includes at least one of the following:

数字端口包含的虚拟端口数为N1The number of virtual ports included in the digital port is N 1 ;

在该数字端口的第一维度上的虚拟端口数为M1The number of virtual ports on the first dimension of the digital port is M 1 ;

在该数字端口的第二维度上的虚拟端口数为M2The number of virtual ports in the second dimension of the digital port is M 2 ;

在该数字端口的第一维度上的过采样因子为O1The oversampling factor in the first dimension of the digital port is O 1 ;

在该数字端口的第二维度上的过采样因子为O2The oversampling factor in the second dimension of the digital port is O 2 .

基于上述技术方案,在第一信息包括索引(例如第一索引、第二索引、第三索引等)的情况下,终端设备还可以接收第二信息,并通过该第二信息确定码本集合,后续可以基于第一信息指示的索引在该码本集合中确定第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值。Based on the above technical solution, when the first information includes an index (for example, a first index, a second index, a third index, etc.), the terminal device can also receive the second information and determine a codebook set through the second information, and subsequently determine the weights of the N1 virtual ports in the first digital port in the codebook set based on the index indicated by the first information.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二信息满足以下至少一项;In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the second information satisfies at least one of the following:

该第二信息包括该第一数字端口包含的虚拟端口的端口信息;The second information includes port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port;

该第二信息包括第四索引,该第四索引用于在预配置或预定义的一种或多种虚拟端口的端口信息中确定第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息;The second information includes a fourth index, and the fourth index is used to determine the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port in the port information of one or more preconfigured or predefined virtual ports;

该第二信息包括第五索引,该第五索引用于在预配置或预定义的一个或多个码本集合中确定该码本集合;The second information includes a fifth index, where the fifth index is used to determine the codebook set in one or more preconfigured or predefined codebook sets;

该第二信息用于指示该第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息中的部分项,并且,该第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息中的其他项通过该部分项以及预配置的一种或多种虚拟端口的端口信息确定;The second information is used to indicate some items in the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port, and other items in the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port are determined by the partial items and the port information of one or more pre-configured virtual ports;

该第二信息用于指示该第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息,并且,该虚拟端口的端口信息用于在预配置或预定义的一个或多个码本集合中确定该码本集合。The second information is used to indicate the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port, and the port information of the virtual port is used to determine the codebook set from one or more preconfigured or predefined codebook sets.

基于上述技术方案,第二信息可以通过上述至少一项方式实现,以提升方案实现的灵活性。Based on the above technical solution, the second information can be implemented by at least one of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该测量信息包括该M个信息和/或该K个信息;其中,该M个信息分别用于确定该M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量;该M个信息中的其中一个信息为 该第一信息;该K个信息分别用于确定K组数字端口中每个数字端口组包含的数字端口的第一权值向量,其中,K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包括该M个数字端口中的一个或多个数字端口,K为小于或等于M的正整数;该K个信息中的其中一个信息为该第一信息。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information; wherein the M information is respectively used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports; one of the M information is The first information; the K pieces of information are respectively used to determine the first weight vector of the digital ports included in each digital port group in the K groups of digital ports, wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports in the M digital ports, and K is a positive integer less than or equal to M; one of the K pieces of information is the first information.

基于上述技术方案,终端设备发送的测量信息可以包括M个信息和/或K个信息,通过这种方式,使得网络设备能够通过该M个信息和/或该K个信息确定M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量。Based on the above technical solution, the measurement information sent by the terminal device may include M information and/or K information. In this way, the network device can determine the first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports through the M information and/or the K information.

可选地,该测量信息满足以下任一项:Optionally, the measurement information satisfies any of the following:

该参考信号的秩(rank)数满足第一条件时,该测量信息包括该M个信息;When the rank number of the reference signal satisfies the first condition, the measurement information includes the M pieces of information;

该参考信号的rank数满足第二条件时,该测量信息包括该K个信息;When the rank number of the reference signal satisfies the second condition, the measurement information includes the K pieces of information;

该参考信号的信道质量信息CQI满足第三条件时,该测量信息包括该M个信息;When the channel quality information CQI of the reference signal satisfies the third condition, the measurement information includes the M pieces of information;

该参考信号的CQI满足第四条件时,该测量信息包括该K个信息。When the CQI of the reference signal satisfies the fourth condition, the measurement information includes the K pieces of information.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收指示该测量信息包括该M个信息和/或该K个信息的指示信息。通过这种方式,能够使得终端设备和网络设备明确测量信息所承载的信息内容。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the method further includes: the terminal device receives indication information indicating that the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information. In this way, the terminal device and the network device can clearly understand the information content carried by the measurement information.

可选地,该指示信息承载于参考信号的配置信息,或者是其他的消息/信息/信令等,此处不做限定。Optionally, the indication information is carried in configuration information of a reference signal, or is other message/information/signaling, etc., which is not limited here.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在该K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包含的一个或多个数字端口中,不同数字端口的虚拟端口的端口信息是相同的。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in one or more digital ports included in each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports, port information of virtual ports of different digital ports is the same.

基于上述技术方案,在测量信息包括K个信息的情况下,K个信息分别用于确定K组数字端口中每个数字端口组包含的数字端口的第一权值向量,其中,K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包括该M个数字端口中的一个或多个数字端口。并且,在该K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包含的一个或多个数字端口中,不同数字端口的虚拟端口的端口信息是相同的。通过这种方式,可以简化测量信息的反馈过程,能够降低实现复杂度。Based on the above technical solution, when the measurement information includes K pieces of information, the K pieces of information are respectively used to determine the first weight vector of the digital ports included in each digital port group in the K groups of digital ports, wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports in the M digital ports. Moreover, among the one or more digital ports included in each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports, the port information of the virtual ports of different digital ports is the same. In this way, the feedback process of the measurement information can be simplified and the implementation complexity can be reduced.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该测量信息为第一载波对应的测量信息,该测量信息用于确定该第一载波对应的M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量,该第一载波包括一个或多个载波;In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first carrier, the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in M digital ports corresponding to the first carrier, and the first carrier includes one or more carriers;

或,该测量信息为第一BWP对应的测量信息,该测量信息用于确定该第一BWP对应的M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量,该第一BWP包括一个或多个BWP;Or, the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first BWP, and the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port among M digital ports corresponding to the first BWP, and the first BWP includes one or more BWPs;

或该测量信息为第一带宽对应的测量信息,该测量信息用于确定该第一带宽对应的M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量,该第一带宽包括一个或多个子带。Or the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first bandwidth, and the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports corresponding to the first bandwidth, and the first bandwidth includes one or more sub-bands.

基于上述技术方案,测量信息可以用于确定一个或多个载波(或,一个或多个BWP,或一个或多个子带)对应的M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量,以提升方案实现的灵活性。Based on the above technical solution, the measurement information can be used to determine the first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports corresponding to one or more carriers (or, one or more BWPs, or one or more subbands) to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该参考信号在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的,L1为大于1的整数;该L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值是通过L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值与第三权值得到的,该L1个第二权值是正交的,i的取值为1至L1In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the reference signal is sent through L 1 first weights in L 1 time units respectively, where L 1 is an integer greater than 1; the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained through the i-th second weight and the third weight among the L 1 second weights, the L 1 second weights are orthogonal, and the value of i is 1 to L 1 .

基于上述技术方案,终端设备基于参考信号进行测量得到的测量信息中,可以包括第一数字端口对应的第一信息,并且,第一信息用于确定该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值。其中,N1个虚拟端口在L1个时间单元上对应的L1个第二权值是正交的,通过这种方式,使得终端设备对L1个时间单元承载的参考信号进行测量得到测量结果之后,该终端设备能够基于该测量结果确定第一数字端口中的虚拟端口的较优的(或最优的)权值,并通过第一信息指示该权值,后续网络设备能够基于该权值与该终端设备进行通信。从而,在天线阵列规模较大的情况下,网络设备通过不同时间单元上基于正交的第二权值发送参考信号(一般地,基于不同权值发送的参考信号可以理解为基于不同波束发送的参考信号)的方式,终端设备可以基于不同时间单元的测量结果确定并指示较优的(或最优的)权值,使得网络设备能够基于该权值进行通信,进而减少波束扫描开销,实现快速的波束跟踪。Based on the above technical solution, the measurement information obtained by the terminal device based on the reference signal measurement may include the first information corresponding to the first digital port, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port. Among them, the L 1 second weights corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports on the L 1 time units are orthogonal. In this way, after the terminal device measures the reference signal carried by the L 1 time units to obtain the measurement result, the terminal device can determine the better (or optimal) weight of the virtual port in the first digital port based on the measurement result, and indicate the weight through the first information, and the subsequent network device can communicate with the terminal device based on the weight. Thus, when the antenna array is large, the network device sends reference signals based on orthogonal second weights at different time units (generally, reference signals sent based on different weights can be understood as reference signals sent based on different beams). The terminal device can determine and indicate a better (or optimal) weight based on the measurement results of different time units, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.

可选地,终端设备对L1个时间单元承载的参考信号进行测量得到个测量结果之后,该终端设备能够基于该测量结果和数学方法确定第一数字端口中的虚拟端口的较优的(或最优的)权值,例如,该数学方法可以包括功率最大化准则、容量最大化准则确定等。Optionally, after the terminal device measures the reference signal carried by L 1 time units to obtain a measurement result, the terminal device can determine a better (or optimal) weight of the virtual port in the first digital port based on the measurement result and a mathematical method. For example, the mathematical method may include power maximization criteria, capacity maximization criteria, etc.

本申请中,在L1个时间单元(或后文提及的L2个时间单元)中,每个时间单元可以为一个或多个符号,一个或多个微时隙,一个或多个时隙,一个或多个子帧等。 In the present application, in L1 time units (or L2 time units mentioned later), each time unit can be one or more symbols, one or more mini-slots, one or more time slots, one or more subframes, etc.

可选地,L1个时间单元在时域上是连续的。由于时域上连续的不同时间单元的信道信息关联性较强,通过这种方式,能够使得终端设备基于该L1个时间单元的参考信号对应的不同测量结果能够尽可能地反映出相同或相近的信道信息,以获得准确度更高的测量信息。Optionally, the L 1 time units are continuous in the time domain. Since the channel information of different continuous time units in the time domain is highly correlated, in this way, the different measurement results corresponding to the reference signals of the L 1 time units of the terminal device can reflect the same or similar channel information as much as possible, so as to obtain more accurate measurement information.

可选地,该L1个时间单元中至少两个时间单元在时域上为不连续的。Optionally, at least two time units among the L 1 time units are discontinuous in the time domain.

应理解,参考信号在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的,可以理解为,L1个时间单元与L1个第一权值一一对应。例如,参考信号在L1个时间单元中的第i个时间单元的权值为L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值。It should be understood that the reference signal is sent through L1 first weights in L1 time units respectively, and it can be understood that L1 time units correspond to L1 first weights one by one. For example, the weight of the reference signal in the i-th time unit in the L1 time units is the i-th first weight in the L1 first weights.

可选地,每个时间单元上的参考信号可以视为一个参考信号,即“承载于L1个时间单元的参考信号”可以视为L1个参考信号。相应的,上述方法可以执行一次或多次,即通过一个或多个的L1个时间单元分别实现一个或多个的L1个参考信号的收发过程。Optionally, the reference signal on each time unit can be regarded as one reference signal, that is, "the reference signal carried on L 1 time units" can be regarded as L 1 reference signals. Accordingly, the above method can be performed once or multiple times, that is, the sending and receiving process of one or more L 1 reference signals is respectively implemented through one or more L 1 time units.

或者,每L1个时间单元上的参考信号可以视为一个参考信号,即“承载于L1个时间单元的参考信号”可以视为1个参考信号。相应的,上述方法可以执行一次或多次,即通过一个或多个的L1个时间单元分别实现一个或多个参考信号的收发过程。Alternatively, the reference signal on each L 1 time unit can be regarded as one reference signal, that is, "the reference signal carried on L 1 time unit" can be regarded as 1 reference signal. Accordingly, the above method can be performed once or multiple times, that is, the sending and receiving process of one or more reference signals is respectively implemented through one or more L 1 time units.

应理解,L1个第二权值是正交的,可以理解为,L1个第二权值中的任意两个第二权值是相互正交的,或,L1个第二权值中的不同第二权值是两两正交的。应理解,L1个第二权值是正交的,L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值是通过L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值与第三权值得到的,换言之,L1个第一权值是基于L1个第二权值得到的。其中,该L1个第一权值中的不同权值可以是正交的,也可以是不正交的,此处不做限定。It should be understood that L1 second weights are orthogonal, which can be understood as any two second weights in the L1 second weights are mutually orthogonal, or different second weights in the L1 second weights are orthogonal to each other. It should be understood that L1 second weights are orthogonal, and the i-th first weight in the L1 first weights is obtained by the i-th second weight in the L1 second weights and the third weight. In other words, the L1 first weights are obtained based on the L1 second weights. Among them, the different weights in the L1 first weights can be orthogonal or non-orthogonal, which is not limited here.

需要说明的是,该L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值是通过L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值与第三权值得到的,包括:该L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值,是该L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值中的N1个元素分别与第三权值中的N1个子向量相乘得到的。It should be noted that the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained by the i-th second weight among the L 1 second weights and the third weight, including: the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained by multiplying the N 1 elements of the i-th second weight among the L 1 second weights by the N 1 sub-vectors in the third weight.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,该M个数字端口中的第一数字端口在该L1个时间单元对应的权值为该L1个第一权值;该第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,该第二权值包含与该N1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素,N1为大于等于1的整数。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the reference signal is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein a weight corresponding to a first digital port among the M digital ports in the L 1 time units is the L 1 first weights; the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, the second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, and N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

可选地,在M大于1的情况下,M个数字端口发送参考信号的权值可以是相同的(例如均为该L1个第一权值),或,该M个数字端口发送参考信号的权值可以互不相同的(例如第一数字端口对应的权值为该L1个第一权值,而其它数字端口对应的权值不同于该L1个第一权值),或,该M个数字端口发送参考信号的权值可以部分相同的(例如第一数字端口对应的权值为该L1个第一权值,而其它数字端口中一部分数字端口对应的权值不同于该L1个第一权值,且其它数字端口中另一部分数字端口对应的权值与该L1个第一权值相同)。Optionally, when M is greater than 1, the weights of the M digital ports sending reference signals may be the same (for example, all are the L 1 first weights), or, the weights of the M digital ports sending reference signals may be different from each other (for example, the weight corresponding to the first digital port is the L 1 first weights, while the weights corresponding to other digital ports are different from the L 1 first weights), or, the weights of the M digital ports sending reference signals may be partially the same (for example, the weight corresponding to the first digital port is the L 1 first weights, while the weights corresponding to some of the other digital ports are different from the L 1 first weights, and the weights corresponding to another part of the other digital ports are the same as the L 1 first weights).

应理解,第二权值包含与该N1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素,在L1个第二权值中,每个第二权值包含的元素数量均为N1。换言之,在L1个第二权值中,每个第二权值均包含与该N1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素。由前文描述可知,不同第二权值之间可以是正交的,为此,在L1个第二权值中,不同第二权值包含的N1个元素是不完全相同的。本申请中,虚拟端口可以替换为其它术语,例如模拟端口,虚拟子阵,模拟子阵,子阵等。It should be understood that the second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, and in the L 1 second weights, the number of elements included in each second weight is N 1. In other words, in the L 1 second weights, each second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports. As can be seen from the foregoing description, different second weights can be orthogonal, so in the L 1 second weights, the N 1 elements included in different second weights are not completely the same. In the present application, virtual port can be replaced by other terms, such as analog port, virtual subarray, analog subarray, subarray, etc.

基于上述技术方案,参考信号在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的,该L1个第一权值可以是M个数字端口中的第一数字端口的权值。其中,该第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,该第二权值包含与该N1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素,即该第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口在L1个时间单元上的对应的L1个第二权值是正交的。通过这种方式,使得同一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口在不同时间单元上的权值是正交的。Based on the above technical solution, the reference signal is sent through L 1 first weights in L 1 time units respectively, and the L 1 first weights can be the weights of the first digital port among the M digital ports. The first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and the second weights include N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, that is, the corresponding L 1 second weights of the virtual ports included in the first digital port in the L 1 time units are orthogonal. In this way, the weights of the virtual ports included in the same digital port in different time units are orthogonal.

可选地,L1是N1的整数倍。例如,N1与L1是相等的。Optionally, L 1 is an integer multiple of N 1. For example, N 1 is equal to L 1 .

可选地,该N1个虚拟端口在该L1个时间单元的不同时间单元上占据的频域资源是相同的。通过这种方式,能够尽可能的降低参考信号在不同时间单元的收发的实现复杂度。Optionally, the frequency domain resources occupied by the N 1 virtual ports in different time units of the L 1 time units are the same. In this way, the implementation complexity of sending and receiving reference signals in different time units can be reduced as much as possible.

可选地,终端设备还可以接收指示该第一数字端口包含的虚拟端口数为N1的指示信息,和/或,终端设备还可以接收指示该参考信号的时间单元数为L1的指示信息。其中,这两个指示信息可以承载于参考信号的配置信息中,也可以承载于其它信息/消息/信令中,此处不做限定。 Optionally, the terminal device may also receive indication information indicating that the number of virtual ports included in the first digital port is N 1 , and/or, the terminal device may also receive indication information indicating that the number of time units of the reference signal is L 1. These two indication information may be carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or may be carried in other information/messages/signaling, which is not limited here.

可选地,N1和L1为预配置的信息,此处不做限定。Optionally, N 1 and L 1 are pre-configured information and are not limited here.

应理解,一个数字端口包含一个或多个虚拟端口(例如第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,后文描述的第二数字端口包括N2个虚拟端口等),可以理解为,该数字端口的信号是通过该一个或多个虚拟端口进行收发的。例如,在信号发送过程中,该数字端口通过该一个或多个虚拟端口发送信号;又如,在信号接收过程中,一个或多个虚拟端口接收的信号可以理解为该数字端口接收的信号。It should be understood that a digital port includes one or more virtual ports (for example, a first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and a second digital port described later includes N 2 virtual ports, etc.), and it can be understood that the signal of the digital port is sent and received through the one or more virtual ports. For example, in the process of signal transmission, the digital port sends the signal through the one or more virtual ports; for another example, in the process of signal reception, the signal received by one or more virtual ports can be understood as the signal received by the digital port.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该N1个虚拟端口分别对应N1个天线阵子集合,每个天线阵子集合包含一个或多个天线阵子,该N1个元素分别用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the N1 virtual ports respectively correspond to N1 antenna array sets, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays, and the N1 elements are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N1 antenna array sets.

可选地,N1个虚拟端口指的是发送参考信号的虚拟端口(即网络设备的虚拟端口),相应的,该N1个虚拟端口对应的N1个天线阵子集合为发送参考信号的天线阵子集合(即网络设备的天线阵子集合)。Optionally, the N 1 virtual ports refer to virtual ports for sending reference signals (i.e., virtual ports of network devices), and accordingly, the N 1 antenna array sets corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports are antenna array sets for sending reference signals (i.e., antenna array sets of network devices).

可选地,N1个虚拟端口分别对应N1个天线阵子集合,可以理解为,N1个虚拟端口与N1个天线阵子集合一一对应,或,N1个虚拟端口中的第i个虚拟端口对应于N1个天线阵子集合中的第i个天线阵子集合。类似地,N1个元素分别用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位,可以理解为,N1个元素与N1个天线阵子集合一一对应,或,N1个元素中的第i个元素用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合中的第i个天线阵子集合的相位,i取值为1至N1Optionally, N 1 virtual ports correspond to N 1 antenna array sets respectively, which can be understood as, N 1 virtual ports correspond to N 1 antenna array sets one-to-one, or, the i-th virtual port in the N 1 virtual ports corresponds to the i-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets. Similarly, N 1 elements are respectively used to adjust the phase of the N 1 antenna array sets, which can be understood as, N 1 elements correspond to N 1 antenna array sets one-to-one, or, the i-th element in the N 1 elements is used to adjust the phase of the i-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set, and i ranges from 1 to N 1 .

基于上述技术方案,第一数字端口包含的N1个虚拟端口分别对应N1个天线阵子集合,第二权值包含的N1个元素分别用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位。并且,每个天线阵子集合包含一个或多个天线阵子,换言之,第二权值所包含的N1个元素用于调节数字端口中不同虚拟端口对应的天线阵子的相位,即L1个正交的第二权值用于实现不同虚拟端口对应的天线阵子的相位的正交。Based on the above technical solution, the N 1 virtual ports included in the first digital port correspond to N 1 antenna array sets respectively, and the N 1 elements included in the second weights are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets. Moreover, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays. In other words, the N 1 elements included in the second weights are used to adjust the phases of the antenna arrays corresponding to different virtual ports in the digital port, that is, the L 1 orthogonal second weights are used to achieve orthogonal phases of the antenna arrays corresponding to different virtual ports.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第三权值包括N1个子向量,该N1个子向量中的第P个子向量的维度与该N1个天线阵子集合中的第P个天线阵子集合的天线阵子数相同,P的取值为1至N1In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the third weight includes N 1 subvectors, a dimension of a P th subvector in the N 1 subvectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays in a P th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets, and a value of P is 1 to N 1 .

基于上述技术方案,第三权值包含的N1个子向量中的第P个子向量的维度,与该N1个天线阵子集合中的第P个天线阵子集合的天线阵子数相同。通过这种方式,使得第三权值能够分别对应N1个天线阵子集合中的每个天线阵子集合的权值。Based on the above technical solution, the dimension of the Pth sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors included in the third weight is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the Pth antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets. In this way, the third weight can correspond to the weight of each antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets.

可选地,第二权值包含的N1个元素分别用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位,相应的,第三权值包括N1个子向量也用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位,第一权值也用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位。换言之,该N1个天线阵子集合的相位,可以是基于第二权值包含的N1个元素以及第三权值包括N1个子向量所确定的第一权值确定的。Optionally, the N 1 elements included in the second weight are respectively used to adjust the phase of the N 1 antenna array set, and accordingly, the third weight includes N 1 subvectors and is also used to adjust the phase of the N 1 antenna array set, and the first weight is also used to adjust the phase of the N 1 antenna array set. In other words, the phase of the N 1 antenna array set can be determined based on the N 1 elements included in the second weight and the first weight determined by the N 1 subvectors included in the third weight.

可选地,第三权值可以是通过其它参考信号确定的。例如,网络设备可以通过不同的波束(或不同的权值)发送该其它参考信号之后,终端设备可以基于该不同的波束反馈多个信号质量信息,相应的,网络设备可以基于该多个信号质量信息中信号质量最优的信号质量信息确定该第三权值,或者,网络设备可以基于该多个信号质量信息中大于门限的信号质量信息确定该第三权值,或者,网络设备可以基于终端反馈的一个或多个参考信号的质量(例如,RSRP)确定该第三权值。Optionally, the third weight may be determined by other reference signals. For example, after the network device sends the other reference signals through different beams (or different weights), the terminal device may feed back multiple signal quality information based on the different beams. Accordingly, the network device may determine the third weight based on the signal quality information with the best signal quality among the multiple signal quality information, or the network device may determine the third weight based on the signal quality information greater than a threshold among the multiple signal quality information, or the network device may determine the third weight based on the quality of one or more reference signals fed back by the terminal (for example, RSRP).

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一权值与该第三权值的维度相同。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the first weight and the third weight have the same dimension.

基于上述技术方案,第一权值与该第三权值的维度相同的,即用于发送参考信号的第一权值能够确定N1个天线阵子集合中的每个天线阵子集合的权值。Based on the above technical solution, the first weight and the third weight have the same dimension, that is, the first weight used to send the reference signal can determine the weight of each antenna element set in the N1 antenna element sets.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,M取值为1。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the value of M is 1.

基于上述技术方案,在M取值为1的情况下,参考信号可以是通过一个数字端口(即第一数字端口)发送的,使得方案适用于网络设备配置了单个数字端口的场景下,实现对该单个数字端口包含的虚拟端口的参考信号的传输及测量。Based on the above technical solution, when the value of M is 1, the reference signal can be sent through a digital port (i.e., the first digital port), so that the solution is suitable for the scenario where the network device is configured with a single digital port, and the transmission and measurement of the reference signal of the virtual port contained in the single digital port can be realized.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,M取值大于1,其中,该参考信号的资源满足以下其中一项:In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the value of M is greater than 1, wherein the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the following:

在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的时域资源和频域资源是相同的,且该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口是码分复用的;In the resources of the reference signal, time domain resources and frequency domain resources used by different digital ports among the M digital ports to send the reference signal are the same, and different digital ports among the M digital ports are code division multiplexed;

在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的时域资源是相同的,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的频域资源是不同的(可选地,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口无码分复用);In the resources of the reference signal, time domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different (optionally, different digital ports among the M digital ports are not code-division multiplexed);

在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口属于Q组数字端口,每组数字端口包括一个或多个数字端 口,Q为正整数;其中,该Q组数字端口中的不同组数字端口发送该参考信号的频域资源是不同的,该Q组数字端口中的同一组数字端口包含的一个或多个数字端口发送所述参考信号的频域资源是相同的,且该同一组数字端口组包含的一个或多个数字端口发送是码分复用(code division multiplexing,CDM)的。可选的,该同一组数字端口组包含的一个或多个数字端口的码分复用类型为频域码分复用。In the resource of the reference signal, the M digital ports belong to Q groups of digital ports, each group of digital ports includes one or more digital ports. Q is a positive integer; wherein the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different groups of digital ports in the Q groups of digital ports are different, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports in the Q groups of digital ports are the same, and the sending of the one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports is code division multiplexing (CDM). Optionally, the code division multiplexing type of the one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports is frequency domain code division multiplexing.

应理解,参考信号的资源指的是用于承载参考信号的资源,即该参考信号的资源可以为网络设备发送参考信号的资源,或者,该参考信号的资源可以为终端设备接收参考信号的资源。It should be understood that the reference signal resource refers to the resource used to carry the reference signal, that is, the reference signal resource can be the resource for the network device to send the reference signal, or the reference signal resource can be the resource for the terminal device to receive the reference signal.

本申请中,权值向量、权值、加权值、加权向量等术语可以相互替换。例如,第一权值向量可以替换为“权值”,如第七权值。又如,后文描述的第二权值向量也可以替换为“权值”,如第八权值。又如,第一权值、第三权值、第四权值、第六权值中的“权值”也可以替换为模拟权值。In this application, terms such as weight vector, weight, weighted value, weighted vector, etc. can be replaced with each other. For example, the first weight vector can be replaced with "weight", such as the seventh weight. For another example, the second weight vector described later can also be replaced with "weight", such as the eighth weight. For another example, the "weight" in the first weight, the third weight, the fourth weight, and the sixth weight can also be replaced with a simulated weight.

基于上述技术方案,在M取值大于1的情况下,参考信号可以是通过两个或两个以上的数字端口(即第一数字端口以及其它数字端口)发送的,使得方案适用于网络设备配置了两个或两个以上数字端口的场景下,实现对该两个或两个以上数字端口包含的虚拟端口的参考信号的传输及测量。并且,该参考信号的资源满足上述其中一项,以提升方案实现的灵活性。Based on the above technical solution, when the value of M is greater than 1, the reference signal can be sent through two or more digital ports (i.e., the first digital port and other digital ports), so that the solution is applicable to the scenario where the network device is configured with two or more digital ports, and realizes the transmission and measurement of the reference signal of the virtual port included in the two or more digital ports. In addition, the resource of the reference signal meets one of the above items to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收指示该参考信号的资源满足该其中一项的指示信息。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: the terminal device receiving indication information indicating that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the items.

可选地,该指示信息承载于参考信号的配置信息,或者是其他的消息/信息/信令等,此处不做限定。Optionally, the indication information is carried in configuration information of a reference signal, or is other message/information/signaling, etc., which is not limited here.

基于上述技术方案,终端设备还可以接收指示参考信号的资源满足该其中一项的指示信息,使得终端设备能够基于该指示信息明确M个数字端口中不同数字端口的资源配置方式。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device can also receive indication information indicating that the resource of the reference signal meets one of the items, so that the terminal device can clarify the resource configuration method of different digital ports among the M digital ports based on the indication information.

可选地,终端设备通过预配置的方式确定该参考信号的资源满足上述其中一项。Optionally, the terminal device determines through preconfiguration that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the above items.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该M个数字端口中的第二数字端口包括N2个虚拟端口;其中,该参考信号在L2个时间单元上分别是通过L2个第四权值发送的,L2为大于1的整数;该L2个第四权值中的第j个第四权值是通过L2个第五权值中的第j个第五权值与第六权值得到的,该L2个第五权值是正交的。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, a second digital port among the M digital ports includes N 2 virtual ports; wherein the reference signal is sent through L 2 fourth weights in L 2 time units respectively, and L 2 is an integer greater than 1; the j-th fourth weight among the L 2 fourth weights is obtained through the j-th fifth weight and the sixth weight among the L 2 fifth weights, and the L 2 fifth weights are orthogonal.

基于上述技术方案,终端设备接收的参考信号在L2个时间单元上分别是通过L2个第四权值发送的,并且,该L2个第四权值中的第j个第四权值是通过L2个第五权值中的第j个第五权值与第六权值得到的,该L2个第五权值是正交的。换言之,在L2个时间单元传输的参考信号是通过相互正交的L2个第五权值发送的。通过这种方式,使得终端设备对不同时间单元上承载的参考信号的测量是相对独立的,进而获得L1个相对独立的信道信息,以获得准确度更高的测量信息。Based on the above technical solution, the reference signal received by the terminal device is sent through L 2 fourth weights in L 2 time units, and the j-th fourth weight among the L 2 fourth weights is obtained through the j-th fifth weight and the sixth weight among the L 2 fifth weights, and the L 2 fifth weights are orthogonal. In other words, the reference signal transmitted in L 2 time units is sent through L 2 fifth weights that are orthogonal to each other. In this way, the terminal device's measurements of the reference signals carried on different time units are relatively independent, and then L 1 relatively independent channel information is obtained to obtain measurement information with higher accuracy.

可选地,在M个数字端口中,在第一数字端口和第二数字端口发送参考信号的权值相同的情况下,L1个第一权值与L2个第四权值可以是相同的;在第一数字端口和第二数字端口发送参考信号的权值不同的情况下,L1个第一权值不同于L2个第四权值。Optionally, among the M digital ports, when the weights of the reference signals sent by the first digital port and the second digital port are the same, L1 first weights and L2 fourth weights may be the same; when the weights of the reference signals sent by the first digital port and the second digital port are different, the L1 first weights are different from the L2 fourth weights.

可选地,L1与L2相等。其中,L1个时间单元和L2个时间单元可以是相同的时间单元,即M个数字端口中的第一数字端口发送参考信号的时域资源与第二数字端口发送参考信号的时域资源可以是相同的。通过这种方式,能够尽可能地复用相同的时间单元,以节省通信资源并降低实现复杂度。Optionally, L1 is equal to L2 . Among them, L1 time units and L2 time units may be the same time units, that is, the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by the first digital port among the M digital ports and the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by the second digital port may be the same. In this way, the same time unit can be reused as much as possible to save communication resources and reduce implementation complexity.

可选地,N1与N2相等。即M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包含的虚拟端口的数量与第二数字端口包含的虚拟端口的数量可以是相同的,通过这种方式,能够降低实现复杂度。Optionally, N1 is equal to N2 . That is, the number of virtual ports included in the first digital port and the number of virtual ports included in the second digital port among the M digital ports may be the same. In this way, the implementation complexity can be reduced.

需要说明的是,第二数字端口的实现过程可以参考前文第一数字端口的实现过程。例如,L2个时间单元与L2个第四权值之间的对应关系可以参考L1个时间单元与L1个第一权值之间的对应关系,L2个第四权值与L2个第五权值之间的对应关系可以参考L1个第一权值与L1个第二权值之间的对应关系等。It should be noted that the implementation process of the second digital port can refer to the implementation process of the first digital port in the foregoing text. For example, the correspondence between L2 time units and L2 fourth weights can refer to the correspondence between L1 time units and L1 first weights, and the correspondence between L2 fourth weights and L2 fifth weights can refer to the correspondence between L1 first weights and L1 second weights, etc.

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的时域资源和频域资源是相同的,且不同数字端口是码分复用的情况下,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的资源在频域上均包括相同的M个频域单元。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, in the resources of the reference signal, the time domain resources and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, and when different digital ports are code division multiplexed, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports include the same M frequency domain units in the frequency domain.

基于上述技术方案,M大于1,在M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的时域资源和频域资源是相同的,且不同数字端口是码分复用的情况下,不同数字端口发送该参考信号的资源在频域上均包括相同的M个频域单元。通过这种方式,能够使得不同数字端口在相同的频域单元上以码分复用的方式发送参考信号,可以尽可能地复用相同的频域单元,以节省通信资源并降低实现复杂度。 Based on the above technical solution, M is greater than 1, and the time domain resources and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, and when different digital ports are code division multiplexed, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports in the frequency domain all include the same M frequency domain units. In this way, different digital ports can send reference signals in a code division multiplexed manner on the same frequency domain unit, and the same frequency domain unit can be reused as much as possible to save communication resources and reduce implementation complexity.

可选地,M个频域单元中,每个频域单元可以包括一个或多个子载波/资源单元(resource element,RE)。Optionally, among the M frequency domain units, each frequency domain unit may include one or more subcarriers/resource elements (RE).

在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的时域资源是相同的,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的频域资源是不同的,且该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口无码分复用(no CDM)的情况下,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的资源在频域上包括互不相同的M个频域单元。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the resources of the reference signal, the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and in the case of no code division multiplexing (no CDM) by different digital ports among the M digital ports, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports include M different frequency domain units in the frequency domain.

基于上述技术方案,M大于1,在该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的频域资源是不同的,且该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口无码分复用的情况下,不同数字端口发送该参考信号的资源在频域上包括互不相同的M个频域单元。通过这种方式,能够在无码分复用的情况下,使得不同数字端口在不同频域资源上实现参考信号的发送,能够提升方案实现的灵活性。Based on the above technical solution, M is greater than 1, and the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and when different digital ports among the M digital ports are not code-division multiplexed, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports include M frequency domain units that are different from each other in the frequency domain. In this way, different digital ports can send reference signals on different frequency domain resources without code-division multiplexing, which can improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.

可选地,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收指示该互不相同的M个频域单元的指示信息,使得终端设备基于该指示信息明确各个频域单元的资源位置。可选地,该指示信息承载于参考信号的配置信息,或者是其他的消息/信息/信令等,此处不做限定。Optionally, the method further includes: the terminal device receives indication information indicating the M different frequency domain units, so that the terminal device specifies the resource location of each frequency domain unit based on the indication information. Optionally, the indication information is carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or other messages/information/signaling, etc., which are not limited here.

本申请第二方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法由网络设备执行,或者,该方法由网络设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行,或者该方法还可以由能实现全部或部分网络设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。在第二方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信方法由网络设备执行为例进行描述。在该方法中,网络设备发送参考信号,该参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,该M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,N1为大于等于1的整数;该网络设备接收测量信息,该测量信息包括基于该第一数字端口发送的参考信号进行测量得到的第一信息;其中,该第一信息是基于N1个信道信息确定的,该N1个信道信息分别是通过该N1个虚拟端口发送的参考信号确定的。The second aspect of the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a network device, or the method is executed by some components in the network device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the network device functions. In the second aspect and its possible implementation, the communication method is described as an example of being executed by a network device. In this method, the network device sends a reference signal, which is sent through M digital ports, M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port of the M digital ports includes N 1 virtual ports, N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the network device receives measurement information, and the measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, and the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports.

基于上述技术方案,网络设备在发送参考信号之后,由于参考信号经过无线信道的传输,使得终端设备接收的参考信号能够携带该无线信道的信道信息;此后,终端设备对该参考信号进行测量得到的测量信息能够反映出该信道信息,后续终端设备发送测量信息的方式,能够使得网络设备基于该测量信息获得网络设备与终端设备之间的信道的测量结果。Based on the above technical solution, after the network device sends the reference signal, the reference signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, so that the reference signal received by the terminal device can carry the channel information of the wireless channel; thereafter, the measurement information obtained by the terminal device through measuring the reference signal can reflect the channel information, and the subsequent way in which the terminal device sends the measurement information can enable the network device to obtain the measurement result of the channel between the network device and the terminal device based on the measurement information.

此外,终端设备基于参考信号进行测量得到的测量信息中,包括第一数字端口对应的第一信息,并且,第一信息用于确定第一数字端口中的N1个虚拟端口的权值。换言之,网络设备基于该第一信息可以确定该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值。相比于网络设备基于终端设备反馈的测量信息获得数字端口的权值的方式,由于第一数字端口包含该N1个虚拟端口,使得网络设备基于该第一信息可以确定更细粒度的权值。从而,在天线阵列规模较大的情况下,终端设备可以基于参考信号的测量结果确定并指示较细粒度的权值,使得网络设备能够基于该权值进行通信,进而减少波束扫描开销,实现快速的波束跟踪。In addition, the measurement information obtained by the terminal device based on the reference signal includes the first information corresponding to the first digital port, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port. In other words, the network device can determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port based on the first information. Compared with the way in which the network device obtains the weights of the digital port based on the measurement information fed back by the terminal device, since the first digital port contains the N 1 virtual ports, the network device can determine a finer-grained weight based on the first information. Thus, in the case of a large antenna array, the terminal device can determine and indicate a finer-grained weight based on the measurement result of the reference signal, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing the beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过第一权值向量得到的,该第一权值向量包括N1个元素;其中,该N1个虚拟端口分别对应N1个天线阵子集合,每个天线阵子集合包含一个或多个天线阵子,该N1个元素分别用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位。In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the weights of the N1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through a first weight vector, and the first weight vector includes N1 elements; wherein the N1 virtual ports respectively correspond to N1 antenna array sets, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays, and the N1 elements are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N1 antenna array sets.

基于上述技术方案,网络设备在第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过第一权值向量得到的,并且,该N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过包括N1个元素的第一权值向量得到的,该N1个元素分别用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位。换言之,通过调整天线阵子的相位的方式,能够在不同虚拟端口实现参考信号的发送。Based on the above technical solution, the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port of the network device are obtained by the first weight vector, and the weights of the N 1 virtual ports are obtained by the first weight vector including N 1 elements, and the N 1 elements are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets. In other words, by adjusting the phases of the antenna arrays, the reference signal can be sent at different virtual ports.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过第一权值向量得到的,包括:该N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过该第一权值向量和第二权值向量得到的,该第二权值向量包括N1个子向量;其中,该N1个子向量中的第T个子向量的维度与该N1个天线阵子集合中的第T个天线阵子集合的天线阵子数相同,T的取值为1至N1In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through a first weight vector, including: the weights of the N 1 virtual ports are obtained through the first weight vector and a second weight vector, and the second weight vector includes N 1 sub-vectors; wherein a dimension of a T-th sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays of a T-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set, and a value of T is 1 to N 1 .

基于上述技术方案,第一权值向量包含的N1个子向量中的第T个子向量的维度,与该N1个天线阵子集合中的第T个天线阵子集合的天线阵子数相同。通过这种方式,使得第一权值向量能够分别对应N1个天线阵子集合中的每个天线阵子集合的权值。Based on the above technical solution, the dimension of the T-th subvector in the N 1 subvectors included in the first weight vector is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the T-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets. In this way, the first weight vector can correspond to the weight of each antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一信息满足以下任一项: In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the first information satisfies any of the following:

该第一信息包括该第一权值向量的量化处理结果;The first information includes a quantization processing result of the first weight vector;

该第一信息包括对该N1个虚拟端口中的其中一个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素中的一个元素,以及,除了该其中一个虚拟端口之外的其他N1-1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素中的N1-1个元素相对于该一个元素的差值对应的量化处理结果;The first information includes one element of the N 1 elements corresponding to one of the N 1 virtual ports, and a quantization processing result corresponding to a difference between N 1 -1 elements of the N 1 elements corresponding to other N 1 -1 virtual ports except the one of the virtual ports and the one element;

该第一信息包括第一索引和第二索引,该第一索引和该第二索引用于在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中确定该第一数字端口的第一权值向量;其中,该第一索引为第一维度上的码本索引,该第二索引为第二维度上的码本索引,在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中,每个权值向量是通过第一维度上的权值与第二维度上的权值确定的;The first information includes a first index and a second index, and the first index and the second index are used to determine a first weight vector of the first digital port in one or more weight vectors included in a codebook set; wherein the first index is a codebook index on a first dimension, and the second index is a codebook index on a second dimension, and in the one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set, each weight vector is determined by a weight on the first dimension and a weight on the second dimension;

该第一信息包括第三索引,该第三索引用于在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中确定该第一数字端口的第一权值向量。The first information includes a third index, and the third index is used to determine a first weight vector of the first digital port among one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set.

基于上述技术方案,第一信息可以通过上述任一项方式实现,以提升方案实现的灵活性。Based on the above technical solution, the first information can be implemented through any of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收第二信息,该第二信息用于确定该码本集合。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes: the terminal device receiving second information, where the second information is used to determine the codebook set.

可选地,该码本集合是通过一个或多个数字端口中的虚拟端口的端口信息确定的,任一数字端口中的虚拟端口的端口信息包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the codebook set is determined by port information of a virtual port in one or more digital ports, and the port information of the virtual port in any digital port includes at least one of the following:

数字端口包含的虚拟端口数为N1The number of virtual ports included in the digital port is N 1 ;

在该数字端口的第一维度上的虚拟端口数为M1The number of virtual ports on the first dimension of the digital port is M 1 ;

在该数字端口的第二维度上的虚拟端口数为M2The number of virtual ports in the second dimension of the digital port is M 2 ;

在该数字端口的第一维度上的过采样因子为O1The oversampling factor in the first dimension of the digital port is O 1 ;

在该数字端口的第二维度上的过采样因子为O2The oversampling factor in the second dimension of the digital port is O 2 .

基于上述技术方案,在第一信息包括索引(例如第一索引、第二索引、第三索引等)的情况下,终端设备还可以接收第二信息,并通过该第二信息确定码本集合,后续可以基于第一信息指示的索引在该码本集合中确定第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值。Based on the above technical solution, when the first information includes an index (for example, a first index, a second index, a third index, etc.), the terminal device can also receive the second information and determine a codebook set through the second information, and subsequently determine the weights of the N1 virtual ports in the first digital port in the codebook set based on the index indicated by the first information.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二信息满足以下至少一项;In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the second information satisfies at least one of the following:

该第二信息包括该第一数字端口包含的虚拟端口的端口信息;The second information includes port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port;

该第二信息包括第四索引,该第四索引用于在预配置或预定义的一种或多种虚拟端口的端口信息中确定第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息;The second information includes a fourth index, and the fourth index is used to determine the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port in the port information of one or more preconfigured or predefined virtual ports;

该第二信息包括第五索引,该第五索引用于在预配置或预定义的一个或多个码本集合中确定该码本集合;The second information includes a fifth index, where the fifth index is used to determine the codebook set in one or more preconfigured or predefined codebook sets;

该第二信息用于指示该第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息中的部分项,并且,该第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息中的其他项通过该部分项以及预配置的一种或多种虚拟端口的端口信息确定;The second information is used to indicate some items in the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port, and other items in the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port are determined by the partial items and the port information of one or more pre-configured virtual ports;

该第二信息用于指示该第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息,并且,该虚拟端口的端口信息用于在预配置或预定义的一个或多个码本集合中确定该码本集合。The second information is used to indicate the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port, and the port information of the virtual port is used to determine the codebook set from one or more preconfigured or predefined codebook sets.

基于上述技术方案,第二信息可以通过上述至少一项方式实现,以提升方案实现的灵活性。Based on the above technical solution, the second information can be implemented by at least one of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该测量信息包括该M个信息和/或该K个信息;其中,该M个信息分别用于确定该M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量;该M个信息中的其中一个信息为该第一信息;该K个信息分别用于确定K组数字端口中每个数字端口组包含的数字端口的第一权值向量,其中,K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包括该M个数字端口中的一个或多个数字端口,K为小于或等于M的正整数;该K个信息中的其中一个信息为该第一信息。In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information; wherein the M information is respectively used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports; one of the M information is the first information; the K information is respectively used to determine a first weight vector of a digital port included in each digital port group in K groups of digital ports, wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports in the M digital ports, and K is a positive integer less than or equal to M; one of the K information is the first information.

基于上述技术方案,终端设备发送的测量信息可以包括M个信息和/或K个信息,通过这种方式,使得网络设备能够通过该M个信息和/或该K个信息确定M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量。Based on the above technical solution, the measurement information sent by the terminal device may include M information and/or K information. In this way, the network device can determine the first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports through the M information and/or the K information.

可选地,该测量信息满足以下任一项:Optionally, the measurement information satisfies any of the following:

该参考信号的秩(rank)数满足第一条件时,该测量信息包括该M个信息;When the rank number of the reference signal satisfies the first condition, the measurement information includes the M pieces of information;

该参考信号的rank数满足第二条件时,该测量信息包括该K个信息;When the rank number of the reference signal satisfies the second condition, the measurement information includes the K pieces of information;

该参考信号的信道质量信息(channel quality indicator,CQI)满足第三条件时,该测量信息包 括该M个信息;When the channel quality indicator (CQI) of the reference signal satisfies the third condition, the measurement information packet Enclose the M information;

该参考信号的CQI满足第四条件时,该测量信息包括该K个信息。When the CQI of the reference signal satisfies the fourth condition, the measurement information includes the K pieces of information.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收指示该测量信息包括该M个信息和/或该K个信息的指示信息。通过这种方式,能够使得终端设备和网络设备明确测量信息所承载的信息内容。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes: the terminal device receives indication information indicating that the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information. In this way, the terminal device and the network device can clearly understand the information content carried by the measurement information.

可选地,该指示信息承载于参考信号的配置信息,或者是其他的消息/信息/信令等,此处不做限定。Optionally, the indication information is carried in configuration information of a reference signal, or is other message/information/signaling, etc., which is not limited here.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在该K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包含的一个或多个数字端口中,不同数字端口的虚拟端口的端口信息是相同的。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in one or more digital ports included in each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports, port information of virtual ports of different digital ports is the same.

基于上述技术方案,在测量信息包括K个信息的情况下,K个信息分别用于确定K组数字端口中每个数字端口组包含的数字端口的第一权值向量,其中,K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包括该M个数字端口中的一个或多个数字端口。并且,在该K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包含的一个或多个数字端口中,不同数字端口的虚拟端口的端口信息是相同的。通过这种方式,可以简化测量信息的反馈过程,能够降低实现复杂度。Based on the above technical solution, when the measurement information includes K pieces of information, the K pieces of information are respectively used to determine the first weight vector of the digital ports included in each digital port group in the K groups of digital ports, wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports in the M digital ports. Moreover, among the one or more digital ports included in each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports, the port information of the virtual ports of different digital ports is the same. In this way, the feedback process of the measurement information can be simplified and the implementation complexity can be reduced.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该测量信息为第一载波对应的测量信息,该测量信息用于确定该第一载波对应的M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量,该第一载波包括一个或多个载波;In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first carrier, the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in M digital ports corresponding to the first carrier, and the first carrier includes one or more carriers;

或,该测量信息为第一带宽部分(bandwidth part,BWP)对应的测量信息,该测量信息用于确定该第一BWP对应的M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量,该第一BWP包括一个或多个BWP;Or, the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first bandwidth part (bandwidth part, BWP), and the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in M digital ports corresponding to the first BWP, and the first BWP includes one or more BWPs;

或该测量信息为第一带宽对应的测量信息,该测量信息用于确定该第一带宽对应的M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量,该第一带宽包括一个或多个子带。Or the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first bandwidth, and the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports corresponding to the first bandwidth, and the first bandwidth includes one or more sub-bands.

基于上述技术方案,测量信息可以用于确定一个或多个载波(或,一个或多个BWP,或一个或多个子带)对应的M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量,以提升方案实现的灵活性。Based on the above technical solution, the measurement information can be used to determine the first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports corresponding to one or more carriers (or, one or more BWPs, or one or more subbands) to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该参考信号在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的,L1为大于1的整数;该L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值是通过L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值与第三权值得到的,该L1个第二权值是正交的,i的取值为1至L1In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the reference signal is sent through L 1 first weights in L 1 time units respectively, where L 1 is an integer greater than 1; the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained through the i-th second weight and the third weight among the L 1 second weights, the L 1 second weights are orthogonal, and the value of i is 1 to L 1 .

基于上述技术方案,终端设备基于参考信号进行测量得到的测量信息中,可以包括第一数字端口对应的第一信息,并且,第一信息用于确定该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值。其中,N1个虚拟端口在L1个时间单元上对应的L1个第二权值是正交的,通过这种方式,使得终端设备对L1个时间单元承载的参考信号进行测量得到测量结果之后,该终端设备能够基于该测量结果确定第一数字端口中的虚拟端口的较优的(或最优的)权值,并通过第一信息指示该权值,后续网络设备能够基于该权值与该终端设备进行通信。从而,在天线阵列规模较大的情况下,网络设备通过不同时间单元上基于正交的第二权值发送参考信号(一般地,基于不同权值发送的参考信号可以理解为基于不同波束发送的参考信号)的方式,终端设备可以基于不同时间单元的测量结果确定并指示较优的(或最优的)权值,使得网络设备能够基于该权值进行通信,进而减少波束扫描开销,实现快速的波束跟踪。Based on the above technical solution, the measurement information obtained by the terminal device based on the reference signal measurement may include the first information corresponding to the first digital port, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port. Among them, the L 1 second weights corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports on the L 1 time units are orthogonal. In this way, after the terminal device measures the reference signal carried by the L 1 time units to obtain the measurement result, the terminal device can determine the better (or optimal) weight of the virtual port in the first digital port based on the measurement result, and indicate the weight through the first information, and the subsequent network device can communicate with the terminal device based on the weight. Thus, when the antenna array is large, the network device sends reference signals based on orthogonal second weights at different time units (generally, reference signals sent based on different weights can be understood as reference signals sent based on different beams). The terminal device can determine and indicate a better (or optimal) weight based on the measurement results of different time units, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.

可选地,终端设备对L1个时间单元承载的参考信号进行测量得到个测量结果之后,该终端设备能够基于该测量结果和数学方法确定第一数字端口中的虚拟端口的较优的(或最优的)权值,例如,该数学方法可以包括功率最大化准则、容量最大化准则确定等。Optionally, after the terminal device measures the reference signal carried by L 1 time units to obtain a measurement result, the terminal device can determine a better (or optimal) weight of the virtual port in the first digital port based on the measurement result and a mathematical method. For example, the mathematical method may include power maximization criteria, capacity maximization criteria, etc.

本申请中,在L1个时间单元(或后文提及的L2个时间单元)中,每个时间单元可以为一个或多个符号,一个或多个微时隙,一个或多个时隙,一个或多个子帧等。In the present application, in L1 time units (or L2 time units mentioned later), each time unit can be one or more symbols, one or more mini-slots, one or more time slots, one or more subframes, etc.

可选地,L1个时间单元在时域上是连续的。由于时域上连续的不同时间单元的信道信息关联性较强,通过这种方式,能够使得终端设备基于该L1个时间单元的参考信号对应的不同测量结果能够尽可能地反映出相同或相近的信道信息,以获得准确度更高的测量信息。Optionally, the L 1 time units are continuous in the time domain. Since the channel information of different continuous time units in the time domain is highly correlated, in this way, the different measurement results corresponding to the reference signals of the L 1 time units of the terminal device can reflect the same or similar channel information as much as possible, so as to obtain more accurate measurement information.

可选地,该L1个时间单元中至少两个时间单元在时域上为不连续的。Optionally, at least two time units among the L 1 time units are discontinuous in the time domain.

应理解,参考信号在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的,可以理解为,L1个时间单元与L1个第一权值一一对应。例如,参考信号在L1个时间单元中的第i个时间单元的权值为L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值。It should be understood that the reference signal is sent through L1 first weights in L1 time units respectively, and it can be understood that L1 time units correspond to L1 first weights one by one. For example, the weight of the reference signal in the i-th time unit in the L1 time units is the i-th first weight in the L1 first weights.

可选地,每个时间单元上的参考信号可以视为一个参考信号,即“承载于L1个时间单元的参考信号” 可以视为L1个参考信号。相应的,上述方法可以执行一次或多次,即通过一个或多个的L1个时间单元分别实现一个或多个的L1个参考信号的收发过程。Optionally, the reference signal on each time unit can be regarded as one reference signal, that is, "the reference signal carried on L 1 time units" It can be regarded as L 1 reference signals. Accordingly, the above method can be performed once or multiple times, that is, the sending and receiving process of one or more L 1 reference signals can be implemented respectively through one or more L 1 time units.

或者,每L1个时间单元上的参考信号可以视为一个参考信号,即“承载于L1个时间单元的参考信号”可以视为1个参考信号。相应的,上述方法可以执行一次或多次,即通过一个或多个的L1个时间单元分别实现一个或多个参考信号的收发过程。Alternatively, the reference signal on each L 1 time unit can be regarded as one reference signal, that is, "the reference signal carried on L 1 time unit" can be regarded as 1 reference signal. Accordingly, the above method can be performed once or multiple times, that is, the sending and receiving process of one or more reference signals is respectively implemented through one or more L 1 time units.

应理解,L1个第二权值是正交的,L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值是通过L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值与第三权值得到的,换言之,L1个第一权值是基于L1个第二权值得到的。其中,该L1个第一权值中的不同权值可以是正交的,也可以是不正交的,此处不做限定。It should be understood that the L1 second weights are orthogonal, and the i-th first weight among the L1 first weights is obtained by the i-th second weight among the L1 second weights and the third weight. In other words, the L1 first weights are obtained based on the L1 second weights. Among them, different weights in the L1 first weights may be orthogonal or non-orthogonal, which is not limited here.

需要说明的是,该L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值是通过L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值与第三权值得到的,包括:该L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值,是该L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值中的N1个元素分别与第三权值中的N1个子向量相乘得到的。It should be noted that the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained by the i-th second weight among the L 1 second weights and the third weight, including: the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained by multiplying the N 1 elements of the i-th second weight among the L 1 second weights by the N 1 sub-vectors in the third weight.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,该M个数字端口中的第一数字端口在该L1个时间单元对应的权值为该L1个第一权值;该第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,该第二权值包含与该N1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素,N1为大于等于1的整数。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the reference signal is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein the weight corresponding to the first digital port among the M digital ports in the L 1 time units is the L 1 first weights; the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and the second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, where N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

本申请中,虚拟端口可以替换为其它术语,例如模拟端口,虚拟子阵,模拟子阵,子阵等。In this application, the virtual port can be replaced by other terms, such as analog port, virtual sub-array, analog sub-array, sub-array, etc.

基于上述技术方案,参考信号在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的,该L1个第一权值可以是M个数字端口中的第一数字端口的权值。其中,该第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,该第二权值包含与该N1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素,即该第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口在L1个时间单元上的对应的L1个第二权值是正交的。通过这种方式,使得同一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口在不同时间单元上的权值是正交的。Based on the above technical solution, the reference signal is sent through L 1 first weights in L 1 time units respectively, and the L 1 first weights can be the weights of the first digital port among the M digital ports. The first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and the second weights include N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, that is, the corresponding L 1 second weights of the virtual ports included in the first digital port in the L 1 time units are orthogonal. In this way, the weights of the virtual ports included in the same digital port in different time units are orthogonal.

可选地,L1是N1的整数倍。例如,N1与L1是相等的。Optionally, L 1 is an integer multiple of N 1. For example, N 1 is equal to L 1 .

可选地,该N1个虚拟端口在该L1个时间单元的不同时间单元上占据的频域资源是相同的。通过这种方式,能够尽可能的降低参考信号在不同时间单元的收发的实现复杂度。Optionally, the frequency domain resources occupied by the N 1 virtual ports in different time units of the L 1 time units are the same. In this way, the implementation complexity of sending and receiving reference signals in different time units can be reduced as much as possible.

可选地,终端设备还可以接收指示该第一数字端口包含的虚拟端口数为N1的指示信息,和/或,终端设备还可以接收指示该参考信号的时间单元数为L1的指示信息。其中,这两个指示信息可以承载于参考信号的配置信息中,也可以承载于其它信息/消息/信令中,此处不做限定。Optionally, the terminal device may also receive indication information indicating that the number of virtual ports included in the first digital port is N 1 , and/or, the terminal device may also receive indication information indicating that the number of time units of the reference signal is L 1. These two indication information may be carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or may be carried in other information/messages/signaling, which is not limited here.

可选地,N1和L1为预配置的信息,此处不做限定。Optionally, N 1 and L 1 are pre-configured information and are not limited here.

应理解,一个数字端口包含一个或多个虚拟端口(例如第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,后文描述的第二数字端口包括N2个虚拟端口等),可以理解为,该数字端口的信号是通过该一个或多个虚拟端口进行收发的。例如,在信号发送过程中,该数字端口通过该一个或多个虚拟端口发送信号;又如,在信号接收过程中,一个或多个虚拟端口接收的信号可以理解为该数字端口接收的信号。It should be understood that a digital port includes one or more virtual ports (for example, a first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and a second digital port described later includes N 2 virtual ports, etc.), and it can be understood that the signal of the digital port is sent and received through the one or more virtual ports. For example, in the process of signal transmission, the digital port sends the signal through the one or more virtual ports; for another example, in the process of signal reception, the signal received by one or more virtual ports can be understood as the signal received by the digital port.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该N1个虚拟端口分别对应N1个天线阵子集合,每个天线阵子集合包含一个或多个天线阵子,该N1个元素分别用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the N1 virtual ports correspond to N1 antenna array sets respectively, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays, and the N1 elements are used to adjust the phases of the N1 antenna array sets respectively.

基于上述技术方案,第一数字端口包含的N1个虚拟端口分别对应N1个天线阵子集合,第二权值包含的N1个元素分别用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位。并且,每个天线阵子集合包含一个或多个天线阵子,换言之,第二权值所包含的N1个元素用于调节数字端口中不同虚拟端口对应的天线阵子的相位,即L1个正交的第二权值用于实现不同虚拟端口对应的天线阵子的相位的正交。Based on the above technical solution, the N 1 virtual ports included in the first digital port correspond to N 1 antenna array sets respectively, and the N 1 elements included in the second weights are respectively used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets. Moreover, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays. In other words, the N 1 elements included in the second weights are used to adjust the phases of the antenna arrays corresponding to different virtual ports in the digital port, that is, the L 1 orthogonal second weights are used to achieve orthogonal phases of the antenna arrays corresponding to different virtual ports.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第三权值包括N1个子向量,该N1个子向量中的第P个子向量的维度与该N1个天线阵子集合中的第P个天线阵子集合的天线阵子数相同,P的取值为1至N1In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the third weight includes N 1 subvectors, a dimension of a P th subvector in the N 1 subvectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays in a P th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets, and a value of P is 1 to N 1 .

基于上述技术方案,第三权值包含的N1个子向量中的第P个子向量的维度,与该N1个天线阵子集合中的第P个天线阵子集合的天线阵子数相同。通过这种方式,使得第三权值能够分别对应N1个天线阵子集合中的每个天线阵子集合的权值。Based on the above technical solution, the dimension of the Pth sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors included in the third weight is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the Pth antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets. In this way, the third weight can correspond to the weight of each antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一权值与该第三权值的维度相同。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the first weight and the third weight have the same dimension.

基于上述技术方案,第一权值与该第三权值的维度相同的,即用于发送参考信号的第一权值能够确定N1个天线阵子集合中的每个天线阵子集合的权值。Based on the above technical solution, the first weight and the third weight have the same dimension, that is, the first weight used to send the reference signal can determine the weight of each antenna element set in the N1 antenna element sets.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,M取值为1。 In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the value of M is 1.

基于上述技术方案,在M取值为1的情况下,参考信号可以是通过一个数字端口(即第一数字端口)发送的,使得方案适用于网络设备配置了单个数字端口的场景下,实现对该单个数字端口包含的虚拟端口的参考信号的传输及测量。Based on the above technical solution, when the value of M is 1, the reference signal can be sent through a digital port (i.e., the first digital port), so that the solution is suitable for the scenario where the network device is configured with a single digital port, and the transmission and measurement of the reference signal of the virtual port contained in the single digital port can be realized.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,M取值大于1,其中,该参考信号的资源满足以下其中一项:In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the value of M is greater than 1, wherein the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the following:

在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的时域资源和频域资源是相同的,且该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口是码分复用的;In the resources of the reference signal, time domain resources and frequency domain resources used by different digital ports among the M digital ports to send the reference signal are the same, and different digital ports among the M digital ports are code division multiplexed;

在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的时域资源是相同的,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的频域资源是不同的,且该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口无码分复用;In the resources of the reference signal, time domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and different digital ports among the M digital ports are not code-division multiplexed;

在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口属于Q组数字端口,每组数字端口包括一个或多个数字端口,Q为正整数;其中,该Q组数字端口中的不同组数字端口发送该参考信号的频域资源是不同的,该Q组数字端口中的同一组数字端口包含的一个或多个数字端口发送所述参考信号的频域资源是相同的,且该同一组数字端口组包含的一个或多个数字端口发送是码分复用(code division multiplexing,CDM)的。可选的,该同一组数字端口组包含的一个或多个数字端口的码分复用类型为频域码分复用。In the resources of the reference signal, the M digital ports belong to Q groups of digital ports, each group of digital ports includes one or more digital ports, and Q is a positive integer; wherein the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different groups of digital ports in the Q groups of digital ports are different, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports in the Q groups of digital ports are the same, and the one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports send code division multiplexing (code division multiplexing, CDM). Optionally, the code division multiplexing type of the one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports is frequency domain code division multiplexing.

基于上述技术方案,在M取值大于1的情况下,参考信号可以是通过两个或两个以上的数字端口(即第一数字端口以及其它数字端口)发送的,使得方案适用于网络设备配置了两个或两个以上数字端口的场景下,实现对该两个或两个以上数字端口包含的虚拟端口的参考信号的传输及测量。并且,该参考信号的资源满足上述其中一项,以提升方案实现的灵活性。Based on the above technical solution, when the value of M is greater than 1, the reference signal can be sent through two or more digital ports (i.e., the first digital port and other digital ports), so that the solution is applicable to the scenario where the network device is configured with two or more digital ports, and realizes the transmission and measurement of the reference signal of the virtual port included in the two or more digital ports. In addition, the resource of the reference signal meets one of the above items to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备发送指示该参考信号的资源满足该其中一项的指示信息。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes: the network device sending indication information indicating that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the items.

可选地,该指示信息承载于参考信号的配置信息,或者是其他的消息/信息/信令等,此处不做限定。Optionally, the indication information is carried in configuration information of a reference signal, or is other message/information/signaling, etc., which is not limited here.

基于上述技术方案,网络设备还可以发送指示参考信号的资源满足该其中一项的指示信息,使得终端设备能够基于该指示信息明确M个数字端口中不同数字端口的资源配置方式。Based on the above technical solution, the network device may also send indication information indicating that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the items, so that the terminal device can clearly understand the resource configuration mode of different digital ports among the M digital ports based on the indication information.

可选地,终端设备/网络设备通过预配置的方式确定该参考信号的资源满足上述其中一项。Optionally, the terminal device/network device determines through preconfiguration that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the above items.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该M个数字端口中的第二数字端口包括N2个虚拟端口;其中,该参考信号在L2个时间单元上分别是通过L2个第四权值发送的,L2为大于1的整数;该L2个第四权值中的第j个第四权值是通过L2个第五权值中的第j个第五权值与第六权值得到的,该L2个第五权值是正交的。In a possible implementation of the second aspect, a second digital port among the M digital ports includes N 2 virtual ports; wherein the reference signal is sent through L 2 fourth weights in L 2 time units respectively, and L 2 is an integer greater than 1; the j-th fourth weight among the L 2 fourth weights is obtained through the j-th fifth weight and the sixth weight among the L 2 fifth weights, and the L 2 fifth weights are orthogonal.

基于上述技术方案,终端设备接收的参考信号在L2个时间单元上分别是通过L2个第四权值发送的,并且,该L2个第四权值中的第j个第四权值是通过L2个第五权值中的第j个第五权值与第六权值得到的,该L2个第五权值是正交的。换言之,在L2个时间单元传输的参考信号是通过相互正交的L2个第五权值发送的。通过这种方式,使得终端设备对不同时间单元上承载的参考信号的测量是相对独立的,进而获得L1个相对独立的信道信息,以获得准确度更高的测量信息。Based on the above technical solution, the reference signal received by the terminal device is sent through L 2 fourth weights in L 2 time units, and the j-th fourth weight among the L 2 fourth weights is obtained through the j-th fifth weight and the sixth weight among the L 2 fifth weights, and the L 2 fifth weights are orthogonal. In other words, the reference signal transmitted in L 2 time units is sent through L 2 fifth weights that are orthogonal to each other. In this way, the terminal device's measurements of the reference signals carried on different time units are relatively independent, and then L 1 relatively independent channel information is obtained to obtain measurement information with higher accuracy.

可选地,L1与L2相等。其中,L1个时间单元和L2个时间单元可以是相同的时间单元,即M个数字端口中的第一数字端口发送参考信号的时域资源与第二数字端口发送参考信号的时域资源可以是相同的。通过这种方式,能够尽可能地复用相同的时间单元,以节省通信资源并降低实现复杂度。Optionally, L1 is equal to L2 . Among them, L1 time units and L2 time units may be the same time units, that is, the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by the first digital port among the M digital ports and the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by the second digital port may be the same. In this way, the same time unit can be reused as much as possible to save communication resources and reduce implementation complexity.

可选地,N1与N2相等。即M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包含的虚拟端口的数量与第二数字端口包含的虚拟端口的数量可以是相同的,通过这种方式,能够降低实现复杂度。Optionally, N1 is equal to N2 . That is, the number of virtual ports included in the first digital port and the number of virtual ports included in the second digital port among the M digital ports may be the same. In this way, the implementation complexity can be reduced.

需要说明的是,第二数字端口的实现过程可以参考前文第一数字端口的实现过程。例如,L2个时间单元与L2个第四权值之间的对应关系可以参考L1个时间单元与L1个第一权值之间的对应关系,L2个第四权值与L2个第五权值之间的对应关系可以参考L1个第一权值与L1个第二权值之间的对应关系等。It should be noted that the implementation process of the second digital port can refer to the implementation process of the first digital port in the foregoing text. For example, the correspondence between L2 time units and L2 fourth weights can refer to the correspondence between L1 time units and L1 first weights, and the correspondence between L2 fourth weights and L2 fifth weights can refer to the correspondence between L1 first weights and L1 second weights, etc.

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的时域资源和频域资源是相同的,且不同数字端口是码分复用的情况下,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的资源在频域上均包括相同的M个频域单元。In a possible implementation of the second aspect, in the resources of the reference signal, the time domain resources and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, and when different digital ports are code division multiplexed, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports include the same M frequency domain units in the frequency domain.

基于上述技术方案,M大于1,在M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的时域资源和频域资源是相同的,且不同数字端口是码分复用的情况下,不同数字端口发送该参考信号的资源在频域上 均包括相同的M个频域单元。通过这种方式,能够使得不同数字端口在相同的频域单元上以码分复用的方式发送参考信号,可以尽可能地复用相同的频域单元,以节省通信资源并降低实现复杂度。Based on the above technical solution, M is greater than 1, and the time domain resources and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, and when different digital ports are code division multiplexed, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports are different in the frequency domain. All of them include the same M frequency domain units. In this way, different digital ports can send reference signals in a code division multiplexing manner on the same frequency domain unit, and the same frequency domain unit can be reused as much as possible to save communication resources and reduce implementation complexity.

可选地,M个频域单元中,每个频域单元可以包括一个或多个子载波/资源单元(resource element,RE)。Optionally, among the M frequency domain units, each frequency domain unit may include one or more subcarriers/resource elements (RE).

在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的时域资源是相同的,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的频域资源是不同的,且该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口无码分复用(no CDM)的情况下,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的资源在频域上包括互不相同的M个频域单元。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in the resources of the reference signal, the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and in the case of no code division multiplexing (no CDM) by different digital ports among the M digital ports, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports include M different frequency domain units in the frequency domain.

基于上述技术方案,M大于1,在该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的频域资源是不同的,且该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口无码分复用的情况下,不同数字端口发送该参考信号的资源在频域上包括互不相同的M个频域单元。通过这种方式,能够在无码分复用的情况下,使得不同数字端口在不同频域资源上实现参考信号的发送,能够提升方案实现的灵活性。Based on the above technical solution, M is greater than 1, and the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and when different digital ports among the M digital ports are not code-division multiplexed, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports include M frequency domain units that are different from each other in the frequency domain. In this way, different digital ports can send reference signals on different frequency domain resources without code-division multiplexing, which can improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.

可选地,该方法还包括:该网络设备发送指示该互不相同的M个频域单元的指示信息,使得终端设备基于该指示信息明确各个频域单元的资源位置。可选地,该指示信息承载于参考信号的配置信息,或者是其他的消息/信息/信令等,此处不做限定。Optionally, the method further includes: the network device sends indication information indicating the M different frequency domain units, so that the terminal device specifies the resource location of each frequency domain unit based on the indication information. Optionally, the indication information is carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or other messages/information/signaling, etc., which are not limited here.

本申请第三方面提供了一种通信装置,该装置为终端设备,或者,该装置为终端设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等),或者,该装置还可以为能够实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑模块或软件。在第三方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信装置为终端设备执行为例进行描述。In a third aspect of the present application, a communication device is provided, which is a terminal device, or the device is a partial component in the terminal device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the terminal device. In the third aspect and its possible implementation, the communication device is described as an example of executing the terminal device.

该装置包括处理单元和收发单元;该收发单元用于接收参考信号,该参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,该M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,N1为大于等于1的整数;该处理单元用于确定测量信息,该收发单元还用于发送测量信息,该测量信息包括基于该第一数字端口发送的参考信号进行测量得到的第一信息;其中,该第一信息是基于N1个信道信息确定的,该N1个信道信息分别是通过该N1个虚拟端口发送的参考信号确定的,该第一信息用于确定该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值。The device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit; the transceiver unit is used to receive a reference signal, which is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port among the M digital ports includes N1 virtual ports, where N1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the processing unit is used to determine measurement information, and the transceiver unit is also used to send measurement information, the measurement information including first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N1 channel information, the N1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signals sent by the N1 virtual ports, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N1 virtual ports in the first digital port.

本申请第三方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第一方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,并实现相应的技术效果,具体均可以参阅第一方面,此处不再赘述。In the third aspect of the present application, the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the first aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects. For details, please refer to the first aspect and will not be repeated here.

本申请第四方面提供了一种通信装置,该装置为网络设备,或者,该装置为网络设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等),或者,该装置还可以为能够实现全部或部分网络设备功能的逻辑模块或软件。在第四方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信装置为网络设备执行为例进行描述。In a fourth aspect of the present application, a communication device is provided, which is a network device, or the device is a partial component in the network device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the network device functions. In the fourth aspect and its possible implementation, the communication device is described as an example of a network device.

该装置包括处理单元和收发单元;该处理单元用于确定参考信号,该收发单元用于发送参考信号,该参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,该M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,N1为大于等于1的整数;该收发单元还用于接收测量信息,该测量信息包括基于该第一数字端口发送的参考信号进行测量得到的第一信息;其中,该第一信息是基于N1个信道信息确定的,该N1个信道信息分别是通过该N1个虚拟端口发送的参考信号确定的。The device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit; the processing unit is used to determine a reference signal, and the transceiver unit is used to send the reference signal, the reference signal is sent through M digital ports, M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port among the M digital ports includes N1 virtual ports, N1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the transceiver unit is also used to receive measurement information, the measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N1 channel information, and the N1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signals sent by the N1 virtual ports.

本申请第四方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第二方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,并实现相应的技术效果,具体均可以参阅第二方面,此处不再赘述。In the fourth aspect of the present application, the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the second aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects. For details, please refer to the second aspect and will not be repeated here.

本申请第五方面提供了一种通信装置,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器与存储器耦合;该存储器用于存储程序或指令;该至少一个处理器用于执行该程序或指令,以使该装置实现前述第一方面至第二方面任一方面中的任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, comprising at least one processor, wherein the at least one processor is coupled to a memory; the memory is used to store programs or instructions; the at least one processor is used to execute the program or instructions so that the device implements the method described in any possible implementation method of any one of the first to second aspects.

本申请第六方面提供了一种通信装置,包括至少一个逻辑电路和输入输出接口;该逻辑电路用于执行如前述第一方面至第二方面任一方面中的任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, comprising at least one logic circuit and an input/output interface; the logic circuit is used to execute the method described in any possible implementation method of any one of the first to second aspects above.

本申请第七方面提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上述第一通信装置以及第二通信装置。A seventh aspect of the present application provides a communication system, which includes the above-mentioned first communication device and second communication device.

本申请第八方面提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该存储介质用于存储一个或多个计算机执行指令,当计算机执行指令被处理器执行时,该处理器执行如上述第一方面至第二方面中任一方面的任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。 In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is used to store one or more computer-executable instructions. When the computer-executable instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes a method as described in any possible implementation of any one of the first to second aspects above.

本申请第九方面提供一种计算机程序产品(或称计算机程序),当计算机程序产品中的计算机程序被该处理器执行时,该处理器执行上述第一方面至第二方面中任一方面的任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。A ninth aspect of the present application provides a computer program product (or computer program). When the computer program in the computer program product is executed by the processor, the processor executes the method described in any possible implementation of any one of the first to second aspects above.

本申请第十方面提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括至少一个处理器,用于支持通信装置实现上述第一方面至第二方面中任一方面的任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。In a tenth aspect, the present application provides a chip system, which includes at least one processor for supporting a communication device to implement the method described in any possible implementation of any one of the first to second aspects.

在一种可能的设计中,该芯片系统还可以包括存储器,存储器,用于保存该通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片系统,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。可选的,所述芯片系统还包括接口电路,所述接口电路为所述至少一个处理器提供程序指令和/或数据。In a possible design, the chip system may also include a memory for storing program instructions and data necessary for the communication device. The chip system may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices. Optionally, the chip system also includes an interface circuit, which provides program instructions and/or data for the at least one processor.

其中,第三方面至第十方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面至第二方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。Among them, the technical effects brought about by any design method in the third aspect to the tenth aspect can refer to the technical effects brought about by the different design methods in the above-mentioned first aspect to the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

图1a为本申请涉及的信号传输方式的一个示意图;FIG1a is a schematic diagram of a signal transmission method involved in the present application;

图1b为本申请涉及的信号传输方式的另一个示意图;FIG1b is another schematic diagram of a signal transmission method involved in the present application;

图1c为本申请涉及的信号传输方式的另一个示意图;FIG1c is another schematic diagram of a signal transmission method involved in the present application;

图1d为本申请涉及的信号传输过程的一个示意图;FIG1d is a schematic diagram of a signal transmission process involved in the present application;

图1e为本申请涉及的信号传输过程的另一个示意图;FIG. 1e is another schematic diagram of the signal transmission process involved in the present application;

图2为本申请涉及的通信系统的一个示意图;FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a communication system involved in the present application;

图3为本申请提供的通信方法的一个示意图;FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided by the present application;

图4a为本申请提供的参考信号传输的一个示意图;FIG4a is a schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application;

图4b为本申请提供的参考信号传输的另一个示意图;FIG4b is another schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application;

图5为本申请提供的参考信号传输的另一个示意图;FIG5 is another schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application;

图6为本申请提供的参考信号传输的另一个示意图;FIG6 is another schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application;

图7为本申请提供的参考信号传输的另一个示意图;FIG7 is another schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application;

图8为本申请提供的参考信号传输的另一个示意图;FIG8 is another schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application;

图9为本申请提供的参考信号传输的另一个示意图;FIG9 is another schematic diagram of reference signal transmission provided by the present application;

图10为本申请提供的通信装置的一个示意图;FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided by the present application;

图11为本申请提供的通信装置的另一个示意图;FIG11 is another schematic diagram of a communication device provided by the present application;

图12为本申请提供的通信装置的另一个示意图;FIG12 is another schematic diagram of a communication device provided by the present application;

图13为本申请提供的通信装置的另一个示意图。FIG. 13 is another schematic diagram of the communication device provided in the present application.

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

首先,对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。First, some terms in the embodiments of the present application are explained to facilitate understanding by those skilled in the art.

(1)配置与预配置:在本申请中,会同时用到配置与预配置。配置是指基站或服务器等网络设备通过消息或信令将一些参数的配置信息或参数的取值发送给终端,以便终端根据这些取值或信息来确定通信的参数或传输时的资源。预配置与配置类似,它可以是基站或服务器等网络设备通过通信链路或载波把参数信息或取值发送给终端的方式;也可以是在标准中给出相应的参数或参数值的定义,或通过提前将相关的参数或取值设置到终端设备中的方式,本申请对此不做限定。进一步地,这些取值和参数,是可以变化或更新的。(1) Configuration and pre-configuration: In this application, configuration and pre-configuration will be used at the same time. Configuration refers to the base station or server and other network devices sending some parameter configuration information or parameter values to the terminal through messages or signaling, so that the terminal can determine the communication parameters or resources during transmission based on these values or information. Pre-configuration is similar to configuration. It can be a method in which a base station or server and other network devices send parameter information or values to the terminal through a communication link or carrier; it can also be a definition of corresponding parameters or parameter values given in the standard, or by setting the relevant parameters or values in the terminal device in advance. This application does not limit this. Furthermore, these values and parameters can be changed or updated.

(2)在本申请中,“用于指示”可以包括用于直接指示和用于间接指示。当描述某一指示信息用于指示A时,可以理解为该指示信息携带A、直接指示A或间接指示A。(2) In this application, "used for indication" may include being used for direct indication and being used for indirect indication. When describing that a certain indication information is used for indicating A, it can be understood that the indication information carries A, directly indicates A, or indirectly indicates A.

本申请中,指示信息所指示的信息,称为待指示信息。在具体实现过程中,对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种,例如,可以通过直接指示的方式实现,如通过待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引进行指示等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示的方式实现,其中,该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分,而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约 定的。例如,还可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示,从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。In this application, the information indicated by the indication information is called the information to be indicated. In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated, for example, it can be implemented by direct indication, such as by indicating the information to be indicated itself or the index of the information to be indicated. It can also be implemented by indicating other information to be indirectly indicated, where there is an association between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only part of the information to be indicated, while the other part of the information to be indicated is known or agreed in advance. For example, the indication of specific information can also be achieved by using the arrangement order of each information agreed in advance (for example, stipulated by the protocol), thereby reducing the indication overhead to a certain extent.

待指示信息可以作为一个整体一起发送,也可以分成多个子信息分开发送,而且这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以相同,也可以不同。具体发送方法本申请不进行限定。其中,这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以是预先定义的,例如根据协议预先定义的,也可以是发射端设备通过向接收端设备发送配置信息来配置的。其中,该配置信息可以例如但不限于包括无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层信令和物理层信令中的一种或者至少两种的组合。其中,MAC层信令例如包括MAC控制元素(control element,CE);物理层信令例如包括下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)。The information to be indicated can be sent as a whole, or divided into multiple sub-information and sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending time of these sub-information can be the same or different. The specific sending method is not limited in this application. Among them, the sending period and/or sending time of these sub-information can be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to the protocol, or configured by the transmitting device by sending configuration information to the receiving device. Among them, the configuration information can include, for example, but not limited to, one or a combination of at least two of radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling, media access control (media access control, MAC) layer signaling and physical layer signaling. Among them, MAC layer signaling, for example, includes MAC control element (control element, CE); physical layer signaling, for example, includes downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI).

(3)参考信号(reference signal,RS),又称导频信号。在通信系统中,为了发送和接收数据、获取系统同步和反馈信道信息,估计上行链路信道或下行链路信道较为必要。信道估计指的是为了补偿信道衰落和噪声产生衰落所引起的信号失真而重建或恢复接收信号的过程,它利用发送机与接收机预知的基准信号来追踪信道的时域和频域变化。上述基准信号又称做参考信号,它们在正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号内分布于时频二维空间中不同的资源单元(resource element,RE)上,具有已知的幅度和相位。(3) Reference signal (RS), also known as pilot signal. In communication systems, it is necessary to estimate the uplink channel or downlink channel in order to send and receive data, obtain system synchronization and feedback channel information. Channel estimation refers to the process of reconstructing or restoring the received signal in order to compensate for the signal distortion caused by channel fading and noise fading. It uses the reference signal known in advance by the transmitter and receiver to track the time and frequency domain changes of the channel. The above reference signals are also called reference signals. They are distributed on different resource elements (RE) in the two-dimensional space of time and frequency in the orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol and have known amplitude and phase.

在物理层,上行通信可以包括上行物理信道和上行信号的传输。其中,上行物理信道包括随机接入信道(random access channel,PRACH),上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH),上行数据信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)等,上行信号包括信道探测信号(sounding reference signal,SRS),上行控制信道解调参考信号(PUCCH de-modulation reference signal,PUCCH-DMRS),上行数据信道解调参考信号(PUSCH de-modulation reference signal,PUSCH-DMRS),上行相位噪声跟踪信号(phase noise tracking reference signal,PTRS),上行定位信号(uplink positioning RS)等。At the physical layer, uplink communication may include transmission of uplink physical channels and uplink signals. Among them, uplink physical channels include random access channel (PRACH), uplink control channel (PUCCH), uplink data channel (PUSCH), etc., and uplink signals include sounding reference signal (SRS), uplink control channel demodulation reference signal (PUCCH de-modulation reference signal, PUCCH-DMRS), uplink data channel demodulation reference signal (PUSCH de-modulation reference signal, PUSCH-DMRS), uplink phase noise tracking signal (PTRS), uplink positioning signal (uplink positioning RS), etc.

在物理层,下行通信可以包括下行物理信道和下行信号的传输。其中,下行物理信道包括广播信道(physical broadcast channel,PBCH),下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH),下行数据信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)等,下行信号包括主同步信号(primary synchronization signal,简称PSS)/辅同步信号(secondary synchronization signal,SSS),下行控制信道解调参考信号(PDCCH de-modulation reference signal,PDCCH-DMRS),下行数据信道解调参考信号(PDSCH de-modulation reference signal,PDSCH-DMRS),相位噪声跟踪信号PTRS,信道状态信息参考信号(channel status information reference signal,CSI-RS),小区参考信号(Cell reference signal,CRS),跟踪参考信号(tracking reference signal,TRS),定位参考信号(positioning RS)等。At the physical layer, downlink communication may include transmission of downlink physical channels and downlink signals. Among them, the downlink physical channels include broadcast channel (physical broadcast channel, PBCH), downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH), downlink data channel (physical downlink shared channel, PDSCH), etc. Downlink signals include primary synchronization signal (primary synchronization signal, PSS)/secondary synchronization signal (secondary synchronization signal, SSS), downlink control channel demodulation reference signal (PDCCH de-modulation reference signal, PDCCH-DMRS), downlink data channel demodulation reference signal (PDSCH de-modulation reference signal, PDSCH-DMRS), phase noise tracking signal PTRS, channel status information reference signal (channel status information reference signal, CSI-RS), cell reference signal (Cell reference signal, CRS), tracking reference signal (tracking reference signal, TRS), positioning reference signal (positioning RS), etc.

(4)本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A、同时存在A和B、单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如“A,B和C中的至少一个”包括A,B,C,AB,AC,BC或ABC。以及,除非有特别说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。(4) The terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of the present application can be used interchangeably. "At least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist. For example, A and/or B can represent: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A and B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the objects associated with each other are in an "or" relationship. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items. For example, "at least one of A, B and C" includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC or ABC. And, unless otherwise specified, the ordinal numbers such as "first" and "second" mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or importance of multiple objects.

(5)本申请实施例中的“发送”和“接收”,表示信号传递的走向。例如,“向X设备发送信息”可以理解为该信息的目的端是X设备,可以包括通过空口直接发送,也包括其他单元或模块通过空口间接发送。“接收来自Y设备的信息”可以理解为该信息的源端是Y设备,可以包括通过空口直接从Y设备接收,也可以包括通过空口从其他单元或模块间接地从Y设备接收。“发送”也可以理解为芯片接口的“输出”,“接收”也可以理解为芯片接口的“输入”。(5) "Send" and "receive" in the embodiments of the present application indicate the direction of signal transmission. For example, "send information to device X" can be understood as the destination of the information is device X, which can include direct sending through the air interface, and also include indirect sending through the air interface by other units or modules. "Receive information from device Y" can be understood as the source of the information is device Y, which can include direct receiving from device Y through the air interface, and also include indirect receiving from device Y through the air interface from other units or modules. "Send" can also be understood as the "output" of the chip interface, and "receive" can also be understood as the "input" of the chip interface.

示例性的,以实体A和实体B之间的通信过程为例。在本申请中,实体A向实体B发送信息,可以是A直接向B发送,也可以是A经过其它实体间接地向B发送。同样的,实体B接收来自实体A的信息,可以是实体B直接接收实体A发送的信息,也可以是实体B通过其它实体间接地接收实体A发送的信息。这里的实 体A和B可以是无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点或终端,也可以是RAN节点或终端内部的模块。信息的发送与接收可以是RAN节点与终端之间的信息交互,例如,基站与终端之间的信息交互;信息的发送与接收也可以是两个RAN节点之间的信息交互,例如集中式单元(central unit,CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)之间的信息交互;信息的发送与接收还可以是在一个装置内部不同模块之间的信息交互,例如,终端芯片与终端其它模块之间的信息交互,或者,基站芯片与该基站中其它模块之间的信息交互。For example, the communication process between entity A and entity B is taken as an example. In this application, when entity A sends information to entity B, it can be that A sends it directly to B, or that A sends it to B indirectly through other entities. Similarly, when entity B receives information from entity A, it can be that entity B directly receives the information sent by entity A, or that entity B indirectly receives the information sent by entity A through other entities. Bodies A and B may be radio access network (RAN) nodes or terminals, or modules inside RAN nodes or terminals. The sending and receiving of information may be information interaction between a RAN node and a terminal, for example, information interaction between a base station and a terminal; the sending and receiving of information may also be information interaction between two RAN nodes, for example, information interaction between a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU); the sending and receiving of information may also be information interaction between different modules inside a device, for example, information interaction between a terminal chip and other modules of the terminal, or information interaction between a base station chip and other modules in the base station.

(6)预编码技术:发送端可以在已知信道状态的情况下,借助与信道相匹配的预编码矩阵来对待发送信号进行处理后发送,使得经过预编码的发送信号与信道相适配。从而,相比于接收端接收未经过预编码的发送信号并消除信道间影响的处理过程,接收端接收经过预编码的发送信号并消除信道间影响的处理过程的复杂度降低。因此,通过对待发送信号的预编码处理,接收信号质量(例如信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio,SINR)等)得以提升。采用预编码技术,还可以实现发送端与多个接收端在相同的时频资源上传输,也就是实现了多用户多输入多输出(multiple user multiple input multiple output,MU-MIMO)。(6) Precoding technology: When the channel state is known, the transmitter can use a precoding matrix that matches the channel to process the signal to be transmitted and then transmit it, so that the precoded signal is adapted to the channel. Therefore, compared with the process of receiving the non-precoded signal and eliminating the influence between channels, the complexity of the process of receiving the precoded signal and eliminating the influence between channels is reduced. Therefore, by precoding the signal to be transmitted, the quality of the received signal (such as signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)) can be improved. The use of precoding technology can also realize the transmission of the transmitter and multiple receivers on the same time-frequency resources, that is, multiple user multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) is realized.

可选地,该发送端可以为网络设备,该接收端可以为终端设备;或,该发送端可以为终端设备,该接收端可以为终端设备。Optionally, the sending end may be a network device, and the receiving end may be a terminal device; or, the sending end may be a terminal device, and the receiving end may be a terminal device.

一种实现方式中,采用多输入多输出(Multiple Input Multiple Output,MIMO)技术增加系统容量,提升吞吐率。数学表达式为y=Hx+n,其中y为接收信号,H为MIMO信道的信道信息,x为发送信号,n为噪声。在具有多天线的通信系统中,多个发送天线的信号会叠加到任意一个接收天线上,因此发送端发送信号的方法影响到系统的性能,而且在接收端恢复发送信号时,往往比较复杂。在这个背景下,预编码(Precoding)一方面用于减少系统开销,最大提升MIMO的系统容量,另一方面用于降低接收机消除信道间影响实现的复杂度。此时,数学表达为y=HPx+n,P为预编码矩阵(或向量)。为了简化实现复杂度,P为可以从一个预定义的矩阵(或向量)集合中选取,该集合被称为码本(Codebook),该方法也被称为基于码本的发送方法。如果发送端可以获知H的全部信息,则P可以在发送端自行获取,该方法也被称为非码本的发送方法(Non-codebook,NCB)。In one implementation, multiple input multiple output (MIMO) technology is used to increase system capacity and improve throughput. The mathematical expression is y = Hx + n, where y is the received signal, H is the channel information of the MIMO channel, x is the transmitted signal, and n is the noise. In a communication system with multiple antennas, the signals of multiple transmitting antennas will be superimposed on any receiving antenna. Therefore, the method of transmitting signals at the transmitting end affects the performance of the system, and it is often complicated to restore the transmitted signal at the receiving end. In this context, precoding is used to reduce system overhead and maximize the system capacity of MIMO on the one hand, and to reduce the complexity of the receiver to eliminate the impact between channels on the other hand. At this time, the mathematical expression is y = HPx + n, and P is the precoding matrix (or vector). In order to simplify the implementation complexity, P can be selected from a predefined set of matrices (or vectors), which is called a codebook. The method is also called a codebook-based transmission method. If the transmitter can obtain all the information of H, then P can be obtained by itself at the transmitter. This method is also called a non-codebook transmission method (NCB).

应理解,有关预编码技术的相关描述仅为便于理解而示例,并非用于限制本申请实施例的保护范围。在具体实现过程中,发送端还可以通过其他方式进行预编码。例如,在无法获知信道信息(例如但不限于信道矩阵)的情况下,采用预先设置的预编码矩阵或者加权处理方式进行预编码等。为了简洁,其具体内容本文不再赘述。It should be understood that the relevant description of the precoding technology is only for ease of understanding and is not intended to limit the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application. In the specific implementation process, the transmitting end can also perform precoding in other ways. For example, when channel information (such as but not limited to the channel matrix) cannot be obtained, a pre-set precoding matrix or a weighted processing method is used for precoding. For the sake of brevity, the specific content is not repeated herein.

(7)预编码矩阵指示(PMI):可用于指示预编码矩阵。其中,预编码矩阵例如可以是终端设备基于一个频域单元的信道矩阵确定的预编码矩阵。该信道矩阵可以是终端设备通过信道估计等方式或者基于信道互易性确定。但应理解,终端设备确定预编码矩阵的具体方法并不限于上文所述,具体实现方式可参考相关文献,为了简洁,这里不再一一列举。(7) Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI): can be used to indicate the precoding matrix. The precoding matrix can be, for example, a precoding matrix determined by the terminal device based on a channel matrix of a frequency domain unit. The channel matrix can be determined by the terminal device through channel estimation or based on channel reciprocity. However, it should be understood that the specific method for the terminal device to determine the precoding matrix is not limited to the above description. The specific implementation method can be referred to in relevant literature. For the sake of brevity, it is not listed here one by one.

例如,预编码矩阵可以通过对信道矩阵或信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行奇异值分解(singular value decomposition,SVD)的方式获得,或者,也可以通过对信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行特征值分解(eigenvalue decomposition,EVD)的方式获得。应理解,上文中列举的预编码矩阵的确定方式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。For example, the precoding matrix can be obtained by performing singular value decomposition (SVD) on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix, or by performing eigenvalue decomposition (EVD) on the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. It should be understood that the determination methods of the precoding matrix listed above are only examples and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.

需要说明的是,由本申请实施例提供的方法,网络设备可以基于终端设备的反馈确定用于构建预编码向量的信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI)RS端口、频域离散傅里叶变换(discrete fourier transform,DFT)向量以及空频向量的合并系数,进而确定与各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。该预编码矩阵可以直接用于下行数据传输;也可以经过一些波束成形方法,例如包括迫零(zero forcing,ZF)、正则化迫零(regularized zero-forcing,RZF)、最小均方误差(minimum mean-squared error,MMSE)、最大化信漏噪比(signal-to-leakage-and-noise,SLNR)等,以得到最终用于下行数据传输的预编码矩阵。本申请对此不作限定。在未作出特别说明的情况下,下文中所涉及的预编码矩阵均可以是指基于本申请提供的方法所确定的预编码矩阵。It should be noted that, according to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device can determine the channel state information (CSI) RS port, the frequency domain discrete Fourier transform (DFT) vector and the merging coefficient of the space-frequency vector used to construct the precoding vector based on the feedback of the terminal device, and then determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit. The precoding matrix can be used directly for downlink data transmission; or it can be subjected to some beamforming methods, such as zero forcing (ZF), regularized zero-forcing (RZF), minimum mean squared error (MMSE), maximization of signal-to-leakage-and-noise (SLNR), etc., to obtain the final precoding matrix for downlink data transmission. This application does not limit this. Unless otherwise specified, the precoding matrix involved in the following may refer to the precoding matrix determined based on the method provided in this application.

可以理解的是,终端设备所确定的预编码矩阵可以理解为待反馈的预编码矩阵。终端设备可以通过预编码指示(precoding matrix indicator,PMI)指示待反馈的预编码矩阵,以便于网络设备基于PMI 恢复出该预编码矩阵。可以理解,网络设备基于PMI恢复出的预编码矩阵可以与上述待反馈的预编码矩阵相同或相近。It is understandable that the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device can be understood as the precoding matrix to be fed back. The terminal device can indicate the precoding matrix to be fed back through a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), so that the network device can provide feedback based on the PMI. Restore the precoding matrix. It can be understood that the precoding matrix restored by the network device based on the PMI can be the same as or similar to the precoding matrix to be fed back.

在下行信道测量中,网络设备根据PMI确定出的预编码矩阵与终端设备所确定的预编码矩阵的近似度越高,其确定出的用于数据传输的预编码矩阵也就越能够与信道状态相适配,因此也就能够提高信号的接收质量。In downlink channel measurement, the higher the approximation between the precoding matrix determined by the network device based on the PMI and the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device, the more the precoding matrix determined by the network device for data transmission can adapt to the channel state, thereby improving the signal reception quality.

(8)天线端口:可简称端口。可以理解为被接收端所识别的发射天线,或者在空间上可以区分的发射天线。针对每个虚拟天线可以预配置一个天线端口,每个虚拟天线可以为多个物理天线的加权组合,每个天线端口可以与一个参考信号对应,因此,每个天线端口可以称为一个参考信号的端口,例如,CSI-RS端口、解调参考信号(demodulation deference signal,DMRS)、SRS端口等。(8) Antenna port: It can be referred to as port for short. It can be understood as a transmitting antenna identified by the receiving end, or a transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space. An antenna port can be pre-configured for each virtual antenna. Each virtual antenna can be a weighted combination of multiple physical antennas. Each antenna port can correspond to a reference signal. Therefore, each antenna port can be called a reference signal port, for example, a CSI-RS port, a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), an SRS port, etc.

其中,天线端口是一个逻辑概念,一个天线端口与一个物理天线一般没有直接对应关系。天线端口通常和参考信号关联,其意义可以理解为参考信号所经历的信道上的一个收发接口。对于低频,一个天线端口可能对应一个或多个天线阵元,这些阵元联合发送参考信号,接收端可以把它们当做一个整体,不需要区分这些阵元。对于高频系统,天线端口可能对应着一个波束,同样的,接收端只需要将这个波束视为一个接口,不需要区分每个阵元。Among them, the antenna port is a logical concept, and there is generally no direct correspondence between an antenna port and a physical antenna. The antenna port is usually associated with a reference signal, and its meaning can be understood as a transceiver interface on the channel that the reference signal passes through. For low frequencies, an antenna port may correspond to one or more antenna elements, which jointly send reference signals. The receiver can treat them as a whole without distinguishing these elements. For high-frequency systems, the antenna port may correspond to a beam. Similarly, the receiver only needs to regard this beam as an interface without distinguishing each element.

此外,端口组可以指多个天线端口对应的集合。一种方式是,将网络设备的多个数字端口进行分组,从而形成多个端口组。另一方式下(尤其是混合数字模拟波束架构下),端口组可以是同一个模拟波束对应的多个数字端口,也简称为端口组,或者数模端口组。再或者,端口组可以是多个模拟波束对应的数字端口集合,也简称为端口组,或者数模端口组。再或者,同一个模拟波束的多个数字端口被分为多个子集,每一个子集称为端口组,或者数模端口组。In addition, a port group may refer to a collection corresponding to multiple antenna ports. One way is to group multiple digital ports of a network device to form multiple port groups. In another way (especially under a hybrid digital analog beam architecture), a port group may be multiple digital ports corresponding to the same analog beam, also referred to as a port group, or a digital-analog port group. Alternatively, a port group may be a collection of digital ports corresponding to multiple analog beams, also referred to as a port group, or a digital-analog port group. Alternatively, multiple digital ports of the same analog beam are divided into multiple subsets, each of which is called a port group, or a digital-analog port group.

(9)信道状态信息(CSI)报告(report):在无线通信系统中,由接收端(如终端设备)向发送端(如网络设备)上报的用于描述通信链路的信道属性的信息。CSI报告中例如可以包括但不限于,预编码矩阵指示(PMI)、秩指示(RI)、信道质量指示(CQI)、信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS),CSI-RS资源指示(CSI-RS resource indicator,CRI)以及层指示(layer indicator,LI)等。应理解,以上列举的CSI的具体内容仅为示例性说明,不应对本申请构成任何限定。CSI可以包括上文所列举的一项或多项,也可以包括除上述列举之外的其他用于表征CSI的信息,本申请对此不作限定。(9) Channel state information (CSI) report: In a wireless communication system, information used to describe the channel properties of a communication link reported by a receiving end (such as a terminal device) to a transmitting end (such as a network device). A CSI report may include, but is not limited to, precoding matrix indication (PMI), rank indication (RI), channel quality indication (CQI), channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), CSI-RS resource indicator (CSI-RS resource indicator, CRI) and layer indicator (LI). It should be understood that the specific contents of the CSI listed above are only exemplary and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. CSI may include one or more of the above-listed items, and may also include other information used to characterize CSI in addition to the above-listed items, and the present application does not limit this.

(10)波束。其中,波束(beam)和波束对(beam pair link,BPL)被引入到通信系统中。波束是一种通信资源。波束可以分为发送波束和接收波束。形成波束的技术可以是波束赋形技术或者其他技术手段。波束赋形包括发送波束赋形和接收波束赋形。(10) Beam. Among them, beam and beam pair link (BPL) are introduced into the communication system. Beam is a communication resource. Beam can be divided into transmit beam and receive beam. The technology for forming beam can be beamforming technology or other technical means. Beamforming includes transmit beamforming and receive beamforming.

其中,波束是一种通信资源。波束可以是宽波束,或者窄波束,或者其他类型波束。形成波束的技术可以是波束成形技术或者其他技术手段。波束成形技术可以具体为数字波束成形技术,模拟波束成形技术,混合数字/模拟波束成形技术。不同的波束可以认为是不同的资源。通过不同的波束可以发送相同的信息或者不同的信息。可选的,可以将具有相同或者类似的通信特征的多个波束视为是一个波束。一个波束内可以包括一个或多个天线端口,用于传输数据信道,控制信道和探测信号等,例如,发射波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布,接收波束可以是指从天线上接收到的无线信号在空间不同方向上的信号强度分布。可以理解的是,形成一个波束的一个或多个天线端口也可以看作是一个天线端口集。波束在协议中的体现还是可以空域滤波器(spatial filter)。Among them, a beam is a communication resource. A beam can be a wide beam, a narrow beam, or other types of beams. The technology for forming a beam can be a beamforming technology or other technical means. The beamforming technology can be specifically a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, and a hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology. Different beams can be considered as different resources. The same information or different information can be sent through different beams. Optionally, multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics can be regarded as a beam. A beam can include one or more antenna ports for transmitting data channels, control channels, and detection signals, etc. For example, a transmit beam can refer to the distribution of signal strength formed in different directions of space after the signal is transmitted by the antenna, and a receive beam can refer to the distribution of signal strength of wireless signals received from the antenna in different directions of space. It can be understood that one or more antenna ports that form a beam can also be regarded as an antenna port set. The embodiment of the beam in the protocol can still be a spatial filter.

发送波束:发送端设备以一定的波束赋形权值发送信号,使发送信号形成的具有空间指向性的波束。其中,在上行方向上,发送端设备可以是终端;在下行方向上,发送端设备可以是网络设备。Transmit beam: The transmitting end device transmits a signal with a certain beamforming weight, so that the transmitted signal forms a beam with spatial directivity. In the uplink direction, the transmitting end device can be a terminal; in the downlink direction, the transmitting end device can be a network device.

接收波束:接收端设备以一定的波束赋形权值接收信号,使接收信号形成的具有空间指向性的波束。其中,在上行方向上,接收端设备可以是网络设备;在下行方向上,接收端设备可以是终端。Receive beam: The receiving device receives the signal with a certain beamforming weight, so that the received signal forms a beam with spatial directivity. In the uplink direction, the receiving device can be a network device; in the downlink direction, the receiving device can be a terminal.

发送波束赋形:具有天线阵列的发送端设备发送信号时,在天线阵列的每个天线阵子上设置一个特定的幅度和相位,使得发送信号具有一定的空间指向性,即在某些方向上信号功率高,在某些方向上信号功率低,信号功率最高的方向即为发送波束的方向。该天线阵列包括多个天线阵子,所附加的特定的幅度和相位即为波束赋形权值。 Transmit beamforming: When a transmitting device with an antenna array transmits a signal, a specific amplitude and phase are set on each antenna element of the antenna array so that the transmitted signal has a certain spatial directivity, that is, the signal power is high in some directions and low in some directions. The direction with the highest signal power is the direction of the transmit beam. The antenna array includes multiple antenna elements, and the specific amplitude and phase attached are the beamforming weights.

接收波束赋形:具有天线阵列的接收端设备接收信号时,在天线阵列的每个天线阵子上设置一个特定的幅度和相位,使得接收信号的功率增益具有方向性,即接收某些方向上的信号时功率增益高,接收某些方向上的信号时功率增益低,接收信号时功率增益最高的方向就是接收波束的方向。该天线阵列包括多个天线阵子,所附加的特定的幅度和相位即为波束赋形权值。Receive beamforming: When a receiving device with an antenna array receives a signal, a specific amplitude and phase are set on each antenna element of the antenna array so that the power gain of the received signal has directionality, that is, the power gain is high when receiving signals in certain directions, and low when receiving signals in other directions. The direction with the highest power gain when receiving a signal is the direction of the receive beam. The antenna array includes multiple antenna elements, and the specific amplitude and phase added are the beamforming weights.

可选地,使用某个发送波束发送信号,可以理解为,使用某个波束赋形权值发送信号。Optionally, using a certain transmit beam to send a signal can be understood as using a certain beamforming weight to send a signal.

可选地,使用接收波束接收信号,可以理解为,使用某个波束赋形权值接收信号。Optionally, using a receiving beam to receive a signal may be understood as using a certain beamforming weight to receive a signal.

一般地,不同的波束可以认为是不同的资源。使用(或通过)不同的波束可以发送相同的信息或者不同的信息。波束对建立在波束的概念上。一个波束对通常包括发送端设备的一个发送波束和接收端设备的一个接收波束。Generally, different beams can be considered as different resources. The same information or different information can be sent using (or through) different beams. A beam pair is based on the concept of beams. A beam pair usually includes a transmit beam of a transmitting device and a receive beam of a receiving device.

下面将以网络设备为基站为例,结合图1a至图1c所示实现内容,对波束的实现过程进行示例性描述。一般地,在较高频段的通信系统中,基站(以及部分频段的终端)通常都会使用大规模阵列天线(例如从500~1000多的天线单元),通过较高的阵列增益对抗频段升高带来的路径损耗,提升覆盖能力。从基站的实现方式来看,同样是大阵列,不同频段不同阵列规模使用的阵列加权方式(即波束成形方式不同),按照波束成形的实现方案,大致分为如下三类。The following will take the network device as an example of a base station, and combine the implementation content shown in Figures 1a to 1c to exemplarily describe the implementation process of the beam. Generally, in higher frequency band communication systems, base stations (and terminals in some frequency bands) usually use large-scale array antennas (for example, from 500 to more than 1000 antenna units) to counteract the path loss caused by the increase in frequency band through higher array gain, thereby improving coverage capabilities. From the perspective of the implementation method of the base station, the same large array, different frequency bands and different array sizes use different array weighting methods (that is, different beamforming methods), which can be roughly divided into the following three categories according to the implementation scheme of beamforming.

一种实现方式为数字波束成形(digital beamforming,DBF),其基本结构如图1a所示,每一个或一组天线单元直接连接一个数字通道。这种结构是低频段大规模多输入多输出(massive MIMO)的典型结构。由于每个天线信号直接被转换到数字域,后续的阵列加权都在数字域进行,因此被称为数字波束成型。数字域信号处理的自由度最高,可以支持非常复杂的信号处理方式,因此同样的阵列规模下,DBF架构的性能也是最好的。另一方面,由于数模转换器(digital to analog converter,DAC)/模数转换器(analog to digital converter,ADC)功耗和成本较高(尤其是大带宽条件下)。一般地,阵列规模相同条件下,DBF的成本也是最高的。One implementation method is digital beamforming (DBF), whose basic structure is shown in Figure 1a. Each antenna unit or a group of antenna units is directly connected to a digital channel. This structure is a typical structure of massive MIMO in the low-frequency band. Since each antenna signal is directly converted to the digital domain, the subsequent array weighting is performed in the digital domain, so it is called digital beamforming. The digital domain has the highest degree of freedom in signal processing and can support very complex signal processing methods. Therefore, under the same array scale, the performance of the DBF architecture is also the best. On the other hand, due to the high power consumption and cost of digital to analog converters (DAC)/analog to digital converters (ADC) (especially under large bandwidth conditions). Generally speaking, under the same array scale, the cost of DBF is also the highest.

另一种实现方式为模拟波束成形(analog beamforming,ABF),其结构如图1b所示,每一个或一组天线单元连接一个模拟移相器,然后多个天线单元在模拟域上进行合并后通过一个数模/模数转换器。与DBF相比,ABF整个阵列只对应了一个数模/模数转换器,所以ABF架构最大的优势在于成本功耗低。ABF的瓶颈也很明显,模拟域的移相器设置决定了波束成形后的波束方向,由于信号在模拟域直接进行电信号合并,无法像DBF那样利用数字信号处理加权,ABF要在收发时预先配置好移相器设置(即将模拟波束指向目标终端),这一过程需要在链路建立阶段通过波束扫描完成,带来额外的时延。一般地,一旦模拟波束遮挡或移动造成未对准,系统的链路质量会迅速降低甚至终端,因此ABF的通信可靠性也不如DBF。Another implementation method is analog beamforming (ABF), whose structure is shown in Figure 1b. Each antenna unit or a group of antenna units is connected to an analog phase shifter, and then multiple antenna units are combined in the analog domain and passed through a digital-to-analog/analog-to-digital converter. Compared with DBF, the entire ABF array only corresponds to one digital-to-analog/analog-to-digital converter, so the biggest advantage of the ABF architecture is low cost and power consumption. The bottleneck of ABF is also obvious. The phase shifter setting in the analog domain determines the beam direction after beamforming. Since the signal is directly combined in the analog domain, it cannot be weighted by digital signal processing like DBF. ABF must pre-configure the phase shifter setting during transmission and reception (that is, point the analog beam to the target terminal). This process needs to be completed through beam scanning during the link establishment phase, which brings additional delay. Generally, once the analog beam is blocked or moved to cause misalignment, the link quality of the system will rapidly degrade or even terminate, so the communication reliability of ABF is not as good as DBF.

另一种实现方式为混合波束成形(hybrid beamforming,HBF),其结构如图1c所示,是ABF和DBF的中间形态,图中示例一个3通道,每通道对应2个模拟移相器的HBF架构。HBF一方面有一定数量的数字端口,支持数字波束成型,同时每个数字端口驱动了一个ABF子阵。与ABF相比,相同阵列规模下,每个数字通道驱动的模拟子阵规模更小(图1c中的4个vs图1b中的6个),因此波束更宽,可靠性更好,波束扫描开销更小。一般地,HBF数字端口和模拟移相器比例随不同频率和系统设计需求配置不一致,例如高频段数字端口数很小(4~16),单个数字通道对应的模拟移相器较多(16~32),而更接近ABF,而低频段系统数字端口较多(32~128),单个数字通道模拟移相器更少(例如2~10)。Another implementation method is hybrid beamforming (HBF), whose structure is shown in Figure 1c. It is an intermediate form between ABF and DBF. The figure shows an example of a HBF architecture with 3 channels and 2 analog phase shifters for each channel. On the one hand, HBF has a certain number of digital ports to support digital beamforming, and each digital port drives an ABF subarray. Compared with ABF, at the same array scale, the analog subarray driven by each digital channel is smaller (4 in Figure 1c vs. 6 in Figure 1b), so the beam is wider, the reliability is better, and the beam scanning overhead is smaller. Generally, the ratio of HBF digital ports and analog phase shifters is inconsistent with different frequencies and system design requirements. For example, the number of digital ports in the high-frequency band is very small (4 to 16), and the analog phase shifters corresponding to a single digital channel are more (16 to 32), which is closer to ABF, while the digital ports of the low-frequency band system are more (32 to 128), and the analog phase shifters of a single digital channel are fewer (for example, 2 to 10).

一般地,HBF与ABF架构都有模拟波束,当波束对齐对准了通信目标时,信号质量将会提升。模拟波束的方向(由波束权值确定)需要在收发前就配置。对于某个终端,基站选择模拟波束过程叫做波束训练或波束扫描。波束扫描通常通过基站使用不同模拟波束权值发送参考信号,终端分别对参考信号测量,反馈其测量结果来协助基站判断哪个波束质量最好。Generally, both HBF and ABF architectures have analog beams. When the beams are aligned with the communication target, the signal quality will be improved. The direction of the analog beam (determined by the beam weight) needs to be configured before sending and receiving. For a certain terminal, the process of the base station selecting an analog beam is called beam training or beam scanning. Beam scanning is usually performed by the base station sending reference signals using different analog beam weights. The terminal measures the reference signals respectively and feeds back its measurement results to help the base station determine which beam has the best quality.

(11)CSI-RS导频映射:导频图样(pattern)指导频端口在时频资源内的映射方式,包括端口时分和端口频分的排布方法以及对应的扰码信息。其中,导频的配置信息包括以下至少一项:配置参数索引、端口数、密度(表示每1/ρRB中映射一组导频)、码分复用类型(code division multiplexing type,CDM type)、码分复用组时频信息、码分复用组索引、码分复用组内频域资源索引信息、码分复用组内频域资源索引信息、码分复用组内时域资源索引信息。(11) CSI-RS pilot mapping: The pilot pattern refers to the mapping method of the pilot port in the time-frequency resource, including the arrangement method of the port time division and port frequency division and the corresponding scrambling code information. The pilot configuration information includes at least one of the following: configuration parameter index, number of ports, density (indicating that a group of pilots is mapped in every 1/ρRB), code division multiplexing type (code division multiplexing type, CDM type), code division multiplexing group time-frequency information, code division multiplexing group index, frequency domain resource index information within the code division multiplexing group, frequency domain resource index information within the code division multiplexing group, and time domain resource index information within the code division multiplexing group.

可选地,码分复用类型包括:Optionally, the code division multiplexing type includes:

noCDM(无码分复用)。 noCDM (no code division multiplexing).

频域码分,记作-FD#,或fd-CDM#,#为一个数字,表示一个CDM组内有#端口在频域码分。Frequency domain code division, denoted as -FD#, or fd-CDM#, # is a number, indicating that there are # ports in frequency domain code division in a CDM group.

时域码分,记作-TD#,或td-CDM#,#为一个数字,表示一个CDM组内有#端口在时域码分。Time domain code division, denoted as -TD#, or td-CDM#, # is a number, indicating that there are # ports in time domain code division in a CDM group.

上述码分类型可以组合,例如cdm4-FD2-TD2表示一个CDM组内有4个端口,在2个频分维度和2个时分维度复用。以Row=8的8端口配置为例,该配置中有两个CDM组(从Row=8的CDM index就可以看出),每组4个端口(cdm4-FD2-TD2),协议中定义的CDM type为'cdm4-FD2-TD2'组内的4个端口的正交码分别如表1中的索引(index)号为0-3四行信息所示。The above code division types can be combined. For example, cdm4-FD2-TD2 means that there are 4 ports in a CDM group, which are multiplexed in 2 frequency division dimensions and 2 time division dimensions. Taking the 8-port configuration of Row=8 as an example, there are two CDM groups in this configuration (as can be seen from the CDM index of Row=8), each with 4 ports (cdm4-FD2-TD2). The CDM type defined in the protocol is 'cdm4-FD2-TD2'. The orthogonal codes of the 4 ports in the group are shown in the four rows of information with index numbers 0-3 in Table 1.

表1
Table 1

wf表示频域码分,wt表示时域码分,各两组正交码。其中,端口0与端口1频域码正交,端口0与端口2时域码正交,端口0与3时频码都正交。0~3,4~7分别属于两个码分复用组(物理意义:组内占用相同的时频资源,通过码分区分端口,码分组间资源正交)。 wf represents frequency domain code division, wt represents time domain code division, each with two groups of orthogonal codes. Among them, the frequency domain codes of port 0 and port 1 are orthogonal, the time domain codes of port 0 and port 2 are orthogonal, and the time and frequency codes of port 0 and port 3 are orthogonal. 0~3, 4~7 belong to two code division multiplexing groups respectively (physical meaning: the same time and frequency resources are occupied in the group, the ports are distinguished by code division, and the resources between code groups are orthogonal).

(12)基于码本的反馈。由于信道与信道之间存在相关性会造成信道之间的干扰,从而带来容量上的损失。在数据进入无线信道传输之前,对每个天线端口上的数据进行加权处理(可以理解为上面提到的数字波束成形),等价于简化了多天线系统的信道矩阵,尽可能的消除信道与信道之间的相关性,从而提升MIMO系统的数据传输的性能和容量。(12) Codebook-based feedback. The correlation between channels will cause interference between channels, resulting in capacity loss. Before the data enters the wireless channel for transmission, the data on each antenna port is weighted (which can be understood as the digital beamforming mentioned above), which is equivalent to simplifying the channel matrix of the multi-antenna system and eliminating the correlation between channels as much as possible, thereby improving the data transmission performance and capacity of the MIMO system.

如图1d所示,网络设备使用端口1和端口2向终端设备发送了参考信号。终端设备根据接收到的参考信号可以分别估计出的发送端口1,2和接收端口1,2之间的信道信息Hi,j(i,j={1,2})。根据该信道信息,终端设备可以估计发射端的预编码矩阵V。矩阵V的获取方法属于终端设备自身算法实现,一种经典的实现方法为SVD分解。假设接收端收到的信道矩阵H,该矩阵通过SVD分解可以分解为:
As shown in Figure 1d, the network device uses port 1 and port 2 to send a reference signal to the terminal device. The terminal device can estimate the channel information Hi,j (i,j = {1,2}) between the transmitting port 1,2 and the receiving port 1,2 respectively based on the received reference signal. Based on the channel information, the terminal device can estimate the precoding matrix V of the transmitter. The method for obtaining the matrix V belongs to the algorithm implementation of the terminal device itself. A classic implementation method is SVD decomposition. Assume that the channel matrix H received by the receiving end can be decomposed into:

其中,U、V都是酉矩阵,D是一个对角阵。终端设备可以将矩阵V(或V的列向量,取决于需要传的流数)反馈到发射端作为预编码矩阵,预编码后的接收信号为:
y=HVx=UAVHVx=UDx;
Among them, U and V are both unitary matrices, and D is a diagonal matrix. The terminal device can feed back the matrix V (or the column vector of V, depending on the number of streams to be transmitted) to the transmitter as a precoding matrix. The received signal after precoding is:
y=HVx=UAV H Vx=UDx;

终端设备可以使用分解得到的U矩阵对接收数据进行处理,得到
UHy=UHUDx=Dx;
The terminal device can use the decomposed U matrix to process the received data and obtain
UHyUHUDx =Dx;

由于D是一个对角矩阵,x信号可以被直接恢复出来。Since D is a diagonal matrix, the x signal can be directly recovered.

针对上述网络设备获取V的方式,有两种情况:There are two ways to obtain V for the above network device:

方式一:网络设备基于上行SRS的测量和上下行信道的互易性来估计出下行信道矩阵H,进而得到V,该方式在时分双工(time division duplexing,TDD)系统可以应用。方式一又称为基于SRS的预编码。Method 1: The network equipment estimates the downlink channel matrix H based on the measurement of the uplink SRS and the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, and then obtains V. This method can be applied in the time division duplexing (TDD) system. Method 1 is also called SRS-based precoding.

方式二:终端基于下行参考信号的测量来估计出信道矩阵H,进而得到V,然后将V反馈给网络设备侧。方式二又称为基于PMI的预编码。Mode 2: The terminal estimates the channel matrix H based on the measurement of the downlink reference signal, and then obtains V, and then feeds V back to the network device side. Mode 2 is also called PMI-based precoding.

而对于第二种方式,为了降低反馈开销,对于预编码矩阵V进行了有限个量化反馈的协议定义,这些有限个可选的预编码量化值矩阵又称为码本,并且对码本中预编码矩阵进行了编号,终端可以反馈这些码本的相关编号或参数即可。示例性的,下面将通过三个步骤描述该实现过程。For the second method, in order to reduce feedback overhead, a limited number of quantized feedback protocols are defined for the precoding matrix V. These limited number of optional precoding quantized value matrices are also called codebooks, and the precoding matrices in the codebooks are numbered. The terminal can feedback the relevant numbers or parameters of these codebooks. Exemplarily, the implementation process will be described in three steps below.

第一步:网络设备向终端设备发送配置信息,该配置信息包括水平垂直端口数及DFT过采样倍数,例如,该配置信息可以包括CSI-RS端口数、N1、N2、O1、O2中的一项或多项。 Step 1: The network device sends configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information includes the number of horizontal and vertical ports and the DFT oversampling multiple. For example, the configuration information may include one or more of the number of CSI-RS ports, N1, N2, O1, and O2.

其中,N1表示在同一极化的某个方向上的逻辑天线端口数,一般是指水平方向;N2表示在同一极化的另外一个方向上的逻辑天线端口数,一般是指垂直方向;O1表示N1所在方向(水平方向)的DFT过采样倍数;O2表示N2所在方向(垂直方向)的DFT过采样倍数。Among them, N1 represents the number of logical antenna ports in a certain direction of the same polarization, generally refers to the horizontal direction; N2 represents the number of logical antenna ports in another direction of the same polarization, generally refers to the vertical direction; O1 represents the DFT oversampling multiple in the direction of N1 (horizontal direction); O2 represents the DFT oversampling multiple in the direction of N2 (vertical direction).

第二步:终端设备确定码本集合。Step 2: The terminal device determines the codebook set.

示例性的,以16CSI-RS端口的情况为例,在这种情况下,基于该配置信息或预配置的信息,终端设备可以确定N1的取值为4且N2的取值为2,或者,N1的取值为8且N2的取值为1。以N1的取值为4,而N2的取值为2为例,N1和N2对应的物理含义在于,在进行波束赋形时可以形成水平维度为N1,垂直维度为N2总共N1*N2个权值向量,这些权值向量是相互正交的,即通过这些权值向量加权后所形成的波束之间是没有干扰的。而O1和O2的物理意义在于,通过DFT过采样在水平方向和垂直方向增加了权值向量个数,因此可以生成更多的权值向量。而O1和O2的取值也决定着当天线形态一定的情况下,即N1和N2确定的情况下,水平方向和垂直方向的波束密度,O1和O2取值越大,进行波束扫描时波束的步长越小,精度越高,但所带来的代价是权值向量之间不再正交,即波束之间存在干扰。N1*O1决定了波束合集中水平方向的权值向量个数,N2*O2决定了波束合集中垂直方向的权值向量个数。Exemplarily, taking the case of 16 CSI-RS ports as an example, in this case, based on the configuration information or pre-configured information, the terminal device can determine that the value of N1 is 4 and the value of N2 is 2, or that the value of N1 is 8 and the value of N2 is 1. Taking the value of N1 as 4 and the value of N2 as 2 as an example, the physical meaning of N1 and N2 is that when beamforming is performed, a total of N1*N2 weight vectors with a horizontal dimension of N1 and a vertical dimension of N2 can be formed. These weight vectors are mutually orthogonal, that is, there is no interference between the beams formed after weighting these weight vectors. The physical meaning of O1 and O2 is that the number of weight vectors is increased in the horizontal and vertical directions through DFT oversampling, so more weight vectors can be generated. The values of O1 and O2 also determine the beam density in the horizontal and vertical directions when the antenna shape is certain, that is, when N1 and N2 are determined. The larger the values of O1 and O2, the smaller the step size of the beam during beam scanning and the higher the accuracy, but the cost is that the weight vectors are no longer orthogonal, that is, there is interference between beams. N1*O1 determines the number of weight vectors in the horizontal direction of the beam set, and N2*O2 determines the number of weight vectors in the vertical direction of the beam set.

如图1e所示示例,N1和N2分别为(4,2),O1和O2分别为(4,4)。当未进行过采样时,DFT码本集合就由深蓝色的码本组成。As shown in Figure 1e, N1 and N2 are (4, 2), O1 and O2 are (4, 4). When oversampling is not performed, the DFT codebook set consists of dark blue codebooks.

具体,水平和垂直的权值向量为:
Specifically, the horizontal and vertical weight vectors are:

X1为水平方向上的权值向量,其向量的长度为N1,具体有多少个向量由l的取值个数决定,即l也表示着水平方向选择哪一组权值。X1 is the weight vector in the horizontal direction, and its length is N1. The specific number of vectors is determined by the number of values of l, that is, l also indicates which set of weights is selected in the horizontal direction.

X2为垂直方向上的权值向量,其向量的长度为N2,具体有多少个向量由k的取值个数决定,即k也表示着垂直方向选择哪一组权值。X2 is the weight vector in the vertical direction, and its length is N2. The specific number of vectors is determined by the number of values of k, that is, k also indicates which set of weights is selected in the vertical direction.

码本集合W满足:
The codebook set W satisfies:

其中,表示克罗内克乘积(Kronecker Product)。即通过X1和X2的克罗内克乘积表示的结果可以为其中一组极化天线上的权值结果,一般与另一组极化天线成对角块形式。in, represents the Kronecker Product. That is, the result represented by the Kronecker product of X1 and X2 may be the weight result on one group of polarized antennas, which is generally in a diagonal block form with the other group of polarized antennas.

第三步:终端设备测量导频信号(本申请中,导频信号与参考信号可以相互替换),反馈码本。示例性的,终端测量导频信号,确定一个最优的码本反馈。对于确定的l和m,X1和X2的Kronecker积也就确定了同一极化天线上的某一个特定方向的波束。对于码本反馈,以Type I Single-Panel Codebook为例,终端设备需要反馈两个参数i1和i2,且i1包含多个参数,参数的数量由层数来决定。
Step 3: The terminal device measures the pilot signal (in this application, the pilot signal and the reference signal can be interchangeable) and feeds back the codebook. Exemplarily, the terminal measures the pilot signal and determines an optimal codebook feedback. For the determined l and m, the Kronecker product of X1 and X2 also determines the beam in a specific direction on the same polarized antenna. For codebook feedback, taking Type I Single-Panel Codebook as an example, the terminal device needs to feed back two parameters i1 and i2 , and i1 contains multiple parameters, and the number of parameters is determined by the number of layers.

i2:表示极化相位量化索引。i 2 : represents the polarization phase quantization index.

i1,1:表示垂直维度波束index。i 1,1 : represents the vertical dimension beam index.

i1,2:表示水平维波束index。i 1,2 : represents the horizontal beam index.

i1,3:表示水平维和垂直维旋转因子的选取,其主要和天线阵列的形态和端口数量有关。i 1,3 : represents the selection of horizontal and vertical rotation factors, which is mainly related to the shape and number of ports of the antenna array.

请参阅图2,为本申请的实施例应用的通信系统1000的架构示意图。如图2所示,该通信系统包括无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)100和核心网200,可选的,通信系统1000还可以包括互联网300。其中,RAN100包括至少一个RAN节点(如图2中的110a和110b,统称为110),还可以包括至少一个终端(如图2中的120a-120j,统称为120)。RAN100还可以包括其它RAN节点,例如,无线中继设备和/或无线回传设备(图2中未示出)。终端120通过无线的方式与RAN节点110相连,RAN节点110通过无线 或有线方式与核心网200连接。核心网200中的核心网设备与RAN100中的RAN节点110可以是独立的不同的物理设备,也可以是集成了核心网设备的逻辑功能与RAN节点的逻辑功能的同一个物理设备。终端和终端之间以及RAN节点和RAN节点之间可以通过有线或无线的方式相互连接。Please refer to Figure 2, which is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system 1000 applied in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 2, the communication system includes a radio access network (RAN) 100 and a core network 200. Optionally, the communication system 1000 may also include the Internet 300. Among them, the RAN 100 includes at least one RAN node (such as 110a and 110b in Figure 2, collectively referred to as 110), and may also include at least one terminal (such as 120a-120j in Figure 2, collectively referred to as 120). The RAN 100 may also include other RAN nodes, for example, wireless relay equipment and/or wireless backhaul equipment (not shown in Figure 2). The terminal 120 is connected to the RAN node 110 in a wireless manner, and the RAN node 110 is connected to the RAN node 110 via a wireless mode. The core network device in the core network 200 and the RAN node 110 in the RAN 100 may be independent and different physical devices, or may be the same physical device that integrates the logical functions of the core network device and the logical functions of the RAN node. Terminals and RAN nodes may be connected to each other by wire or wirelessly.

RAN100可以是第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)中定义的演进的通用陆地无线接入(evolved universal terrestrial radio access,E-UTRA)系统、新无线(new radio,NR)系统以及未来的无线接入系统。RAN100还可以包括上述两种或两种以上不同的无线接入系统。RAN100还可以是开放式RAN(open RAN,O-RAN)。RAN100 may be an evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) system, a new radio (NR) system, and a future radio access system defined in the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP). RAN100 may also include two or more of the above different radio access systems. RAN100 may also be an open RAN (O-RAN).

RAN节点,也称为无线接入网设备、RAN实体或接入节点,用以帮助终端通过无线方式接入到通信系统中。在一种应用场景中,RAN节点可以是基站(base station)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNodeB)、传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统中的下一代基站(next generation NodeB,gNB)、第六代(6th generation,6G)移动通信系统中的下一代基站或未来移动通信系统中的基站。RAN节点可以是宏基站(如图2中的110a),也可以是微基站或室内站(如图2中的110b),还可以是中继节点或施主节点。RAN nodes, also known as radio access network equipment, RAN entities or access nodes, are used to help terminals access the communication system wirelessly. In an application scenario, a RAN node can be a base station, an evolved NodeB (eNodeB), a transmission reception point (TRP), a next generation NodeB (gNB) in a fifth generation (5G) mobile communication system, a next generation NodeB in a sixth generation (6G) mobile communication system, or a base station in a future mobile communication system. A RAN node can be a macro base station (such as 110a in FIG. 2 ), a micro base station or an indoor station (such as 110b in FIG. 2 ), or a relay node or a donor node.

在另一种应用场景中,可以通过多个RAN节点的协作来帮助终端实现无线接入,不同的RAN节点分别实现基站的部分功能。例如,RAN节点可以是集中式单元(central unit,CU)、分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)或无线单元(radio unit,RU)。这里的CU完成基站的无线资源控制协议和分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)的功能,还可以完成业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)的功能;DU完成基站的无线链路控制层和介质访问控制(medium access control,MAC)层的功能,还可以完成部分物理层或全部物理层的功能,有关上述各个协议层的具体描述,可以参考3GPP的相关技术规范。RU可以用于实现射频信号的收发功能。CU和DU可以是两个独立的RAN节点,也可以是集成在同一个RAN节点中,例如集成在基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)中。RU可以包括在射频设备中,例如包括在射频拉远单元(remote radio unit,RRU)或有源天线单元(active antenna unit,AAU)。CU可以进一步划分为CU-控制面和CU-用户面两种类型的RAN节点。In another application scenario, the cooperation of multiple RAN nodes can help the terminal achieve wireless access, and different RAN nodes respectively implement part of the functions of the base station. For example, the RAN node can be a centralized unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU) or a radio unit (RU). The CU here completes the functions of the radio resource control protocol and the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) of the base station, and can also complete the function of the service data adaptation protocol (SDAP); the DU completes the functions of the radio link control layer and the medium access control (MAC) layer of the base station, and can also complete the functions of part or all of the physical layer. For the specific description of the above-mentioned protocol layers, please refer to the relevant technical specifications of 3GPP. RU can be used to implement the transceiver function of the radio frequency signal. CU and DU can be two independent RAN nodes, or they can be integrated in the same RAN node, such as integrated in the baseband unit (BBU). The RU may be included in a radio frequency device, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) or an active antenna unit (AAU). The CU may be further divided into two types of RAN nodes: CU-control plane and CU-user plane.

在不同的系统中,RAN节点可能有不同的名称,例如,在开放式接入网(open RAN,O-RAN或ORAN)系统中,CU也可以称为O-CU(开放式CU),DU也可以称为O-DU,CU-CP也可以称为O-CU-CP,CU-UP也可以称为O-CU-UP,RU也可以称为O-RU。为描述方便,本申请中以CU,CU-CP,CU-UP、DU和RU为例进行描述。本申请中的CU(或CU-CP、CU-UP)、DU和RU中的任一单元,可以是通过软件模块、硬件模块、或者软件模块与硬件模块结合来实现。In different systems, RAN nodes may have different names. For example, in an open access network (open RAN, O-RAN or ORAN) system, CU may also be called O-CU (open CU), DU may also be called O-DU, CU-CP may also be called O-CU-CP, CU-UP may also be called O-CU-UP, and RU may also be called O-RU. For the convenience of description, this application uses CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU and RU as examples for description. Any unit in the CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU and RU in this application may be implemented by a software module, a hardware module, or a combination of a software module and a hardware module.

接入网设备和终端设备之间的通信遵循一定的协议层结构。该协议层可以包括控制面协议层和用户面协议层。控制面协议层可以包括以下至少一项:无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层、分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层、无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层、或物理(physical,PHY)层等。用户面协议层可以包括以下至少一项:业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层、PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层、或物理层等。The communication between the access network equipment and the terminal equipment follows a certain protocol layer structure. The protocol layer may include a control plane protocol layer and a user plane protocol layer. The control plane protocol layer may include at least one of the following: a radio resource control (RRC) layer, a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, a radio link control (RLC) layer, a media access control (MAC) layer, or a physical (PHY) layer. The user plane protocol layer may include at least one of the following: a service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, a MAC layer, or a physical layer.

对于ORAN系统中的网元及其可实现的协议层功能对应关系,可参照下表2。For the correspondence between network elements in the ORAN system and their achievable protocol layer functions, please refer to Table 2 below.

表2
Table 2

为了便于描述,下文中以基站作为RAN节点的一个举例进行描述。For the convenience of description, a base station is taken as an example of a RAN node for description below.

终端是具有无线收发功能的设备,可以向基站发送信号,或接收来自基站的信号。终端也可以称为终端设备、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台、移动终端等。终端可以广泛应用于各种场景, 例如,设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)、车物(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信、机器类通信(machine-type communication,MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IOT)、虚拟现实、增强现实、工业控制、自动驾驶、远程医疗、智能电网、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通、智慧城市等。终端可以是手机、平板电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、可穿戴设备、车辆、飞机、轮船、机器人、机械臂、智能家居设备等。本申请的实施例对终端所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。A terminal is a device with wireless transceiver functions that can send signals to a base station or receive signals from a base station. A terminal can also be called a terminal device, user equipment (UE), mobile station, mobile terminal, etc. Terminals can be widely used in various scenarios. For example, device-to-device (D2D), vehicle to everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things (IOT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, autonomous driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, etc. The terminal can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a wearable device, a vehicle, an airplane, a ship, a robot, a mechanical arm, a smart home device, etc. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal.

基站和终端可以是固定位置的,也可以是可移动的。基站和终端可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上;还可以部署在飞机、气球和人造卫星上。本申请的实施例对基站和终端的应用场景不做限定。Base stations and terminals can be fixed or movable. Base stations and terminals can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on the water surface; they can also be deployed on airplanes, balloons, and artificial satellites. The embodiments of this application do not limit the application scenarios of base stations and terminals.

基站和终端的角色可以是相对的,例如,图2中的直升机或无人机120i可以被配置成移动基站,对于那些通过120i接入到无线接入网100的终端120j来说,终端120i是基站;但对于基站110a来说,120i是终端,即110a与120i之间是通过无线空口协议进行通信的。当然,110a与120i之间也可以是通过基站与基站之间的接口协议进行通信的,此时,相对于110a来说,120i也是基站。因此,基站和终端都可以统一称为通信装置,图2中的110a和110b可以称为具有基站功能的通信装置,图2中的120a-120j可以称为具有终端功能的通信装置。The roles of the base station and the terminal can be relative. For example, the helicopter or drone 120i in FIG. 2 can be configured as a mobile base station. For the terminal 120j that accesses the wireless access network 100 through 120i, the terminal 120i is a base station; but for the base station 110a, 120i is a terminal, that is, 110a and 120i communicate through the wireless air interface protocol. Of course, 110a and 120i can also communicate through the interface protocol between base stations. In this case, relative to 110a, 120i is also a base station. Therefore, base stations and terminals can be collectively referred to as communication devices. 110a and 110b in FIG. 2 can be referred to as communication devices with base station functions, and 120a-120j in FIG. 2 can be referred to as communication devices with terminal functions.

基站和终端之间、基站和基站之间、终端和终端之间可以通过授权频谱进行通信,也可以通过免授权频谱进行通信,也可以同时通过授权频谱和免授权频谱进行通信;可以通过6千兆赫(gigahertz,GHz)以下的频谱进行通信,也可以通过6GHz以上的频谱进行通信,还可以同时使用6GHz以下的频谱和6GHz以上的频谱进行通信。本申请的实施例对无线通信所使用的频谱资源不做限定。Base stations and terminals, base stations and base stations, and terminals and terminals can communicate through authorized spectrum, unauthorized spectrum, or both; they can communicate through spectrum below 6 gigahertz (GHz), spectrum above 6 GHz, or spectrum below 6 GHz and spectrum above 6 GHz. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the spectrum resources used for wireless communication.

在本申请的实施例中,基站的功能也可以由基站中的模块(如芯片)来执行,也可以由包含有基站功能的控制子系统来执行。这里的包含有基站功能的控制子系统可以是智能电网、工业控制、智能交通、智慧城市等上述应用场景中的控制中心。终端的功能也可以由终端中的模块(如芯片或调制解调器)来执行,也可以由包含有终端功能的装置来执行。In the embodiments of the present application, the functions of the base station may also be performed by a module (such as a chip) in the base station, or by a control subsystem including the base station function. The control subsystem including the base station function here may be a control center in the above-mentioned application scenarios such as smart grid, industrial control, smart transportation, and smart city. The functions of the terminal may also be performed by a module (such as a chip or a modem) in the terminal, or by a device including the terminal function.

在无线通信系统(例如图2所示通信系统)中,MIMO技术作为无线通信的一项关键技术,可以用来满足高速率的传输需求。一种实现示例中,为了给终端设备发送数据,网络设备可以在数字端口上进行预编码,同时选择合适的编码与调制阶数。例如,预编码的作用是使天线(或波束)与信道更匹配,以保证发送数据到达终端侧时信号质量更好、干扰更小,而较好的调制阶数与码率能够保证数据可靠传输条件下最大化信道传输容量。预编码和调制编码方案(modulation coding scheme,MCS)的设置需要根据信道质量和信道响应确定。换言之,网络设备可以基于对信道进行测量的测量结果,实现数据传输的传输质量。In a wireless communication system (such as the communication system shown in FIG2 ), MIMO technology, as a key technology for wireless communication, can be used to meet the needs of high-speed transmission. In an implementation example, in order to send data to a terminal device, the network device can perform precoding on the digital port and select appropriate coding and modulation orders. For example, the role of precoding is to make the antenna (or beam) more matched with the channel to ensure better signal quality and less interference when the transmitted data reaches the terminal side, while a better modulation order and code rate can ensure that the channel transmission capacity is maximized under the condition of reliable data transmission. The setting of precoding and modulation coding scheme (MCS) needs to be determined according to the channel quality and channel response. In other words, the network device can achieve the transmission quality of data transmission based on the measurement results of the channel.

然而,在基于MIMO技术实现的通信过程中,如何实现信道的测量,是一个亟待解决的技术问题。However, in the communication process based on MIMO technology, how to achieve channel measurement is a technical problem that needs to be solved urgently.

为了解决上述问题,本申请提供了一种通信方法及相关设备。下面将结合附图进行详细介绍。In order to solve the above problems, the present application provides a communication method and related equipment, which will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.

请参阅图3,为本申请提供的通信方法的一个示意图,该方法包括如下步骤。Please refer to FIG3 , which is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.

需要说明的是,本申请以网络设备和终端设备作为交互示意的执行主体为例来示意本申请提供的方法,但本申请并不限制交互示意的执行主体。例如,由网络设备执行的方法也可以由网络设备的模块(例如芯片、芯片系统、或处理器)执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分网络设备的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件实现。由终端设备执行的方法也可以由终端设备的模块(例如芯片、芯片系统、或处理器)执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件实现。It should be noted that this application uses network devices and terminal devices as examples of the execution subjects of the interactive illustration to illustrate the method provided by this application, but this application does not limit the execution subjects of the interactive illustration. For example, the method executed by the network device can also be executed by a module of the network device (such as a chip, a chip system, or a processor), and can also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module, or software that can implement all or part of the network device. The method executed by the terminal device can also be executed by a module of the terminal device (such as a chip, a chip system, or a processor), and can also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module, or software that can implement all or part of the terminal device functions.

图3示意的方法包括步骤S301至S302,下面将分别介绍各个步骤。The method shown in FIG3 includes steps S301 to S302 , and each step will be described below.

S301.网络设备发送参考信号,相应的,终端设备接收该参考信号。其中,该参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,该M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,N1为大于等于1的整数。S301. A network device sends a reference signal, and a terminal device receives the reference signal accordingly. The reference signal is sent via M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein a first digital port of the M digital ports includes N1 virtual ports, where N1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

应理解,在步骤S301之前,网络设备可以发送参考信号的配置信息,此后,该网络设备在步骤S301中基于该配置信息发送该参考信号。相应的,对于终端设备而言,该终端设备可以接收该参考信号的配置信息,并在步骤S301中基于该配置信息接收该参考信号。一般地,该配置信息可以包括该参考信号的时域资源配置信息、频域资源配置信息等。 It should be understood that before step S301, the network device may send configuration information of the reference signal, and thereafter, the network device sends the reference signal based on the configuration information in step S301. Correspondingly, for the terminal device, the terminal device may receive the configuration information of the reference signal, and receive the reference signal based on the configuration information in step S301. Generally, the configuration information may include time domain resource configuration information, frequency domain resource configuration information, etc. of the reference signal.

应理解,终端设备在步骤S301中接收参考信号之后,该终端设备可以对接收的参考信号进行测量得到测量信息之后,执行步骤S302。It should be understood that after the terminal device receives the reference signal in step S301, the terminal device may measure the received reference signal to obtain measurement information, and then execute step S302.

S302.终端设备发送测量信息,相应的,网络设备接收该测量信息。其中,该测量信息是基于该参考信号进行测量得到的。其中,该测量信息包括基于该第一数字端口发送的参考信号进行测量得到的第一信息;其中,该第一信息是基于N1个信道信息确定的,该N1个信道信息分别是通过该N1个虚拟端口发送的参考信号确定的,该第一信息用于确定该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值。S302. The terminal device sends measurement information, and the network device receives the measurement information accordingly. The measurement information is obtained by measuring based on the reference signal. The measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port.

基于图3所示技术方案,网络设备在步骤S301中发送参考信号之后,由于参考信号经过无线信道的传输,使得终端设备接收的参考信号能够携带该无线信道的信道信息;此后,终端设备对该参考信号进行测量得到的测量信息能够反映出该信道信息,后续终端设备在步骤S302中发送测量信息的方式,能够使得网络设备基于该测量信息获得网络设备与终端设备之间的信道的测量结果。Based on the technical solution shown in Figure 3, after the network device sends the reference signal in step S301, the reference signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, so that the reference signal received by the terminal device can carry the channel information of the wireless channel; thereafter, the measurement information obtained by the terminal device through measuring the reference signal can reflect the channel information, and the subsequent way in which the terminal device sends the measurement information in step S302 can enable the network device to obtain the measurement result of the channel between the network device and the terminal device based on the measurement information.

此外,终端设备基于参考信号进行测量得到的测量信息中,包括第一数字端口对应的第一信息,并且,第一信息用于确定第一数字端口中的N1个虚拟端口的权值。换言之,网络设备基于该第一信息可以确定该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值。相比于网络设备基于终端设备反馈的测量信息获得数字端口的权值的方式,由于第一数字端口包含该N1个虚拟端口,使得网络设备基于该第一信息可以确定更细粒度的权值。从而,在天线阵列规模较大的情况下,终端设备可以基于参考信号的测量结果确定并指示较细粒度的权值,使得网络设备能够基于该权值进行通信,进而减少波束扫描开销,实现快速的波束跟踪。In addition, the measurement information obtained by the terminal device based on the reference signal includes the first information corresponding to the first digital port, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port. In other words, the network device can determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port based on the first information. Compared with the way in which the network device obtains the weights of the digital port based on the measurement information fed back by the terminal device, since the first digital port contains the N 1 virtual ports, the network device can determine a finer-grained weight based on the first information. Thus, in the case of a large antenna array, the terminal device can determine and indicate a finer-grained weight based on the measurement result of the reference signal, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing the beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.

以图2所示网络设备和终端设备之间的通信过程为例,为了获得网络设备与终端设备之间的信道信息,一种常用的方法是通过网络设备发送下行参考信号,终端设备根据下行参考信号反馈对应的信道状态信息,包括预编码信息、信道支持的传输流数(即RI)和CQI(用于反馈当前信道质量下终端推荐的MCS),这一过程叫做信道状态信息反馈(CSI反馈)。一般地,网络设备针对不同的波束,将会在每个波束独立发送参考信号,终端设备测量每个波束对应的参考信号并反馈每个波束的测量结果。具体来说,网络设备会为终端配置多个资源,每个资源对应网络设备的一个发送波束,终端设备反馈波束测量结果。Taking the communication process between the network device and the terminal device shown in Figure 2 as an example, in order to obtain the channel information between the network device and the terminal device, a common method is to send a downlink reference signal through the network device, and the terminal device feeds back the corresponding channel state information according to the downlink reference signal, including precoding information, the number of transmission streams supported by the channel (i.e. RI) and CQI (used to feed back the MCS recommended by the terminal under the current channel quality). This process is called channel state information feedback (CSI feedback). Generally, the network device will send a reference signal independently in each beam for different beams, and the terminal device will measure the reference signal corresponding to each beam and feed back the measurement result of each beam. Specifically, the network device will configure multiple resources for the terminal, each resource corresponds to a transmission beam of the network device, and the terminal device feeds back the beam measurement result.

随着通信技术的发展,为了提高通信信号(例如毫米波信号)的覆盖能力,用于收发通信信号的天线阵列规模变大,波束数目也将会随之增加。一方面,波束扫描的符号数增加,导致波束扫描开销也增大;另一方面,阵列增大导致波束变窄,对终端移动性的挑战更大。With the development of communication technology, in order to improve the coverage of communication signals (such as millimeter wave signals), the size of antenna arrays used to send and receive communication signals has become larger, and the number of beams will also increase. On the one hand, the number of symbols scanned by the beam increases, resulting in an increase in the overhead of beam scanning; on the other hand, the increase in the array leads to narrower beams, which poses a greater challenge to terminal mobility.

为了解决该问题,在图3所示技术方案中,终端设备在步骤S301中接收的参考信号,可以是在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的,该L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值是通过L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值与第三权值得到的,该L1个第二权值是正交的,i的取值为1至L1。换言之,该参考信号是在不同时间上通过正交的权值发送的,所以,终端设备可以根据求逆获取子阵的波束信道,然后通过计算某种准则(例如功率最大化准则、容量最大准则等)获取最优的虚拟端口的权值。此后,该终端设备在步骤S302中发送的测量信息可以用于确定该权值。通过这种方式,在天线阵列规模较大的情况下,可以减少波束扫描开销,实现快速的波束跟踪。In order to solve this problem, in the technical solution shown in FIG3 , the reference signal received by the terminal device in step S301 can be sent through L 1 first weights respectively in L 1 time units, and the i-th first weight in the L 1 first weights is obtained through the i-th second weight and the third weight in the L 1 second weights, and the L 1 second weights are orthogonal, and the value of i is 1 to L 1. In other words, the reference signal is sent through orthogonal weights at different times, so the terminal device can obtain the beam channel of the subarray according to the inversion, and then obtain the optimal virtual port weight by calculating a certain criterion (such as power maximization criterion, capacity maximum criterion, etc.). Thereafter, the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 can be used to determine the weight. In this way, when the antenna array is large in scale, the beam scanning overhead can be reduced and fast beam tracking can be achieved.

示例性的,假设第一数字端口包含两个(即N1=2)虚拟端口,两个虚拟端口分别对应网络设备中的天线阵子集合0和天线阵子集合1。假设前述第三权值对应两个子向量分别w0及w1,w0及w1均为列向量,组成的向量即为前述的第三权值,又假设天线阵子集合0和天线阵子集合1与终端设备之间的信道信息分别表示为H0和H1;在上述步骤S301中,网络设备可以在2个(即L1=2)时间单元上基于2个虚拟端口发送参考信号,下面将以这2个时间单元分别为时间单元0和时间单元1为例进行描述。Exemplarily, it is assumed that the first digital port includes two (ie, N 1 = 2) virtual ports, and the two virtual ports correspond to antenna array set 0 and antenna array set 1 in the network device. It is assumed that the third weight corresponds to two sub-vectors w 0 and w 1 , respectively, and w 0 and w 1 are both column vectors, and the vector composed of That is, the aforementioned third weight, and it is assumed that the channel information between antenna element set 0 and antenna element set 1 and the terminal device are represented by H 0 and H 1 respectively; in the above step S301, the network device can send a reference signal based on two virtual ports in two (i.e., L 1 =2) time units, and the following description will be made by taking the two time units as time unit 0 and time unit 1 as an example.

对于时间单元0,给虚拟端口0和虚拟端口1分别进行s00和s10的相位调整,s00与s10可以组成一个L1个第二权值中的一个第二权值,那么L1个第一权值中的一个第一权值可以表示为终端设备在该时 间单元0上接收得到信号G0满足:
For time unit 0, phase adjustments of s 00 and s 10 are performed on virtual port 0 and virtual port 1 respectively. s 00 and s 10 can form a second weight value among L 1 second weight values. Then a first weight value among L 1 first weight values can be expressed as The terminal device at this time The signal G0 received at the inter-unit 0 satisfies:

对于时间单元1,给虚拟端口0和虚拟端口1分别进行s01和s11的相位调整,s01与s11可以组成一个L1个第二权值中的另一个第二权值,那么L1个第一权值中的另一个第一权值可以表示为终端在该时间单元1上接收得到信号G1满足:
For time unit 1, phase adjustments of s 01 and s 11 are performed on virtual port 0 and virtual port 1 respectively. s 01 and s 11 can form another second weight value among L 1 second weight values. Then another first weight value among L 1 first weight values can be expressed as The terminal receives the signal G1 in the time unit 1 and satisfies:

将G0和G1合并得到:
Combining G0 and G1 gives:

由于调相矩阵是由L1个正交的第一权值组成,所以是可逆的,那么终端根据L1个时间单元的接收信号以及L1个正交的第一权值,可以得到:
Since the phase modulation matrix It is composed of L 1 orthogonal first weights, so it is reversible. Then the terminal can obtain the following equation based on the received signal of L 1 time units and L 1 orthogonal first weights:

以功率最大化准则为例(类似地,容量最大准则或者其它准则可以参考下述实现),若想使终端设备获得的信号功率最大,则可以按以下原则获取最优的第二权值:
Taking the power maximization criterion as an example (similarly, the capacity maximization criterion or other criteria can be implemented as described below), if the signal power obtained by the terminal device is to be maximized, the optimal second weight can be obtained according to the following principle:

上述原则,一种实现方式可以通过SVD分解,获取最优的第二权值:One way to implement the above principle is to use SVD decomposition to obtain the optimal second weight:

先求取[H0w0 H1w1]的协方差矩阵R满足:
R=[H0w0 H1w1]H[H0w0 H1w1];
First, find the covariance matrix R of [H 0 w 0 H 1 w 1 ] that satisfies:
R=[H 0 w 0 H 1 w 1 ] H [H 0 w 0 H 1 w 1 ];

再对R做SVD分解,取最大奇异值对应的右奇异向量v,进一步得到α:
Then perform SVD decomposition on R, take the right singular vector v corresponding to the maximum singular value, and further obtain α:

通过上述实现过程,若终端向网络设备发送α或[H0w0 H1w1],那么网络设备可以得到天线阵子集合0对应的a0,以及天线阵子集合1对应的a1。进一步地,进行数传(例如数据发送或数据接收)时,网络设备中的天线阵子集合0和天线阵子集合1的模拟权值可以为α0w0及α1w1。通过这种方式,相比于网络设备通过多次不同精度的波束扫描过程获得数传过程中各个天线阵子集合的权值的实现过程,由于网络设备无需通过多次不同精度的波束扫描过程即可获得不同天线阵子集合的模拟权值,可以减少波束扫描开销,并且能够减少波束扫描的时延,以实现快速的波束跟踪。Through the above implementation process, if the terminal sends α or [H 0 w 0 H 1 w 1 ] to the network device, the network device can obtain a 0 corresponding to antenna array set 0 and a 1 corresponding to antenna array set 1. Further, when performing data transmission (such as data transmission or data reception), the analog weights of antenna array set 0 and antenna array set 1 in the network device can be α 0 w 0 and α 1 w 1. In this way, compared with the implementation process in which the network device obtains the weights of each antenna array set during the data transmission process through multiple beam scanning processes with different accuracies, since the network device can obtain the analog weights of different antenna array sets without multiple beam scanning processes with different accuracies, the beam scanning overhead can be reduced, and the delay of beam scanning can be reduced to achieve fast beam tracking.

换言之,终端设备在步骤S302发送的测量信息,可以用于确定网络设备中的天线阵子集合的模拟权值(例如α0w0及α1w1)。下面将对测量信息的具体实现过程进行描述。In other words, the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 can be used to determine the simulated weights (eg, α 0 w 0 and α 1 w 1 ) of the antenna array set in the network device. The specific implementation process of the measurement information will be described below.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备在步骤S302发送的测量信息包括基于该第一数字端口发送的参考信号进行测量得到的第一信息;其中,该第一信息是N1个信道信息,即为N1个虚拟端口的信道信息。可以理解的是,由上文描述可知,终端设备接收参考信号之后,该终端设备可以通过该N1个虚拟端口发送的参考信号确定的N1个信道信息。 In a possible implementation, the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is N 1 channel information, that is, channel information of N 1 virtual ports. It can be understood from the above description that after the terminal device receives the reference signal, the terminal device can determine the N 1 channel information through the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports.

作为该N1个信道信息的一种实现示例,如前文所示示例,终端设备在该时间单元0上接收得到信号G0且终端设备在该时间单元1上接收得到信号G1的情况下,信号G0和信号G1满足:
As an implementation example of the N 1 channel information, as shown in the example above, when the terminal device receives the signal G 0 at the time unit 0 and the terminal device receives the signal G 1 at the time unit 1, the signal G 0 and the signal G 1 satisfy:

相应的,2(即N1=2)个虚拟端口分别对应的N1个信道信息可以表示为虚拟端口0(即天线阵子集合0)的信道信息H0w0,以及虚拟端口1(即天线阵子集合1)的信道信息H1w1。其中,在第一信息包括N1个信道信息的情况下,该第一信息可以包括N1个信道信息(即[H0w0 H1w1])的量化反馈值,或者,该第一信息可以包括基于N1个信道信息(即[H0w0 H1w1])得到的PMI。在这种可能的实现方式中,可选的,网络设备可以根据接收到的N1个虚拟端口分别对应的N1个信道信息,以及功率最大化准则、容量最大化准则等准则确定α,从而确定N1个虚拟端口的权值。Correspondingly, N1 channel information corresponding to 2 (i.e., N1 =2) virtual ports can be expressed as channel information H0w0 of virtual port 0 (i.e., antenna array set 0) and channel information H1w1 of virtual port 1 (i.e., antenna array set 1 ). Wherein, in the case where the first information includes N1 channel information, the first information can include quantized feedback values of N1 channel information (i.e., [ H0w0H1w1 ]), or the first information can include PMI obtained based on N1 channel information ( i.e. , [ H0w0H1w1 ]). In this possible implementation, optionally, the network device can determine α according to the received N1 channel information corresponding to the N1 virtual ports, and criteria such as power maximization criteria and capacity maximization criteria , so as to determine the weights of the N1 virtual ports.

在另一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备在步骤S302发送的测量信息包括基于该第一数字端口发送的参考信号进行测量得到的第一信息;其中,该第一信息是基于N1个信道信息确定的,该N1个信道信息分别是通过该N1个虚拟端口发送的参考信号确定的,该第一信息用于确定该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值。通过这种方式,使得终端设备对L1个时间单元承载的参考信号进行测量得到测量结果之后,该终端设备能够基于该测量结果确定第一数字端口中的虚拟端口的较优的(或最优的)权值,并通过第一信息指示该权值,后续网络设备能够基于该权值与该终端设备进行通信。In another possible implementation, the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 includes first information obtained by measuring the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, and the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port. In this way, after the terminal device measures the reference signal carried by L 1 time units to obtain the measurement result, the terminal device can determine the better (or optimal) weight of the virtual port in the first digital port based on the measurement result, and indicate the weight through the first information, and the subsequent network device can communicate with the terminal device based on the weight.

从而,在天线阵列规模较大的情况下,网络设备通过不同时间单元上基于正交的第二权值发送参考信号(一般地,基于不同权值发送的参考信号可以理解为基于不同波束发送的参考信号)的方式,终端设备可以基于不同时间单元的测量结果确定并指示较优的(或最优的)权值,使得网络设备能够基于该权值进行通信,进而减少波束扫描开销,实现快速的波束跟踪。Thus, when the antenna array is large, the network device sends reference signals based on orthogonal second weights at different time units (generally, reference signals sent based on different weights can be understood as reference signals sent based on different beams). The terminal device can determine and indicate a better (or optimal) weight based on the measurement results of different time units, so that the network device can communicate based on the weight, thereby reducing beam scanning overhead and achieving fast beam tracking.

可选地,终端设备对L1个时间单元承载的参考信号进行测量得到个测量结果之后,该终端设备能够基于该测量结果和数学方法确定第一数字端口中的虚拟端口的较优的(或最优的)权值,例如,该数学方法可以包括功率最大化准则、容量最大化准则确定等。例如,网络设备发送数据的时候,若参考前述参考信号进行数据传输,那么N1个虚拟端口的权值可以采用终端设备反馈的第一信息确定。Optionally, after the terminal device measures the reference signal carried by L 1 time units to obtain a measurement result, the terminal device can determine a better (or optimal) weight of the virtual port in the first digital port based on the measurement result and a mathematical method, for example, the mathematical method may include power maximization criteria, capacity maximization criteria determination, etc. For example, when the network device sends data, if the data is transmitted with reference to the aforementioned reference signal, the weights of the N 1 virtual ports can be determined using the first information fed back by the terminal device.

在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过第一权值向量得到的,该第一权值向量包括N1个元素;其中,该N1个虚拟端口分别对应N1个天线阵子集合,每个天线阵子集合包含一个或多个天线阵子,该N1个元素分别用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位。换言之,通过调整天线阵子的相位的方式,能够在不同虚拟端口实现参考信号的发送。In a possible implementation, the weights of the N1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained by a first weight vector, the first weight vector includes N1 elements; wherein the N1 virtual ports correspond to N1 antenna array sets respectively, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays, and the N1 elements are used to adjust the phases of the N1 antenna array sets respectively. In other words, by adjusting the phases of the antenna arrays, the reference signal can be sent at different virtual ports.

可以理解的是,第一权值向量包含N1个元素,前文描述的第二权值包含与N1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素,其中,第一权值向量的实现过程可以参考后文第二权值的实现过程。It can be understood that the first weight vector includes N 1 elements, and the second weight described above includes N 1 elements corresponding to N 1 virtual ports, wherein the implementation process of the first weight vector can refer to the implementation process of the second weight below.

在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过第一权值向量得到的,包括:该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过该第一权值向量和第二权值向量得到的,该第二权值向量包括N1个子向量;其中,该N1个子向量中的第T个子向量的维度与该N1个天线阵子集合中的第T个天线阵子集合的天线阵子数相同,T的取值为1至N1。通过这种方式,使得第一权值向量能够分别对应N1个天线阵子集合中的每个天线阵子集合的权值。In a possible implementation, the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through a first weight vector, including: the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through the first weight vector and a second weight vector, the second weight vector includes N 1 sub-vectors; wherein the dimension of the T-th sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays of the T-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set, and the value of T is 1 to N 1. In this way, the first weight vector can correspond to the weight of each antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set.

可以理解的是,第二权值向量包含N1个子向量,前文描述的第三权值包括N1个子向量,其中,第二权值向量的实现过程可以参考后文第三权值的实现过程。It can be understood that the second weight vector includes N 1 sub-vectors, and the third weight described above includes N 1 sub-vectors, wherein the implementation process of the second weight vector can refer to the implementation process of the third weight described below.

作为该N1个虚拟端口的一种实现示例,如前文所述,N1=2的情况下,网络设备中的N1个虚拟端口的虚拟权值(或称N1个虚拟端口的权值)可以表示为α0w0及α1w1。相应的,在该示例中,第一权值向量包含的N1个元素分别为α0和α1,第二权值向量包含的N1个子向量分别为w0和w1As an implementation example of the N 1 virtual ports, as mentioned above, when N 1 = 2, the virtual weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the network device (or the weights of the N 1 virtual ports) can be expressed as α 0 w 0 and α 1 w 1 . Accordingly, in this example, the N 1 elements included in the first weight vector are α 0 and α 1 , respectively, and the N 1 subvectors included in the second weight vector are w 0 and w 1 , respectively.

在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一信息满足以下方式A至方式D中的任一项。In a possible implementation manner, the first information satisfies any one of the following manners A to D.

方式A、终端设备在步骤S302发送的测量信息包含的第一信息中,包括该第一权值向量的量化处理结果。换言之,终端设备在确定第一权值向量之后,该终端设备直接量化该第一权值向量并反馈。例如,第一权值向量包含N1个元素,终端设备对N1个元素的相位进行量化,将N1个元素的量化结果进行反馈。Mode A: The first information included in the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 includes the quantization processing result of the first weight vector. In other words, after determining the first weight vector, the terminal device directly quantizes the first weight vector and feeds back the first weight vector. For example, the first weight vector includes N 1 elements, the terminal device quantizes the phases of the N 1 elements, and feeds back the quantization results of the N 1 elements.

作为方式A的一种实现示例,反馈相位的范围为0~2π,量化精度为0.1π的情况下,那么反馈的 相位有21种取值(即0、0.1π、0.2π...2π共21种取值)。相应的,N1个元素中,每个元素的反馈值可以占用A(A为正整数)个比特,反馈N1个元素的相位占用N1*A个比特。例如,A取值为(表示对log221向上取整),或者,A取值为21,或者A取值为其它基于21确定的值,此处不做限定。As an implementation example of method A, when the feedback phase range is 0 to 2π and the quantization accuracy is 0.1π, then the feedback There are 21 possible phase values (i.e., 0, 0.1π, 0.2π...2π, a total of 21 possible values). Correspondingly, among N 1 elements, the feedback value of each element can occupy A (A is a positive integer) bits, and the phase feedback of N 1 elements occupies N 1 *A bits. For example, the value of A is (indicates rounding up log 2 21), or A is 21, or A is other value determined based on 21, which is not limited here.

可选的,网络设备配置该第一权值向量中元素对应的相位的量化精度。例如,通过参考信号的配置信息进行配置,或者,通过其它信息/消息/信令进行配置。Optionally, the network device configures the quantization accuracy of the phase corresponding to the element in the first weight vector, for example, by configuring through configuration information of the reference signal, or by configuring through other information/message/signaling.

方式B、终端设备在步骤S302发送的测量信息包含的第一信息中,包括对该N1个虚拟端口中的其中一个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素中的一个元素,以及,除了该其中一个虚拟端口之外的其他N1-1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素中的N1-1个元素相对于该一个元素的差值对应的量化处理结果。Mode B: The first information included in the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 includes one element of the N 1 elements corresponding to one of the N 1 virtual ports, and a quantization processing result corresponding to the difference between N 1 -1 elements of the N 1 elements corresponding to other N 1 -1 virtual ports except the one of the virtual ports and the one element.

作为方式A的一种实现示例,反馈相位的范围为0~2π,第一个元素的量化精度为0.1π,那么反馈的相位有21种取值,那么第一个元素反馈需要A个比特;其余元素反馈与第一个元素的差值,元素的量化精度为0.2π,反馈其余元素,那么反馈的相位有11种取值每个元素需要B个比特,换言之,N1个元素一共反馈A+(N1-1)B个比特。例如,A取值为且B取值为或者,A取值为21且B取值为11,或者,A取值为其它基于21确定的值且B取值为其它基于11确定的值,此处不做限定。As an implementation example of method A, the feedback phase ranges from 0 to 2π, and the quantization accuracy of the first element is 0.1π. Then the feedback phase has 21 values, and the first element feedback requires A bits; the remaining elements feedback the difference with the first element, and the quantization accuracy of the element is 0.2π. Feedback of the remaining elements, then the feedback phase has 11 values, and each element requires B bits. In other words, N 1 elements feedback a total of A+(N 1 -1)B bits. For example, A takes a value of And B is Alternatively, A takes the value of 21 and B takes the value of 11, or A takes the value of other values determined based on 21 and B takes the value of other values determined based on 11, which is not limited here.

方式C、终端设备在步骤S302发送的测量信息包含的第一信息中,包括第一索引和第二索引,该第一索引和该第二索引用于在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中确定该第一数字端口的第一权值向量。其中,该第一索引为第一维度上的码本索引,该第二索引为第二维度上的码本索引,在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中,每个权值向量是通过第一维度上的权值与第二维度上的权值确定的。Mode C: The first information included in the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 includes a first index and a second index, and the first index and the second index are used to determine the first weight vector of the first digital port in one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set. The first index is a codebook index on the first dimension, the second index is a codebook index on the second dimension, and in the one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set, each weight vector is determined by the weight on the first dimension and the weight on the second dimension.

方式D、终端设备在步骤S302发送的测量信息包含的第一信息中,包括第三索引,该第三索引用于在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中确定该第一数字端口的第一权值向量。Mode D: The first information included in the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 includes a third index, and the third index is used to determine the first weight vector of the first digital port in one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set.

需要说明的是,可以通过多种方式确定方式C和方式D涉及码本集合,下面将结合一些实现示例进行描述。It should be noted that the codebook sets involved in mode C and mode D may be determined in a variety of ways, which will be described below in conjunction with some implementation examples.

码本集合的确定方式一,基于数字端口包含的虚拟端口的端口信息确定码本集合。A first method for determining the codebook set is to determine the codebook set based on the port information of the virtual port included in the digital port.

具体地,任一数字端口中的虚拟端口的端口信息包括以下信息A至信息F中的至少一项:Specifically, the port information of the virtual port in any digital port includes at least one of the following information A to information F:

信息A.端口信息组合的索引。例如,每种组合对应的索引值,每一个索引值代表一种虚拟端口拆分方式、过采因子、虚拟端口数的组合。网络设备可以通过指示该索引值,终端设备即可确定虚拟端口拆分方式、过采因子及虚拟端口数等。如下表3所示的“索引”对应的值。所述虚拟端口拆分方式可以理解为第一维度上的虚拟端口数和第二维度上的虚拟端口数。所述过采因子可以理解为第一维度上的过采因子和第二维度上的过采因子。Information A. Index of the port information combination. For example, the index value corresponding to each combination, each index value represents a combination of a virtual port splitting method, an oversampling factor, and a virtual port number. The network device can indicate the index value, and the terminal device can determine the virtual port splitting method, the oversampling factor, and the number of virtual ports. The values corresponding to the "index" are shown in Table 3 below. The virtual port splitting method can be understood as the number of virtual ports on the first dimension and the number of virtual ports on the second dimension. The oversampling factor can be understood as the oversampling factor on the first dimension and the oversampling factor on the second dimension.

信息B.数字端口包括的虚拟端口数为N1。例如,每个数字端口的虚拟端口数N,即用于指示网络设备将阵面一共拆分为N个子阵(以前文第一数字端口包含N1个虚拟端口为例,将第一数字端口的阵面进行拆分得到N1个子阵,其中,该N1个子阵即为N1个虚拟端口对应的N1个天线阵子集合,即N1个子阵中每一个子阵包含一个或多个天线阵子)。一般情况下,N=M1*M2Information B. The number of virtual ports included in the digital port is N 1. For example, the number of virtual ports N of each digital port is used to instruct the network device to split the array plane into N sub-arrays in total (taking the example that the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports in the previous text, the array plane of the first digital port is split into N 1 sub-arrays, wherein the N 1 sub-arrays are the N 1 antenna array element sets corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, that is, each of the N 1 sub-arrays includes one or more antenna array elements). In general, N = M 1 *M 2 .

信息C.在数字端口的第一维度上的虚拟端口数为M1。例如,每个数字端口的水平虚拟端口数M1,即用于指示网络设备将阵面水平拆分为M1个子阵。也可以理解成每个数字端口第一维度包括M1个虚拟端口数。Information C. The number of virtual ports in the first dimension of the digital port is M 1. For example, the horizontal number of virtual ports of each digital port is M 1 , which is used to instruct the network device to split the array horizontally into M 1 sub-arrays. It can also be understood that the first dimension of each digital port includes M 1 virtual ports.

信息D.在数字端口的第二维度上的虚拟端口数为M2。例如,每个数字端口的垂直虚拟端口数M2,即用于指示网络设备将阵面垂直拆分为M2个子阵。也可以理解成每个数字端口第二维度包括M2个虚拟端口数。Information D. The number of virtual ports in the second dimension of the digital port is M 2. For example, the vertical number of virtual ports of each digital port is M 2 , which is used to instruct the network device to vertically split the array into M 2 sub-arrays. It can also be understood that the second dimension of each digital port includes M 2 virtual ports.

信息E.在数字端口的第一维度上的过采样因子为O1。例如,每个数字端口水平维度的过采样因子O1,也可以理解为每个数字端口第一维的过采样因子。Information E. The oversampling factor in the first dimension of the digital port is O 1. For example, the oversampling factor O 1 in the horizontal dimension of each digital port can also be understood as the oversampling factor in the first dimension of each digital port.

信息F.在数字端口的第二维度上的过采样因子为O2。例如,每个数字端口垂直维度的过采样因子O2,也可以理解为每个数字端口第二维的过采样因子。Information F. The oversampling factor in the second dimension of the digital port is O 2. For example, the oversampling factor O 2 in the vertical dimension of each digital port can also be understood as the oversampling factor in the second dimension of each digital port.

可选的,上述信息C可由信息B及信息D确定,即M2=N1/M1,N1可以整除M1;又或者,上述信息D可由信息B及信息C确定,即M1=N1/M2,N1可以整除M2Optionally, the information C may be determined by the information B and the information D, that is, M 2 =N 1 /M 1 , N 1 can divide M 1 ; or alternatively, the information D may be determined by the information B and the information C, that is, M 1 =N 1 /M 2 , N 1 can divide M 2 .

示例性的,上述不同组合可以通过下述表3中的不同行的参数表示。 Exemplarily, the above different combinations can be represented by parameters in different rows in Table 3 below.

表3
Table 3

可选地,对于(M1,M2)=(N,1)和(1,N)这种第一维度和第二维度上的虚拟端口数,终端设备无需感知,可使用相同的索引值。例如,上述表3中,索引=0所指示的(M1,M2)=(2,1)或(1,2)对应的码本集合都是相同的,所以无需区分。Optionally, for the number of virtual ports on the first dimension and the second dimension such as (M 1 ,M 2 )=(N,1) and (1,N), the terminal device does not need to perceive and can use the same index value. For example, in the above Table 3, the codebook sets corresponding to (M 1 ,M 2 )=(2,1) or (1,2) indicated by index=0 are the same, so there is no need to distinguish them.

从而,根据上述任一数字端口中的虚拟端口的端口信息,终端设备和网络设备间可以确定一个模拟码本集合。具体地,根据第一维度上的虚拟端口数为M1以及第一维度上的过采样因子为O1,可以确定在第一维度上M1O1个码本,vl表示第l个码本(为长度为M1的向量),l的取值范围为所有第一维度的码本(即所有vl)记为Y1;根据第二维度上的虚拟端口数为M2以及第二维度上的过采样因子为O2,可以确定在第二维度上M2O2个码本,um表示第m个码本(为长度为M2的向量),m的取值范围为所有第二维度的码本(即所有um)记为Y2,最终确定码本集合为Y。
Thus, according to the port information of the virtual port in any of the above digital ports, a set of analog codebooks can be determined between the terminal device and the network device. Specifically, according to the number of virtual ports on the first dimension being M 1 and the oversampling factor on the first dimension being O 1 , M 1 O 1 codebooks can be determined on the first dimension, v l represents the lth codebook (a vector with a length of M 1 ), and the value range of l is All codebooks of the first dimension (i.e., all v l ) are recorded as Y 1 ; according to the number of virtual ports on the second dimension being M 2 and the oversampling factor on the second dimension being O 2 , it can be determined that there are M 2 O 2 codebooks on the second dimension, um represents the mth codebook (a vector of length M 2 ), and the value range of m is All codebooks of the second dimension (ie, all um ) are recorded as Y 2 , and the codebook set is finally determined to be Y.

作为一种实现示例,在步骤S302之前,网络设备可以向终端设备发送第二信息,该第二信息可以用于确定第一数字端口包含的虚拟端口的端口信息,进而基于该端口信息确定方式C或方式D中使用的码本集合。As an implementation example, before step S302, the network device may send second information to the terminal device, and the second information may be used to determine the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port, and then determine the codebook set used in mode C or mode D based on the port information.

例如,该第二信息可以包括第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息(例如上述信息A至信息F中的至少一项)。以表3为例,第二信息可以包括表3中其中一行的一种或多种参数。For example, the second information may include port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port (eg, at least one item of the above information A to information F). Taking Table 3 as an example, the second information may include one or more parameters of one row in Table 3.

又如,该第二信息可以包括第四索引,该第四索引用于在预配置或预定义的一种或多种虚拟端口的端口信息中确定第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息,其中,每种虚拟端口的端口信息可以包括上述信息A至信息F中的至少一项。以图3为例,第二信息包含的该第四索引可以为表3中的其中一个索引,使得网络设备基于该索引在表3中确定其中一行参数。可选的,网络设备向终端设备发送第四索引之前,网络设备发送一种或多种虚拟端口的端口信息及对应的索引,如表3所示。For another example, the second information may include a fourth index, and the fourth index is used to determine the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port in the port information of one or more preconfigured or predefined virtual ports, wherein the port information of each virtual port may include at least one item of the above information A to information F. Taking FIG. 3 as an example, the fourth index included in the second information may be one of the indexes in Table 3, so that the network device determines one row of parameters in Table 3 based on the index. Optionally, before the network device sends the fourth index to the terminal device, the network device sends the port information of one or more virtual ports and the corresponding indexes, as shown in Table 3.

又如,该第二信息可以包括信息A至信息F中的部分项,并且,该信息A至信息F中的其他项通过该部分项以及预配置或预定义的一种或多种虚拟端口的端口信息确定。以图3为例,第二信息可以指示“(M1,M2)=(4,1)”,相应的,网络设备基于该第二信息可以确定该指示对应于表格中索引“1”所在行,并进一步确定“N=4”且“(O1,O2)=(4,1)”。For another example, the second information may include some items in information A to information F, and other items in information A to information F are determined by the partial items and port information of one or more preconfigured or predefined virtual ports. Taking FIG3 as an example, the second information may indicate "(M 1 ,M 2 )=(4,1)", and accordingly, the network device may determine, based on the second information, that the indication corresponds to the row where index "1" is located in the table, and further determine that "N=4" and "(O 1 ,O 2 )=(4,1)".

又如,该第二信息可以包括信息A至信息F中的部分项,并且,该信息A至信息F中的其他项通过该部分项确定。例如,第二信息包括信息B及信息D,信息C可由信息B及信息D确定,即M2=N1/M1,N1可以整除M1;又或者,第二信息包括信息B及信息C,上述信息D可由信息B及信息C确定,即M1=N1/M2,N1可以整除M2;又或者,第二信息包括信息C及信息D,上述信息B可由信息C及信息D确定,即N1=M1*M2For another example, the second information may include some items in information A to information F, and other items in information A to information F are determined by the some items. For example, the second information includes information B and information D, and information C can be determined by information B and information D, that is, M 2 =N 1 /M 1 , N 1 can divide M 1 ; or, the second information includes information B and information C, and the above information D can be determined by information B and information C, that is, M 1 =N 1 /M 2 , N 1 can divide M 2 ; or, the second information includes information C and information D, and the above information B can be determined by information C and information D, that is, N 1 =M 1 *M 2 .

可选地,第一数字端口为M个数字端口中的其中一个数字端口。在M大于1的情况下,不同数字端口可以按以下任意一种或多种方式配置或协议规定对应的虚拟端口的端口信息:Optionally, the first digital port is one of the M digital ports. When M is greater than 1, different digital ports may be configured or the port information of the corresponding virtual port may be specified by the protocol in any one or more of the following ways:

①为每个数字端口独立配置或规定对应的虚拟端口的端口信息。① Independently configure or specify the port information of the corresponding virtual port for each digital port.

②多个数字端口对应一种虚拟端口的端口信息。特殊的,每个数字端口都采用相同的虚拟端口拆分方式(相同的第一维度上的虚拟端口数、相同的第二维度上的虚拟端口数)、相同的过采因子(相同的第一维度上的过采样因子、相同的第二维度上的过采样因子)、相同的虚拟端口数。② Multiple digital ports correspond to the port information of a virtual port. In particular, each digital port uses the same virtual port splitting method (same number of virtual ports on the first dimension, same number of virtual ports on the second dimension), the same oversampling factor (same oversampling factor on the first dimension, same oversampling factor on the second dimension), and the same number of virtual ports.

作为方式①的一种示例,网络设备为终端设备配置或动态地指示每个数字端口的虚拟端口的端口信息(即上述信息A至信息F中至少一项)。例如,网络设备配置一个或多个数字端口的测量资源,每个数字端口包含一个或多个虚拟端口。网络设备为终端设备配置或动态地指示每个数字端口的虚拟端口的端口信息。该测量资源可以为SSB、CSI-RS等,此处不做限定。As an example of method ①, the network device configures or dynamically indicates the port information of the virtual port of each digital port for the terminal device (i.e., at least one of the above information A to information F). For example, the network device configures the measurement resources of one or more digital ports, and each digital port includes one or more virtual ports. The network device configures or dynamically indicates the port information of the virtual port of each digital port for the terminal device. The measurement resource can be SSB, CSI-RS, etc., which is not limited here.

作为方式①的另一种示例,网络设备为终端设备配置或动态地指示每个数字端口的信息A至信息F中的部分项,并且,该信息A至信息F中的其他项通过该部分项和/或预配置或预定义的一种或多种虚拟端口的端口信息确定。As another example of method ①, the network device configures or dynamically indicates some items of information A to information F for each digital port for the terminal device, and other items of information A to information F are determined by the partial items and/or the port information of one or more preconfigured or predefined virtual ports.

作为方式①的另一种示例,网络设备通过信令直接给终端配置或指示每个数字端口对应的第四索引。该信令可以为RRC信令,MAC CE信令,DCI信令等一种或多种,还可以为别的信令,此处不做限定。As another example of method ①, the network device directly configures or indicates the fourth index corresponding to each digital port to the terminal through signaling. The signaling can be one or more of RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling, DCI signaling, etc., and can also be other signaling, which is not limited here.

作为方式②的一种示例,网络设备配置或协议规定一个或多个数字端口组,每个数字端口组包含一个或多个数字端口,一个数字端口组对应相同的虚拟端口的端口信息。网络设备为每个数字端口组配置一种虚拟端口的端口信息,数字端口组内的每个数字端口具有相同的虚拟端口的端口信息。As an example of method ②, the network device configuration or protocol specifies one or more digital port groups, each digital port group contains one or more digital ports, and one digital port group corresponds to the same port information of the virtual port. The network device configures a type of virtual port port information for each digital port group, and each digital port in the digital port group has the same virtual port port information.

作为方式②的另一种示例,网络配置或协议规定一种或多种虚拟端口的端口信息,协议规定每k个数字端口采用一种虚拟端口的端口信息。例如网络配置或协议规定了两种虚拟端口的端口信息,一共8个数字端口,那么协议规定0~3采用第一种虚拟端口的端口信息,4~7采用第二种虚拟端口的端口信息。当然也可以0,2,4,6采用第一种,1,3,5,7采用第二种。类似于这种默认规则。As another example of method ②, the network configuration or protocol specifies the port information of one or more virtual ports, and the protocol specifies that each k digital ports use the port information of one virtual port. For example, if the network configuration or protocol specifies the port information of two virtual ports, and there are 8 digital ports in total, then the protocol specifies that 0 to 3 use the port information of the first virtual port, and 4 to 7 use the port information of the second virtual port. Of course, 0, 2, 4, and 6 can also use the first type, and 1, 3, 5, and 7 can use the second type. This is similar to the default rule.

举例,网络设备通过上述的方式配置或指示M1,M2,O1,O2分别为2,2,2,1,那么一共有4(M1*M2=N1=4)个虚拟端口,对应的模拟码本集合中的码本个数为8=M1*M2*O1*O2=2*2*2*1。For example, the network device configures or indicates that M1 , M2 , O1 , O2 are 2, 2, 2, 1 respectively in the above manner, then there are 4 ( M1 * M2 = N1 =4) virtual ports in total, and the number of codebooks in the corresponding simulation codebook set is 8= M1 * M2 * O1 * O2 =2*2*2*1.

其中,针对水平方向(例如第一维度)的码本有4个,满足:
There are 4 codebooks for the horizontal direction (e.g., the first dimension), satisfying:

换言之,4个水平的码本分别表示为:
v0=[1 1]T
v1=[1 j]T
v2=[1 -1]T
v3=[1 -j]T
In other words, the four levels of codebooks are represented as:
v 0 = [1 1] T ;
v 1 = [1 j] T ;
v 2 = [1 -1] T ;
v 3 = [1 - j] T ;

定义Y1包含这四个水平方向上的码本,可以表示为:
Define Y1 to include the codebooks in these four horizontal directions, which can be expressed as:

针对垂直方向(例如第二维度)的码本有2个,满足:
There are 2 codebooks for the vertical direction (e.g., the second dimension), satisfying:

换言之,2个垂直方向上的码本分别表示为:
u0=[1 1]T
u1=[1 -1]T
In other words, the codebooks in the two vertical directions are expressed as:
u 0 = [1 1] T ;
u 1 = [1 -1] T ;

定义Y2包含这两个垂直方向上的码本,可以表示为:
Define Y 2 to include the codebooks in these two vertical directions, which can be expressed as:

即码本集合可以表示为:
That is, the codebook set can be expressed as:

其中,矩阵的4行代表四个虚拟端口,列代表8个码本(即8个权值向量)。The four rows of the matrix represent four virtual ports, and the columns represent eight codebooks (ie, eight weight vectors).

作为一种示例,若终端设备按方式C经过测量进行反馈,假设终端设备基于功率最大化准则或容量最大准则确定并通过第一信息反馈第一索引和第二索引分别为2,1,相应的,网络设备可以基于该第一信息携带的索引值“2,1”在上述8个码本确定第6个权值向量为第一数字端口的第一权值向量。换言之,索引值“2,1”对应的水平和垂直权值向量分别为:
v2=[1 -1]T
u1=[1 -1]T
As an example, if the terminal device performs feedback through measurement in mode C, assuming that the terminal device determines based on the power maximization criterion or the capacity maximum criterion and feeds back the first index and the second index through the first information as 2 and 1 respectively, accordingly, the network device can determine the sixth weight vector as the first weight vector of the first digital port in the above 8 codebooks based on the index value "2, 1" carried by the first information. In other words, the horizontal and vertical weight vectors corresponding to the index value "2, 1" are:
v 2 = [1 -1] T .
u 1 = [1 -1] T .

则网络设备确定最终的一个码本为第一权值向量:
Then the network device determines the final codebook as the first weight vector:

在上述示例中,在4(即M1*M2=N1=4)个虚拟端口对应的第一权值向量包含的4个元素a0、a1、a2、a3满足:
a0=1、a1=-1、a2=-1、a3=1;
In the above example, the four elements a 0 , a 1 , a 2 , and a 3 included in the first weight vector corresponding to four (ie, M 1 *M 2 =N 1 =4) virtual ports satisfy:
a 0 =1, a 1 =-1, a 2 =-1, a 3 =1;

此外,该4(即M1*M2=N1=4)个虚拟端口对应的第二权值向量包含的4个字向量分别表示为w0、w1、w2、w3的情况下,这4个虚拟端口在进行数传的时候的模拟权值W分别可以表示为:
In addition, when the four word vectors included in the second weight vector corresponding to the four (ie, M 1 *M 2 =N 1 =4) virtual ports are respectively represented as w 0 , w 1 , w 2 , and w 3 , the analog weights W of the four virtual ports during data transmission can be respectively represented as:

作为另一种示例,若终端设备按方式D经过测量进行反馈,反馈第三索引,第三索引对应8个码本中的一个,假设终端设备基于功率最大化准则或容量最大准则确定并通过第一信息反馈第三索引为3(上述8个码本确定第4个权值向量为第一数字端口的第一权值向量),网络设备确定最终的一个码本为第一权值向量:
Y=[1 -1 j -j]T
As another example, if the terminal device performs feedback after measurement in mode D, the third index is fed back, and the third index corresponds to one of the 8 codebooks. Assuming that the terminal device determines based on the power maximization criterion or the capacity maximum criterion and feeds back the third index as 3 through the first information (the above 8 codebooks determine that the fourth weight vector is the first weight vector of the first digital port), the network device determines the final codebook as the first weight vector:
Y=[1 -1 j -j] T .

在上述示例中,在4(即M1*M2=N1=4)个虚拟端口对应的第一权值向量包含的4个元素a0、a1、a2、a3满足:
a0=1、a1=-1、a2=j、a3=-j;
In the above example, the four elements a 0 , a 1 , a 2 , and a 3 included in the first weight vector corresponding to four (ie, M 1 *M 2 =N 1 =4) virtual ports satisfy:
a 0 =1, a 1 =-1, a 2 =j, a 3 =-j;

此外,该4(即M1*M2=N1=4)个虚拟端口对应的第二权值向量包含的4个字向量分别表示为w0、w1、w2、w3的情况下,这4个虚拟端口在进行数传的时候的模拟权值W分别可以表示为:
In addition, when the four word vectors included in the second weight vector corresponding to the four (ie, M 1 *M 2 =N 1 =4) virtual ports are respectively represented as w 0 , w 1 , w 2 , and w 3 , the analog weights W of the four virtual ports during data transmission can be respectively represented as:

码本集合的确定方式二,基于网络设备的指示,在一个或多个码本集合中确定方式C或方式D中使用的码本集合。A second method for determining a codebook set is to determine a codebook set used in method C or method D from one or more codebook sets based on an instruction from a network device.

作为一种实现示例,在步骤S302之前,网络设备可以向终端设备发送第二信息,该第二信息可以用于在一个或多个码本集合中确定方式C或方式D中使用的码本集合。As an implementation example, before step S302, the network device may send second information to the terminal device, where the second information may be used to determine a codebook set used in mode C or mode D from one or more codebook sets.

例如,该第二信息可以包括第五索引,该第五索引用于在预配置或预定义的一个或多个码本集合中确定该码本集合。For example, the second information may include a fifth index, where the fifth index is used to determine the codebook set in one or more preconfigured or predefined codebook sets.

又如,由上文示例可知,码本集合的确定过程中,关联于信息A至信息F中的一项或多项,相应的,可以预配置或预定义“信息A至信息F中的一项或多项”与“一个或多个码本集合”之间的映射关系。 相应的,网络设备发送的第三信息可以指示(例如表3中的)信息A至信息F中的一项或多项,后续终端设备可以基于信息A至信息F中的一项或多项以及该“映射关系”,在该一个或多个码本集合中确定其中一个码本集合为方式C或方式D中使用的码本集合。For another example, as can be seen from the above example, in the process of determining the codebook set, it is associated with one or more items of information A to information F. Accordingly, the mapping relationship between "one or more items of information A to information F" and "one or more codebook sets" can be preconfigured or predefined. Correspondingly, the third information sent by the network device may indicate one or more items of information A to information F (for example, in Table 3), and the subsequent terminal device may determine, based on one or more items of information A to information F and the "mapping relationship", that one of the codebook sets in the one or more codebook sets is the codebook set used in method C or method D.

可选地,终端设备可以通过预配置或预定义的方式,确定该一个或多个码本集合。Optionally, the terminal device may determine the one or more codebook sets in a preconfigured or predefined manner.

可选地,终端设备可以接收来自网络设备的信令,并通过该信令确定该一个或多个码本集合。例如,该信令可以包括RRC信令,MAC CE信令,DCI信令等一种或多种。Optionally, the terminal device may receive signaling from the network device and determine the one or more codebook sets through the signaling. For example, the signaling may include one or more of RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling, DCI signaling, etc.

需要说明的是,网络设备可以通过多种方式,在该一个或多个码本集合中指示方式C或方式D中使用的码本集合。It should be noted that the network device may indicate the codebook set used in mode C or mode D in the one or more codebook sets in a variety of ways.

由前文实现过程可知,第一数字端口为M个数字端口中的其中一个数字端口。在M大于1的情况下,终端设备在步骤S302发送的测量信息可以用于确定各个数字端口包含的虚拟端口的权值(即用于数传的权值),下面将结合更多的实现示例进行描述。As can be seen from the above implementation process, the first digital port is one of the M digital ports. When M is greater than 1, the measurement information sent by the terminal device in step S302 can be used to determine the weight of the virtual port included in each digital port (i.e., the weight for data transmission), which will be described below in conjunction with more implementation examples.

在一种可能的实现方式中,该测量信息包括下述示例A至示例C中的任一项:In a possible implementation manner, the measurement information includes any one of the following examples A to C:

示例A、M个信息。Example A, M pieces of information.

示例B、K个信息。Example B, K pieces of information.

示例C、M个信息和K个信息。Example C, M information and K information.

其中,该M个信息分别用于确定该M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量(例如M个信息中的第i(i取值为1至M)个信息用于确定该M个数字端口中第i数字端口的第一权值向量,又如,该M个信息与该M个数字端口一一对应);该M个信息中的其中一个信息为该第一信息;该K个信息分别用于确定K组数字端口中的每个数字端口组的第一权值向量(例如K个信息中的第i(i取值为1至K)个信息用于确定该K个数字端口组中第i数字端口组所包含的数字端口的第一权值向量,又如,该K个信息与该K个数字端口组一一对应),其中,K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包括该M个数字端口中的一个或多个数字端口,K为小于或等于M的正整数;该K个信息中的其中一个信息为该第一信息。Among them, the M information is used to determine the first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports (for example, the i-th (i is 1 to M) information in the M information is used to determine the first weight vector of the i-th digital port in the M digital ports, and for example, the M information corresponds one-to-one to the M digital ports); one of the M information is the first information; the K information is used to determine the first weight vector of each digital port group in the K groups of digital ports (for example, the i-th (i is 1 to K) information in the K information is used to determine the first weight vector of the digital ports included in the i-th digital port group in the K digital port groups, and for example, the K information corresponds one-to-one to the K digital port groups), wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports in the M digital ports, and K is a positive integer less than or equal to M; one of the K information is the first information.

具体地,终端设备发送的测量信息可以包括M个信息和/或K个信息,通过这种方式,使得网络设备能够通过该M个信息和/或该K个信息确定M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量。Specifically, the measurement information sent by the terminal device may include M information and/or K information. In this way, the network device can determine the first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports through the M information and/or the K information.

作为一种实现示例,在示例B和示例C中,在该K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包含的一个或多个数字端口中,不同数字端口的虚拟端口的端口信息是相同的。具体地,在测量信息包括K个信息的情况下,K个信息分别用于确定K组数字端口中的每个数字端口组包含的数字端口的第一权值向量,其中,K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包括该M个数字端口中的一个或多个数字端口。并且,在该K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包含的一个或多个数字端口中,不同数字端口的虚拟端口的端口信息是相同的。通过这种方式,可以简化测量信息的反馈过程,能够降低实现复杂度。As an implementation example, in Example B and Example C, among one or more digital ports included in each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports, the port information of virtual ports of different digital ports is the same. Specifically, in the case where the measurement information includes K pieces of information, the K pieces of information are respectively used to determine the first weight vector of the digital ports included in each digital port group in the K groups of digital ports, wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports among the M digital ports. Furthermore, among one or more digital ports included in each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports, the port information of virtual ports of different digital ports is the same. In this way, the feedback process of the measurement information can be simplified, and the implementation complexity can be reduced.

在示例A中,测量信息包括M个信息的情况下,不同数字端口独立反馈第一权值向量。In example A, when the measurement information includes M pieces of information, different digital ports independently feed back the first weight vector.

网络设备配置终端设备每个数字端口独立反馈第一权值向量。可选的,网络设备配置终端反馈不同数字端口的第一权值向量的顺序。也可以约定按某种顺序,例如按数字端口索引由小到大,或者由大到小;也可以按照先水平数字端口再垂直数字端口或者先垂直再水平等。The network device configures each digital port of the terminal device to independently feedback the first weight vector. Optionally, the network device configures the terminal to feedback the first weight vectors of different digital ports in an order. It can also be agreed to follow a certain order, such as from small to large, or from large to small according to the digital port index; it can also be in the order of horizontal digital ports first and then vertical digital ports, or vertical first and then horizontal, etc.

作为一种实现示例,在示例B中,测量信息包括K个信息的情况下,多个数字端口反馈一个相同的第一权值向量。As an implementation example, in Example B, when the measurement information includes K pieces of information, multiple digital ports feed back a same first weight vector.

例如,网络设备配置数字端口的分组数量(即配置K的取值)。换言之,网络设备配置一个或多个数字端口组,每个数字端口组内包括一个或多个数字端口,网络设备配置每个数字端口组反馈一个相同的第一权值向量。For example, the network device configures the number of groups of digital ports (ie, configures the value of K). In other words, the network device configures one or more digital port groups, each of which includes one or more digital ports, and the network device configures each digital port group to feedback a same first weight vector.

又如,网络设备配置需要反馈的第一权值向量的个数(即配置K个数字端口组中每个数字端口组包含的数字端口的数量)。换言之,终端设备可以每c(c为正整数,例如c=M/K)个数字端口反馈一个相同的第一权值向量。For another example, the network device configures the number of first weight vectors that need to be fed back (i.e., the number of digital ports included in each digital port group in the K digital port groups). In other words, the terminal device can feed back an identical first weight vector for every c (c is a positive integer, e.g., c=M/K) digital ports.

示例性的,对于网络设备包含的8个数字端口(即数字端口0~7),网络设备配置数字端口的分组数量为2(即配置K的取值为2),或者,网络设备配置需要反馈的第一权值向量个数为2(即K个数字端口组中每个数字端口组包含的数字端口的数量4),那么可以数字端口0~3反馈一个第一权值向量,数字端口4~7反馈一个第一权值向量。通常,若两个数字端口对应一个阵面的不同极化,反馈相同的第一权 值向量,但是终端设备不感知极化方式,只感知数字端口。For example, for the 8 digital ports (i.e., digital ports 0 to 7) included in the network device, the number of groups configured by the network device for the digital ports is 2 (i.e., the value of K is configured to be 2), or the number of first weight vectors that the network device needs to feedback is configured to be 2 (i.e., the number of digital ports included in each digital port group in the K digital port groups is 4), then digital ports 0 to 3 can feedback a first weight vector, and digital ports 4 to 7 can feedback a first weight vector. Generally, if two digital ports correspond to different polarizations of a front, the same first weight vector is fed back. The terminal device does not perceive the polarization mode, but only the digital port.

相应的,终端设备根据将配置相同的虚拟端口拆分方式的数字端口反馈一个相同的第一权值向量。Correspondingly, the terminal device feeds back an identical first weight vector according to the digital ports configured with the identical virtual port splitting mode.

作为一种实现示例,在示例C中,终端设备即单独反馈每一个数字端口的第一权值向量,又反馈多个数字端口对应的一个相同的第一权值向量。As an implementation example, in Example C, the terminal device feeds back the first weight vector of each digital port individually, and also feeds back the same first weight vector corresponding to multiple digital ports.

可选地,该测量信息满足以下任一项:Optionally, the measurement information satisfies any of the following:

该参考信号的rank数满足第一条件时,该测量信息包括该M个信息;When the rank number of the reference signal satisfies the first condition, the measurement information includes the M pieces of information;

该参考信号的rank数满足第二条件时,该测量信息包括该K个信息;When the rank number of the reference signal satisfies the second condition, the measurement information includes the K pieces of information;

该参考信号的信道质量信息CQI满足第三条件时,该测量信息包括该M个信息;When the channel quality information CQI of the reference signal satisfies the third condition, the measurement information includes the M pieces of information;

该参考信号的CQI满足第四条件时,该测量信息包括该K个信息。When the CQI of the reference signal satisfies the fourth condition, the measurement information includes the K pieces of information.

作为一种实现示例,网络设备配置不同Rank数下,终端设备中的不同数字端口反馈相同或不同的第一权值向量。由于rank数与信道的秩相关,当Rank数较大时,表示信道的多径比较丰富,那么可以打不同方向的波束覆盖,所以可以不同数字端口反馈不同的第一权值向量。反之,当Rank数较小时,表示信道径少,那么可以不同数字端口反馈相同的第一权值向量。例如,终端设备可以针对不同数字端口反馈一个第一权值向量,可以节省开销。As an implementation example, when the network device is configured with different Rank numbers, different digital ports in the terminal device feed back the same or different first weight vectors. Since the rank number is related to the rank of the channel, when the Rank number is large, it means that the multipath of the channel is relatively rich, so beam coverage in different directions can be achieved, so different first weight vectors can be fed back to different digital ports. Conversely, when the Rank number is small, it means that the channel path is small, so the same first weight vector can be fed back to different digital ports. For example, the terminal device can feed back a first weight vector for different digital ports, which can save overhead.

作为一种实现示例,网络设备配置或协议规定,当终端反馈信道信息的rank数为1时,终端反馈所有数字端口反馈一个相同的第一权值向量,即终端不同数字端口仅需反馈一个第一权值向量。As an implementation example, the network device configuration or protocol stipulates that when the rank number of the terminal feedback channel information is 1, the terminal feeds back the same first weight vector for all digital ports, that is, different digital ports of the terminal only need to feed back one first weight vector.

作为一种实现示例,网络设备配置或协议规定,配置rank数为N时,终端反馈N个第一权值向量。可选的,终端设备反馈N个第一权值向量中每个第一权值向量对应的数字端口索引。As an implementation example, the network device configuration or protocol stipulates that when the configured rank number is N, the terminal feeds back N first weight vectors. Optionally, the terminal device feeds back the digital port index corresponding to each first weight vector in the N first weight vectors.

作为一种实现示例,网络设备配置或协议规定rank门限,当rank大于该门限,终端设备按每数字端口独立反馈第一权值向量;当rank小于该门限,终端设备不同数字端口反馈一个相同的第一权值向量,即终端不同数字端口仅需反馈一个第一权值向量。As an implementation example, the network device configuration or protocol stipulates a rank threshold. When the rank is greater than the threshold, the terminal device independently feeds back the first weight vector for each digital port; when the rank is less than the threshold, different digital ports of the terminal device feed back the same first weight vector, that is, different digital ports of the terminal only need to feed back one first weight vector.

作为一种实现示例,网络设备配置或协议规定CQI门限,当反馈信道信息的CQI大于该门限,按每端口反馈第一权值向量,当反馈信道信息的CQI小于该门限,终端设备不同数字端口反馈一个相同的第一权值向量。CQI主要反映信道质量的好坏,当CQI比较大时,表示信道质量好,每个数字端口可以独立测量确定第一权值向量;当CQI比较小时,表示信道质量不好,需要多个数字端口联合估计第一权值向量,所以多个数字端口反馈一个第一权值向量。As an implementation example, the network device configuration or protocol specifies a CQI threshold. When the CQI of the feedback channel information is greater than the threshold, the first weight vector is fed back per port. When the CQI of the feedback channel information is less than the threshold, different digital ports of the terminal device feed back the same first weight vector. CQI mainly reflects the quality of the channel. When the CQI is relatively large, it means that the channel quality is good, and each digital port can independently measure and determine the first weight vector; when the CQI is relatively small, it means that the channel quality is not good, and multiple digital ports need to jointly estimate the first weight vector, so multiple digital ports feed back a first weight vector.

在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收指示该测量信息包括该M个信息和/或该K个信息的指示信息。通过这种方式,能够使得终端设备和网络设备明确测量信息所承载的信息内容。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: the terminal device receives indication information indicating that the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information. In this way, the terminal device and the network device can clearly understand the information content carried by the measurement information.

可选地,该指示信息承载于参考信号的配置信息,或者是其他的消息/信息/信令等,此处不做限定。Optionally, the indication information is carried in configuration information of a reference signal, or is other message/information/signaling, etc., which is not limited here.

在一种可能的实现方式中,该测量信息为第一载波对应的测量信息,该测量信息用于确定该第一载波对应的M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量,该第一载波包括一个或多个载波(可选地,在第一载波包括多个载波的情况下,也可以理解为,测量信息为多个载波(例如第二载波、第三载波等)对应的测量信息);In a possible implementation manner, the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first carrier, the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports corresponding to the first carrier, and the first carrier includes one or more carriers (optionally, when the first carrier includes multiple carriers, it can also be understood that the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to multiple carriers (for example, a second carrier, a third carrier, etc.));

或,该测量信息为第一BWP对应的测量信息,该测量信息用于确定该第一BWP对应的M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量,该第一BWP包括一个或多个BWP(可选地,在第一BWP包括多个BWP的情况下,也可以理解为,测量信息为多个BWP(例如第二BWP、第三BWP等)对应的测量信息);Or, the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first BWP, and the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in the M digital ports corresponding to the first BWP, and the first BWP includes one or more BWPs (optionally, when the first BWP includes multiple BWPs, it can also be understood that the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to multiple BWPs (such as a second BWP, a third BWP, etc.));

或该测量信息为第一带宽对应的测量信息,该测量信息用于确定该第一带宽对应的M个数字端口的中每个数字端口的第一权值向量,该第一带宽包括一个或多个子带(可选地,在第一带宽包括多个子带的情况下,也可以理解为,测量信息为多个带宽(例如第二带宽、第三带宽等)对应的测量信息)。Or the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first bandwidth, and the measurement information is used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port of the M digital ports corresponding to the first bandwidth, and the first bandwidth includes one or more sub-bands (optionally, when the first bandwidth includes multiple sub-bands, it can also be understood that the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to multiple bandwidths (for example, the second bandwidth, the third bandwidth, etc.)).

具体地,测量信息可以用于确定一个或多个载波(或,一个或多个BWP,或一个或多个子带)对应的M个数字端口中每个数字端口的第一权值向量,以提升方案实现的灵活性。Specifically, the measurement information may be used to determine a first weight vector of each digital port in M digital ports corresponding to one or more carriers (or one or more BWPs, or one or more subbands) to enhance the flexibility of the solution implementation.

示例性的,以测量信息为第一载波对应的测量信息为例。Exemplarily, the measurement information is taken as the measurement information corresponding to the first carrier.

在该第一载波包括一个载波的情况下,终端设备可以基于步骤S301中的参考信号测量该一个载波的信道信息,并且,终端设备在步骤S302中的测量信息用于确定该一个载波对应的M个数字端口的虚拟端口的权值。 In the case where the first carrier includes one carrier, the terminal device can measure the channel information of the one carrier based on the reference signal in step S301, and the measurement information of the terminal device in step S302 is used to determine the weights of the virtual ports of the M digital ports corresponding to the one carrier.

在该第一载波包括D(D大于1)个载波的情况下,终端设备可以基于步骤S301中的参考信号测量该D个载波的信道信息,并且,终端设备在步骤S302中的测量信息用于确定该D个载波对应的M个数字端口的虚拟端口的权值。In the case that the first carrier includes D (D is greater than 1) carriers, the terminal device can measure the channel information of the D carriers based on the reference signal in step S301, and the measurement information of the terminal device in step S302 is used to determine the weights of the virtual ports of the M digital ports corresponding to the D carriers.

例如,该测量信息可以包括其中一个载波对应的M个数字端口的虚拟端口的权值(记为权值1),并且,不同载波对应的M个虚拟端口的权值是相同的,即网络设备可以确定该D个载波对应的M个数字端口的虚拟端口的权值均为权值1。For example, the measurement information may include the weight of the virtual port of the M digital ports corresponding to one of the carriers (denoted as weight 1), and the weights of the M virtual ports corresponding to different carriers are the same, that is, the network device can determine that the weights of the virtual ports of the M digital ports corresponding to the D carriers are all weight 1.

又如,该测量信息可以包括D个载波对应的M个数字端口的虚拟端口的权值(记为权值1...权值D),并且,网络设备可以基于权值1...权值D分别确定该D个载波对应的M个数字端口的虚拟端口的权值。For example, the measurement information may include weights of the virtual ports of the M digital ports corresponding to the D carriers (denoted as weight 1...weight D), and the network device may determine the weights of the virtual ports of the M digital ports corresponding to the D carriers based on weight 1...weight D respectively.

类似地,在测量信息为第一带宽对应的测量信息(或测量信息为第一带宽对应的测量信息)的情况下,可以参考上述测量信息为第一载波对应的测量信息的实现示例。Similarly, in a case where the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to the first bandwidth (or the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to the first bandwidth), reference may be made to the implementation example in which the measurement information is measurement information corresponding to the first carrier.

上面对步骤S302中的测量信息的多种实现方式进行描述。如前文描述,在步骤S301中,参考信号可以是在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的。为了便于理解方案,下面将对步骤S301及其相关过程,进行示例性描述。The above describes various implementations of the measurement information in step S302. As described above, in step S301, the reference signal may be sent via L1 first weights in L1 time units. To facilitate understanding of the solution, the following describes step S301 and its related processes by way of example.

可选地,在步骤S301中,用于发送参考信号的L1个时间单元在时域上是连续的。由于时域上连续的不同时间单元的信道信息关联性较强,通过这种方式,能够使得终端设备基于该L1个时间单元的参考信号对应的不同测量结果能够尽可能地反映出相同或相近的信道信息,以获得准确度更高的测量信息。Optionally, in step S301, the L 1 time units used to send the reference signal are continuous in the time domain. Since the channel information of different continuous time units in the time domain is highly correlated, in this way, the different measurement results corresponding to the reference signal of the L 1 time unit of the terminal device can reflect the same or similar channel information as much as possible, so as to obtain more accurate measurement information.

可选地,在步骤S301中,用于发送参考信号的该L1个时间单元中至少两个时间单元在时域上为不连续的。Optionally, in step S301, at least two time units among the L1 time units used to send the reference signal are discontinuous in the time domain.

应理解,在步骤S301中,参考信号在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的,可以理解为,L1个时间单元与L1个第一权值一一对应。例如,参考信号在L1个时间单元中的第i个时间单元的权值为L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值,i取值为1至L1It should be understood that in step S301, the reference signal is sent through L1 first weights in L1 time units respectively, and it can be understood that L1 time units correspond to L1 first weights one by one. For example, the weight of the reference signal in the i-th time unit in the L1 time units is the i-th first weight in the L1 first weights, and i ranges from 1 to L1 .

可选地,每个时间单元上的参考信号可以视为一个参考信号,即“承载于L1个时间单元的参考信号”可以视为L1个参考信号。相应的,上述方法可以执行一次或多次,即通过一个或多个的L1个时间单元分别实现一个或多个的L1个参考信号的收发过程。Optionally, the reference signal on each time unit can be regarded as one reference signal, that is, "the reference signal carried on L 1 time units" can be regarded as L 1 reference signals. Accordingly, the above method can be performed once or multiple times, that is, the sending and receiving process of one or more L 1 reference signals is respectively implemented through one or more L 1 time units.

或者,每L1个时间单元上的参考信号可以视为一个参考信号,即“承载于L1个时间单元的参考信号”可以视为1个参考信号。相应的,上述方法可以执行一次或多次,即通过一个或多个的L1个时间单元分别实现一个或多个参考信号的收发过程。Alternatively, the reference signal on each L 1 time unit can be regarded as one reference signal, that is, "the reference signal carried on L 1 time unit" can be regarded as 1 reference signal. Accordingly, the above method can be performed once or multiple times, that is, the sending and receiving process of one or more reference signals is respectively implemented through one or more L 1 time units.

应理解,L1个第二权值是正交的,L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值是通过L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值与第三权值得到的,换言之,L1个第一权值是基于L1个第二权值得到的。其中,该L1个第一权值中的不同权值可以是正交的,也可以是不正交的,此处不做限定。It should be understood that the L1 second weights are orthogonal, and the i-th first weight among the L1 first weights is obtained by the i-th second weight among the L1 second weights and the third weight. In other words, the L1 first weights are obtained based on the L1 second weights. Among them, different weights in the L1 first weights may be orthogonal or non-orthogonal, which is not limited here.

需要说明的是,该L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值是通过L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值与第三权值得到的,包括:该L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值,是该L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值中的N1个元素分别与第三权值中的N1个子向量相乘得到的。It should be noted that the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained by the i-th second weight among the L 1 second weights and the third weight, including: the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained by multiplying the N 1 elements of the i-th second weight among the L 1 second weights by the N 1 sub-vectors in the third weight.

可选地,第i个第二权值中的N1个元素与第三权值中的N1个子向量相乘,可以为一个元素与一个子向量的乘积。例如,N1个元素分别为a0,a1(即N1=2)的情况下,如果f0,f1为两个行向量,那么得到的第二权值为[a0f0,a1f1];如果f0,f1为两个列向量,那么得到的第二权值为 Optionally, the multiplication of the N 1 elements in the ith second weight and the N 1 subvectors in the third weight may be the product of an element and a subvector. For example, when the N 1 elements are a 0 , a 1 (i.e., N 1 = 2), if f 0 , f 1 are two row vectors, then the obtained second weight is [a 0 f 0 , a 1 f 1 ]; if f 0 , f 1 are two column vectors, then the obtained second weight is

可选地,第i个第二权值中的N1个元素与第三权值中的N1个子向量相乘,可以为N1个子向量组成对角矩阵,再与N1个元素组成的向量进行矩阵相乘。以N1为2举例,第三权值包含的N1个子向量分别为f0,f1,当f0,f1为两个行向量,第二权值包含的N1个元素分别为a0,a1,满足:
Optionally, the N 1 elements in the i-th second weight are multiplied with the N 1 subvectors in the third weight, and a diagonal matrix of the N 1 subvectors is formed, and then the matrix is multiplied with the vector composed of N 1 elements. Taking N 1 as 2 as an example, the N 1 subvectors contained in the third weight are f 0 , f 1 respectively. When f 0 , f 1 are two row vectors, the N 1 elements contained in the second weight are a 0 , a 1 respectively, satisfying:

当f0,f1为两个行向量,第二权值包含的N1个元素分别为a0,a1,满足:
When f 0 , f 1 are two row vectors, the second weight contains N 1 elements a 0 , a 1 , respectively, satisfying:

在一种可能的实现方式中,在步骤S301中,网络设备发送的参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,该M个数字端口中的第一数字端口在该L1个时间单元对应的权值为该L1个第一权值;该第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,该第二权值包含与该N1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素,N1为大于等于1的整数。具体地,参考信号在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的,该L1个第一权值可以是M个数字端口中的第一数字端口的权值。其中,该第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,该第二权值包含与该N1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素,即该第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口在L1个时间单元上的对应的L1个第二权值是正交的。通过这种方式,使得同一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口在不同时间单元上的权值是正交的。In a possible implementation, in step S301, the reference signal sent by the network device is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein the weight corresponding to the first digital port among the M digital ports in the L 1 time units is the L 1 first weight; the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and the second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, where N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1. Specifically, the reference signal is sent through L 1 first weights in L 1 time units, respectively, and the L 1 first weights may be the weight of the first digital port among the M digital ports. wherein the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and the second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports, that is, the corresponding L 1 second weights of the virtual ports included in the first digital port in the L 1 time units are orthogonal. In this way, the weights of the virtual ports included in the same digital port in different time units are orthogonal.

本申请中,虚拟端口可以替换为其它术语,例如模拟端口,虚拟子阵,模拟子阵,子阵等。In this application, the virtual port can be replaced by other terms, such as analog port, virtual sub-array, analog sub-array, sub-array, etc.

可选地,L1是N1的整数倍。例如,N1与L1是相等的。Optionally, L 1 is an integer multiple of N 1. For example, N 1 is equal to L 1 .

可选地,该N1个虚拟端口在该L1个时间单元的不同时间单元上占据的频域资源是相同的。通过这种方式,能够尽可能的降低参考信号在不同时间单元的收发的实现复杂度。Optionally, the frequency domain resources occupied by the N 1 virtual ports in different time units of the L 1 time units are the same. In this way, the implementation complexity of sending and receiving reference signals in different time units can be reduced as much as possible.

可选地,终端设备还可以接收指示该第一数字端口包含的虚拟端口数为N1的指示信息,和/或,终端设备还可以接收指示该参考信号的时间单元数为L1的指示信息。其中,这两个指示信息可以承载于参考信号的配置信息中,也可以承载于其它信息/消息/信令中,此处不做限定。Optionally, the terminal device may also receive indication information indicating that the number of virtual ports included in the first digital port is N 1 , and/or, the terminal device may also receive indication information indicating that the number of time units of the reference signal is L 1. These two indication information may be carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or may be carried in other information/messages/signaling, which is not limited here.

可选地,N1和L1为预配置的信息,此处不做限定。Optionally, N 1 and L 1 are pre-configured information and are not limited here.

应理解,一个数字端口包含一个或多个虚拟端口(例如第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,后文描述的第二数字端口包括N2个虚拟端口等),可以理解为,该数字端口的信号是通过该一个或多个虚拟端口进行收发的。例如,在信号发送过程中,该数字端口通过该一个或多个虚拟端口发送信号;又如,在信号接收过程中,一个或多个虚拟端口接收的信号可以理解为该数字端口接收的信号。It should be understood that a digital port includes one or more virtual ports (for example, a first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and a second digital port described later includes N 2 virtual ports, etc.), and it can be understood that the signal of the digital port is sent and received through the one or more virtual ports. For example, in the process of signal transmission, the digital port sends the signal through the one or more virtual ports; for another example, in the process of signal reception, the signal received by one or more virtual ports can be understood as the signal received by the digital port.

由上述步骤S301的描述可知,参考信号在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的,并且,该L1个第一权值是通过第二权值和第三权值确定的。下面将对第二权值和第三权值的实现过程进行示例性描述。From the description of step S301 above, it can be seen that the reference signal is sent via L 1 first weights in L 1 time units respectively, and the L 1 first weights are determined by the second weight and the third weight. The implementation process of the second weight and the third weight is described exemplarily below.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第二权值包含与该N1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素。其中,M个数字端口的第一数字端口包含的N1个虚拟端口分别对应N1个天线阵子集合,每个天线阵子集合包含一个或多个天线阵子,该N1个元素分别用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位。具体地,第一数字端口包含的N1个虚拟端口分别对应N1个天线阵子集合,第二权值包含的N1个元素分别用于调节该N1个天线阵子集合的相位。并且,每个天线阵子集合包含一个或多个天线阵子,换言之,第二权值所包含的N1个元素用于调节数字端口中不同虚拟端口对应的天线阵子的相位,即L1个正交的第二权值用于实现不同虚拟端口对应的天线阵子集合的相位的正交。In a possible implementation, the second weight includes N 1 elements corresponding to the N 1 virtual ports. The N 1 virtual ports included in the first digital port of the M digital ports correspond to N 1 antenna array sets, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays, and the N 1 elements are used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets. Specifically, the N 1 virtual ports included in the first digital port correspond to N 1 antenna array sets, and the N 1 elements included in the second weight are used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets. Moreover, each antenna array set includes one or more antenna arrays. In other words, the N 1 elements included in the second weight are used to adjust the phases of the antenna arrays corresponding to different virtual ports in the digital port, that is, the L 1 orthogonal second weights are used to achieve orthogonality of the phases of the antenna array sets corresponding to different virtual ports.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第三权值包括N1个子向量,该N1个子向量中的第P个子向量的维度与该N1个天线阵子集合中的第P个天线阵子集合的天线阵子数相同,P的取值为1至N1。具体地,第三权值包含的N1个子向量中的第P个子向量的维度,与该N1个天线阵子集合中的第P个天线阵子集合的天线阵子数相同。通过这种方式,使得第三权值能够分别对应N1个天线阵子集合中的每个天线阵子集合的权值。In a possible implementation, the third weight includes N 1 sub-vectors, the dimension of the P-th sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the P- th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set, and the value of P is 1 to N 1. Specifically, the dimension of the P-th sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors included in the third weight is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the P-th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set. In this way, the third weight can correspond to the weight of each antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array set.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第三权值是网络设备根据终端设备反馈的波束测量结果(例如,参考信号接收功率reference signal received power,RSRP)确定的。网络设备在发送用于波束管理的参考 信号时,采用不同的模拟权值进行加权,终端进行测量后,反馈对应的测量结果。第三权值可以是反馈结果中最大RSRP的参考信号对应的发送模拟权值,也可以是反馈结果中某一个参考信号对应的发送模拟权值。示例性的,第三权值可以是通过其它参考信号确定的。例如,网络设备可以通过不同的波束(或不同的权值)发送该其它参考信号之后,终端设备可以基于该不同的波束反馈多个信号质量信息,相应的,网络设备可以基于该多个信号质量信息中信号质量最优的信号质量信息确定该第三权值,或者,网络设备可以基于该多个信号质量信息中大于门限的信号质量信息确定该第三权值,或者,网络设备可以基于终端反馈的一个或多个参考信号的质量(例如,RSRP)确定该第三权值。In one possible implementation, the third weight is determined by the network device according to the beam measurement result (for example, reference signal received power, RSRP) fed back by the terminal device. When the signal is transmitted, different analog weights are used for weighting. After the terminal performs measurement, the corresponding measurement result is fed back. The third weight can be the transmission analog weight corresponding to the reference signal with the maximum RSRP in the feedback result, or it can be the transmission analog weight corresponding to a certain reference signal in the feedback result. Exemplarily, the third weight can be determined by other reference signals. For example, after the network device sends the other reference signal through different beams (or different weights), the terminal device can feed back multiple signal quality information based on the different beams. Correspondingly, the network device can determine the third weight based on the signal quality information with the best signal quality among the multiple signal quality information, or the network device can determine the third weight based on the signal quality information greater than the threshold among the multiple signal quality information, or the network device can determine the third weight based on the quality of one or more reference signals fed back by the terminal (for example, RSRP).

可选地,第一权值与第三权值的维度相同,即用于发送参考信号的第一权值能够确定N1个天线阵子集合中的每个天线阵子集合的权值。Optionally, the first weight and the third weight have the same dimension, that is, the first weight used to send the reference signal can determine the weight of each antenna element set in the N1 antenna element sets.

示例性的,以第一数字端口包含的N1个虚拟端口为例。在L1(L1=N1)个时间单元的第k个时间单元上,L1个第二权值的第k个第二权值w′k可以表示为:
w′k=[w1,k w2,k … wN,k]′;
Exemplarily, taking the N 1 virtual ports included in the first digital port as an example, at the kth time unit of L 1 (L 1 =N 1 ) time units, the kth second weight w′ k of the L 1 second weights can be expressed as:
w′ k = [w 1,k w 2,k … w N,k ]′;

其中,w′k为一个N1×1的向量,对应为第k个时间单元上的N1个虚拟子阵的相位信息。如前所述,第一数字端口发送的参考信号可以承载于L1(L1=N1)个时间单元,那么L1个时间单元对应N1个第二权值可以表示为:
Wherein, w′ k is an N 1 ×1 vector, corresponding to the phase information of N 1 virtual sub-arrays on the kth time unit. As mentioned above, the reference signal sent by the first digital port can be carried in L 1 (L 1 =N 1 ) time units, then the L 1 time units corresponding to N 1 second weights can be expressed as:

其中,分别表示L1个时间单元上的L1(L1=N1)个第二权值,并且,L1(L1=N1)个第二权值相互正交。in, They respectively represent L 1 (L 1 =N 1 ) second weights on L 1 time units, and the L 1 (L 1 =N 1 ) second weights are orthogonal to each other.

示例性的,矩阵W可以为DFT矩阵,或者哈达玛(Hadamard)矩阵。例如,矩阵W的列表示不同的时间单元(即矩阵W包括L1列),行表示一个数字端口所包含不同的虚拟端口(即矩阵W包括N1行)。以DFT矩阵为例,矩阵W满足:
Exemplarily, the matrix W may be a DFT matrix or a Hadamard matrix. For example, the columns of the matrix W represent different time units (i.e., the matrix W includes L 1 columns), and the rows represent different virtual ports contained in a digital port (i.e., the matrix W includes N 1 rows). Taking the DFT matrix as an example, the matrix W satisfies:

其中,矩阵W中的每个元素wx,y表示在符号x时虚拟子阵y的相位信息(即x为矩阵列索引,y为矩阵行索引),其中e为自然常数,j为虚数符号,N1为虚拟端口数。Each element wx ,y in the matrix W represents the phase information of the virtual sub-array y at symbol x (i.e., x is the matrix column index and y is the matrix row index), where e is a natural constant, j is the imaginary number sign, and N1 is the number of virtual ports.

当然,也可以为Hadamard矩阵。例如,一阶Hadamard矩阵可以表示为H1=[1]。Of course, it can also be a Hadamard matrix. For example, a first-order Hadamard matrix can be expressed as H 1 =[1].

二阶Hadamard矩阵可以表示为 The second-order Hadamard matrix can be expressed as

四阶Hadamard矩阵可以表示为 The fourth-order Hadamard matrix can be expressed as

n阶Hadamard矩阵为n为2的z次方,z为正整数。The n-order Hadamard matrix is n is 2 to the zth power, and z is a positive integer.

如图4a,作为一种应用示例,假设第一数字端口拆分2个虚拟端口,即第一数字端口包括2(即N1=2)个虚拟端口,则需要2(即L1=N1=2)个时间单元上发送,那么在这2个时间单元上的两个虚拟端口的第二权值分别为[+1+1],[+1 -1]。如下图5所示:As shown in Figure 4a, as an application example, assuming that the first digital port is split into two virtual ports, that is, the first digital port includes 2 (i.e., N 1 =2) virtual ports, it needs to be sent in 2 (i.e., L 1 =N 1 =2) time units, then the second weights of the two virtual ports in these two time units are [+1+1], [+1 -1] respectively. As shown in Figure 5 below:

在时域单元1,2个虚拟端口的第二权值分别为+1、+1。In the time domain unit 1, the second weights of the two virtual ports are +1 and +1 respectively.

在时域单元2,2个虚拟端口的第二权值分别为+1、-1。In the time domain unit 2, the second weights of the two virtual ports are +1 and -1 respectively.

如图4b,作为另一种应用示例,假设第一数字端口拆分4个虚拟端口,即第一数字端口包括4(即N1=4)个虚拟端口,则需要4(即L1=N1=4)个时间单元上发送,那么在这4个时间单元上的4个虚拟端口的第二权值可以分别为[+1 +1 +1 +1],[+1 -1 +1 -1],[+1 +1 -1 -1],[+1 -1 -1 +1];也可以分别为[+1 +1 +1 +1],[+1 -j +1 +j],[-1 +1 -1 +1],[+1 -j -1 +j]。As shown in Figure 4b, as another application example, assuming that the first digital port is split into 4 virtual ports, that is, the first digital port includes 4 (i.e., N1 =4) virtual ports, it needs to be sent in 4 (i.e., L1 = N1 =4) time units, then the second weights of the 4 virtual ports in these 4 time units can be [+1 +1 +1 +1], [+1 -1 +1 -1], [+1 +1 -1 -1], [+1 -1 -1 +1] respectively; they can also be [+1 +1 +1 +1], [+1 -j +1 +j], [-1 +1 -1 +1], [+1 -j -1 +j] respectively.

以Hadamard矩阵为例,Taking the Hadamard matrix as an example,

在时域单元1,4个虚拟端口的第二权值分别为+1、+1、+1、+1。In time domain unit 1, the second weights of the four virtual ports are +1, +1, +1, and +1, respectively.

在时域单元2,4个虚拟端口的第二权值分别为+1、-1、+1、-1。In the time domain unit 2, the second weights of the four virtual ports are +1, -1, +1, and -1 respectively.

在时域单元3,4个虚拟端口的第二权值分别为+1、+1、-1、-1。In the time domain unit 3, the second weights of the four virtual ports are +1, +1, -1, and -1 respectively.

在时域单元4,4个虚拟端口的第二权值分别为+1、-1、-1、+1。In the time domain unit 4, the second weights of the four virtual ports are +1, -1, -1, and +1 respectively.

应理解,L1个第二权值是正交的,可以理解为,L1个第二权值中的任意两个第二权值是相互正交的,或,L1个第二权值中的不同第二权值是两两正交的。例如,上述图4a中,L1个第二权值包括时域单元1上的第二权值“+1、+1”以及时域单元2上的第二权值“+1、-1”,并且,这2(即L1=2)个第二权值是相互正交的。又如,在上述Hadamard矩阵中,L1个第二权值包括时域单元1上的第二权值“+1、+1、+1、+1”、时域单元2上的第二权值“+1、-1、+1、-1”、时域单元3上的第二权值“+1、+1、-1、-1”、时域单元4上的第二权值“+1、-1、-1、+1”,并且,这4(即L1=4)个第二权值是两两正交的。It should be understood that L1 second weights are orthogonal, which can be understood as any two second weights among the L1 second weights are mutually orthogonal, or different second weights among the L1 second weights are orthogonal to each other. For example, in the above FIG. 4a, the L1 second weights include the second weights "+1, +1" on the time domain unit 1 and the second weights "+1, -1" on the time domain unit 2, and these 2 (i.e., L1 = 2) second weights are mutually orthogonal. As another example, in the above Hadamard matrix, the L1 second weights include the second weights “+1, +1, +1, +1” on time domain unit 1, the second weights “+1, -1, +1, -1” on time domain unit 2, the second weights “+1, +1, -1, -1” on time domain unit 3, and the second weights “+1, -1, -1, +1” on time domain unit 4, and these 4 (i.e., L1 = 4) second weights are orthogonal to each other.

可选地,如果M大于1的情况下,M个数字端口中的每个数字端口所包含的各个虚拟端口的相位信息可以独立配置,也可以对M个数字端口中配置相同虚拟子阵的相位信息。Optionally, if M is greater than 1, the phase information of each virtual port included in each of the M digital ports may be configured independently, or the phase information of the same virtual sub-array may be configured for the M digital ports.

基于上述技术方案,终端设备在步骤S301中接收的参考信号在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的,并且,该L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值是通过L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值与第三权值得到的,该L1个第二权值是正交的。换言之,在L1个时间单元传输的参考信号是通过相互正交的L1个第二权值发送的。通过这种方式,使得终端设备对不同时间单元上承载的参考信号的测量是相对独立的,进而获得L1个相对独立的信道信息,以获得准确度更高的测量信息。Based on the above technical solution, the reference signal received by the terminal device in step S301 is sent through L1 first weights in L1 time units respectively, and the i-th first weight in the L1 first weights is obtained through the i-th second weight and the third weight in L1 second weights, and the L1 second weights are orthogonal. In other words, the reference signal transmitted in L1 time units is sent through mutually orthogonal L1 second weights. In this way, the terminal device's measurements of the reference signals carried on different time units are relatively independent, and then L1 relatively independent channel information is obtained to obtain measurement information with higher accuracy.

由上述实现过程可知,在步骤S301中,参考信号可以是通过M个数字端口发送的,M可以有多种取值方式,下面将结合一些实现示例进行介绍。It can be seen from the above implementation process that in step S301, the reference signal may be sent through M digital ports, and M may have multiple value modes, which will be introduced below in conjunction with some implementation examples.

示例一,M取值为1。In example 1, the value of M is 1.

在示例一中,在M取值为1的情况下,参考信号可以是通过一个数字端口(即第一数字端口)发送的,使得方案适用于网络设备配置了单个数字端口的场景下,实现对该单个数字端口包含的虚拟端口的参考信号的传输及测量。In Example 1, when the value of M is 1, the reference signal can be sent through a digital port (i.e., the first digital port), so that the solution is applicable to the scenario where the network device is configured with a single digital port, and realizes the transmission and measurement of the reference signal of the virtual port contained in the single digital port.

如前文所述,在M取值为1的情况下,M个数字端口即为第一数字端口。并且,第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,该第一数字端口发送的参考信号在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的。例如N1与L1相等。 As mentioned above, when the value of M is 1, the M digital ports are the first digital ports. In addition, the first digital port includes N 1 virtual ports, and the reference signal sent by the first digital port is sent through L 1 first weights in L 1 time units. For example, N 1 is equal to L 1 .

可选的,该L1个时间单元在时域上连续。Optionally, the L 1 time units are continuous in the time domain.

可选的,在L1个时间单元为L1个符号的情况下,该L1个符号具体占用一个时隙中的时域符号位置可网络设备配置(例如前文描述的参考信号的配置信息),例如配置该L1个符号的起始位置,配置L1的取值等。Optionally, when L 1 time units are L 1 symbols, the time domain symbol position occupied by the L 1 symbol in a time slot can be configured by the network device (such as the configuration information of the reference signal described above), such as configuring the starting position of the L 1 symbol, configuring the value of L 1 , etc.

可选的,在该L1个时间单元上,不同时间单元上所占的频域资源数可以是相同的。Optionally, in the L1 time units, the numbers of frequency domain resources occupied in different time units may be the same.

作为示例一的一种实现示例,如图5所示,以第一数字端口包含2(即N1=2)个虚拟端口为例,通过该第一数字端口发送参考信号的资源可以包括图5中的2个RE。换言之,该2个RE在时域上包括2(即L1=2)个符号,在频域上包括一个子载波。在图5所示示例中,在2个符号上通过第一数字端口发送参考信号。应理解,图5中第一个符号和第二个符号上的码序列编码可以均为“+1”,通过全1的码序列编码发送,即无数字端口的码分复用。As an implementation example of Example 1, as shown in FIG5, taking the first digital port including 2 (i.e., N 1 =2) virtual ports as an example, the resources for sending the reference signal through the first digital port may include the 2 REs in FIG5. In other words, the 2 REs include 2 (i.e., L 1 =2) symbols in the time domain and one subcarrier in the frequency domain. In the example shown in FIG5, the reference signal is sent through the first digital port on 2 symbols. It should be understood that the code sequence encoding on the first symbol and the second symbol in FIG5 can both be "+1", and sent through the code sequence encoding of all 1s, that is, code division multiplexing without digital ports.

作为示例一的另一种实现示例,如图6所示,以第一数字端口包含4(即N1=4)个虚拟端口为例,通过该第一数字端口发送参考信号的资源可以包括图6中的4个RE。换言之,该4个RE在时域上包括4(即L1=4)个符号,在频域上包括一个子载波。在图6所示示例中,在4个符号上通过第一数字端口发送参考信号。应理解,在图6中,4个符号中不同符号上的码序列编码可以均为“+1”,通过全1的码序列编码发送,即无数字端口的码分复用。As another implementation example of Example 1, as shown in FIG6, taking the first digital port including 4 (i.e., N 1 =4) virtual ports as an example, the resources for sending reference signals through the first digital port may include the 4 REs in FIG6. In other words, the 4 REs include 4 (i.e., L 1 =4) symbols in the time domain and one subcarrier in the frequency domain. In the example shown in FIG6, the reference signal is sent through the first digital port on the 4 symbols. It should be understood that in FIG6, the code sequence encoding on different symbols in the 4 symbols may all be "+1", and sent through the code sequence encoding of all 1s, that is, code division multiplexing without digital ports.

可选地,通过该第一数字端口发送参考信号的多个时间单元可以位于同一个时隙。例如图5中的2个符号以及图5中的4个符号可以位于同一个时隙。类似地,通过该第一数字端口发送参考信号的多个资源可以位于同一个物理资源块(physical resource block,PRB)。例如图5中的2个RE以及图5中的4个RE可以位于同一个PRB。此外,对于步骤S201传输的参考信号而言,该参考信号可以承载于一个或多个时隙(或一个或多个PRB),不同时隙(或不同PRB)的资源映射方式可以是相同的。Optionally, multiple time units for sending reference signals through the first digital port may be located in the same time slot. For example, the 2 symbols in Figure 5 and the 4 symbols in Figure 5 may be located in the same time slot. Similarly, multiple resources for sending reference signals through the first digital port may be located in the same physical resource block (PRB). For example, the 2 REs in Figure 5 and the 4 REs in Figure 5 may be located in the same PRB. In addition, for the reference signal transmitted in step S201, the reference signal may be carried in one or more time slots (or one or more PRBs), and the resource mapping methods of different time slots (or different PRBs) may be the same.

可选地,通过该第一数字端口发送参考信号的多个时间单元,和/或,通过该第一数字端口发送参考信号的多个资源,可以是通过网络设备的配置信息发送的。例如可以是通过网络设备发送的参考信号的配置所配置的。Optionally, the multiple time units for sending the reference signal through the first digital port and/or the multiple resources for sending the reference signal through the first digital port may be sent through configuration information of the network device, for example, may be configured by the configuration of the reference signal sent by the network device.

示例二,M取值大于1。Example 2: The value of M is greater than 1.

在示例二中,在M取值大于1的情况下,参考信号可以是通过两个或两个以上的数字端口(即第一数字端口以及其它数字端口)发送的,使得方案适用于网络设备配置了两个或两个以上数字端口的场景下,实现对该两个或两个以上数字端口包含的虚拟端口的参考信号的传输及测量。In Example 2, when the value of M is greater than 1, the reference signal can be sent through two or more digital ports (i.e., the first digital port and other digital ports), so that the solution is suitable for the scenario where the network device is configured with two or more digital ports, and realizes the transmission and measurement of the reference signal of the virtual port contained in the two or more digital ports.

在示例二中,M个数字端口除了包括第一数字端口之外,该M个数字端口还可以包括其它的数字端口,例如第二数字端口。其中,第二数字端口包括N2个虚拟端口;其中,该参考信号在L2个时间单元上分别是通过L2个第四权值发送的,L2为大于1的整数;该L2个第四权值中的第j个第四权值是通过L2个第五权值中的第j个第五权值与第六权值得到的,该L2个第五权值是正交的。换言之,在L2个时间单元传输的参考信号是通过相互正交的L2个第五权值发送的。通过这种方式,使得终端设备对不同时间单元上承载的参考信号的测量是相对独立的,进而获得L1个相对独立的信道信息,以获得准确度更高的测量信息。In Example 2, in addition to the first digital port, the M digital ports may also include other digital ports, such as the second digital port. The second digital port includes N 2 virtual ports; the reference signal is sent through L 2 fourth weights on L 2 time units, respectively, and L 2 is an integer greater than 1; the jth fourth weight among the L 2 fourth weights is obtained through the jth fifth weight and the sixth weight among the L 2 fifth weights, and the L 2 fifth weights are orthogonal. In other words, the reference signal transmitted in L 2 time units is sent through L 2 fifth weights that are orthogonal to each other. In this way, the terminal device makes relatively independent measurements of the reference signals carried on different time units, and then obtains L 1 relatively independent channel information to obtain more accurate measurement information.

可选地,L1与L2相等。其中,L1个时间单元和L2个时间单元可以是相同的时间单元,即M个数字端口中的第一数字端口发送参考信号的时域资源与第二数字端口发送参考信号的时域资源可以是相同的。通过这种方式,能够尽可能地复用相同的时间单元,以节省通信资源并降低实现复杂度。Optionally, L1 is equal to L2 . Among them, L1 time units and L2 time units may be the same time units, that is, the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by the first digital port among the M digital ports and the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by the second digital port may be the same. In this way, the same time unit can be reused as much as possible to save communication resources and reduce implementation complexity.

可选地,L1与L2相等。其中,L1个时间单元和L2个时间单元可以是相同的频域单元,即M个数字端口中的第一数字端口发送参考信号的频域资源与第二数字端口发送参考信号的频域资源可以是相同的。通过这种方式,能够尽可能地复用相同的频域单元,以节省通信资源并降低实现复杂度。Optionally, L1 is equal to L2 . Among them, L1 time units and L2 time units may be the same frequency domain units, that is, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by the first digital port among the M digital ports and the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by the second digital port may be the same. In this way, the same frequency domain units can be reused as much as possible to save communication resources and reduce implementation complexity.

可选地,N1与N2相等。即M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包含的虚拟端口的数量与第二数字端口包含的虚拟端口的数量可以是相同的,通过这种方式,能够降低实现复杂度。Optionally, N1 is equal to N2 . That is, the number of virtual ports included in the first digital port and the number of virtual ports included in the second digital port among the M digital ports may be the same. In this way, the implementation complexity can be reduced.

需要说明的是,第二数字端口的实现过程可以参考前文第一数字端口的实现过程。例如,L2个时间单元与L2个第四权值之间的对应关系可以参考L1个时间单元与L1个第一权值之间的对应关系,L2个第四权值与L2个第五权值之间的对应关系可以参考L1个第一权值与L1个第二权值之间的对应关系等。 It should be noted that the implementation process of the second digital port can refer to the implementation process of the first digital port in the foregoing text. For example, the correspondence between L2 time units and L2 fourth weights can refer to the correspondence between L1 time units and L1 first weights, and the correspondence between L2 fourth weights and L2 fifth weights can refer to the correspondence between L1 first weights and L1 second weights, etc.

此外,在示例二中,M大于1的情况下,该参考信号的资源可以有多种实现方式,例如,该参考信号的资源满足以下方式一至方式三中的其中一项,下面将对这些方式进行示例性描述。In addition, in Example 2, when M is greater than 1, the resources of the reference signal can be implemented in multiple ways. For example, the resources of the reference signal satisfy one of the following ways 1 to 3. These ways are described exemplarily below.

方式一、在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的时域资源和频域资源是相同的,且该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口是码分复用的,通过正交码区分数字端口。换言之,在方式一中,M个数字端口可以是共享时频资源的,且M个数字端口采用频域码分(即FD-CDM#M),可以表示为一个CDM组内有M个数字端口。Mode 1: In the resources of the reference signal, the time domain resources and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, and different digital ports among the M digital ports are code division multiplexed, and the digital ports are distinguished by orthogonal codes. In other words, in Mode 1, the M digital ports can share time and frequency resources, and the M digital ports use frequency domain code division (i.e., FD-CDM#M), which can be represented as M digital ports in one CDM group.

可选地,对于M个数字端口中的任一数字端口而言,该任一数字端口包含的虚拟端口的数量与该任一数字端口占据的时间单元的数量可以是相等的(例如L1与N1是相等的,L2与N2是相等的)。Optionally, for any digital port among the M digital ports, the number of virtual ports included in the any digital port and the number of time units occupied by the any digital port may be equal (for example, L1 is equal to N1 , and L2 is equal to N2 ).

作为方法一的一种实现示例,如图7所示,以第一数字端口和第二数字端口均包含4(即N1=N2=4)个虚拟端口为例,通过该第一数字端口发送参考信号的资源可以包括图7中“数字端口0”对应的8个RE,通过该第二数字端口发送参考信号的资源可以包括图7中“数字端口1”对应的8个RE。换言之,该8个RE在时域上包括4(即L1=4)个符号,在频域上包括两个子载波。在图7所示示例中,在4个符号上,数字端口0对应的码序列编码的叠加正交码(orthogonal cover code,OCC)码为“+1”“-1”,数字端口1对应的码序列编码的OCC码为“+1”“+1”。即通过2个OCC,对应两个数字端口。由于是频域2RE的正交OCC码,所以这种码分复用称作FD-CDM2。As an implementation example of method 1, as shown in FIG7, taking the case where both the first digital port and the second digital port include 4 (i.e., N 1 =N 2 =4) virtual ports as an example, the resources for sending reference signals through the first digital port may include 8 REs corresponding to "digital port 0" in FIG7, and the resources for sending reference signals through the second digital port may include 8 REs corresponding to "digital port 1" in FIG7. In other words, the 8 REs include 4 (i.e., L 1 =4) symbols in the time domain and two subcarriers in the frequency domain. In the example shown in FIG7, on the 4 symbols, the superimposed orthogonal cover code (OCC) code encoded by the code sequence corresponding to digital port 0 is "+1" and "-1", and the OCC code encoded by the code sequence corresponding to digital port 1 is "+1" and "+1". That is, two digital ports are corresponding to two OCCs. Since it is an orthogonal OCC code of 2REs in the frequency domain, this code division multiplexing is called FD-CDM2.

可以理解的是,不同数字端口之间正交码的实现过程可以参考前文表1及相关实现示例的描述。It can be understood that the implementation process of orthogonal codes between different digital ports can refer to the description of Table 1 and related implementation examples above.

方式二、在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的时域资源是相同的,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的频域资源是不同的,且该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口无码分复用(no-CDM)。换言之,M个数字端口中,不同数字端口的资源是频分的,通过频分的方式区分数字端口。Mode 2: In the resources of the reference signal, the time domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and different digital ports among the M digital ports have no code division multiplexing (no-CDM). In other words, among the M digital ports, the resources of different digital ports are frequency-divided, and the digital ports are distinguished by frequency division.

在方式二的一种可能的实现方式中,在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的资源在频域上包括互不相同的M个频域单元。具体地,M大于1,在该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的频域资源是不同的,且该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口无码分复用的情况下,不同数字端口发送该参考信号的资源在频域上包括互不相同的M个频域单元。通过这种方式,能够在无码分复用的情况下,使得不同数字端口在不同频域资源上实现参考信号的发送,能够提升方案实现的灵活性。所述频域单元可以包括一个或多个子载波或RE。In a possible implementation of the second method, in the resources of the reference signal, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports include M different frequency domain units in the frequency domain. Specifically, M is greater than 1, and the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are different, and when there is no code division multiplexing for different digital ports among the M digital ports, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports include M different frequency domain units in the frequency domain. In this way, different digital ports can send reference signals on different frequency domain resources without code division multiplexing, which can improve the flexibility of the implementation of the solution. The frequency domain unit may include one or more subcarriers or REs.

可选地,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收指示该互不相同的M个频域单元的指示信息,使得终端设备基于该指示信息明确各个频域单元的资源位置。可选地,该指示信息承载于参考信号的配置信息,或者是其他的消息/信息/信令等,此处不做限定。例如,该配置信息可以配置每个数字端口频域的起始RE位置,不同数字端口可以占用不同的频域资源。Optionally, the method further includes: the terminal device receives indication information indicating the M different frequency domain units, so that the terminal device specifies the resource location of each frequency domain unit based on the indication information. Optionally, the indication information is carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or other messages/information/signaling, etc., which are not limited here. For example, the configuration information can configure the starting RE position of each digital port frequency domain, and different digital ports can occupy different frequency domain resources.

作为方式二的一种实现示例,如图8所示,M个数字端口包括图中的数字端口0、数字端口1、数字端口2和数字端口3这四个数字端口为例,第一数字端口和第二数字端口可以为该四个数字端口中的任意不同的两个数字端口。在该示例中,假设每个数字端口包含两个虚拟端口数,假设时域单元数和虚拟端口数相同,则每个数字端口时域上占用两个RE,另外假设频域每个数字端口占用1个RE,那么每个数字端口总共占用2个RE,4个数字端口可以依次占用一个资源块(resource block,RB)中的第1,2,4,5个频域RE。在图8所示示例中,M个数字端口中的不同数字端口无码分复用(no-CDM)(或者说,未采用码分复用)。As an implementation example of the second method, as shown in FIG8 , the M digital ports include the four digital ports of digital port 0, digital port 1, digital port 2 and digital port 3 in the figure as an example, and the first digital port and the second digital port can be any two different digital ports among the four digital ports. In this example, assuming that each digital port contains two virtual port numbers, assuming that the number of time domain units and the number of virtual ports are the same, each digital port occupies two REs in the time domain, and assuming that each digital port occupies 1 RE in the frequency domain, then each digital port occupies a total of 2 REs, and the four digital ports can occupy the 1st, 2nd, 4th, and 5th frequency domain REs in a resource block (RB) in turn. In the example shown in FIG8 , different digital ports among the M digital ports have no code division multiplexing (no-CDM) (or, code division multiplexing is not used).

可选的,对于同一数字端口而言,该同一数字端口包含的若干个虚拟端口在不同时间单元上占据的频域资源是相同的。通过这种方式,可以降低实现复杂度。Optionally, for the same digital port, the frequency domain resources occupied by the multiple virtual ports included in the same digital port in different time units are the same. In this way, the implementation complexity can be reduced.

可选的,对于M个数字端口中的不同数字端口而言,该不同数字端口的虚拟端口数可以是相同的。Optionally, for different digital ports among the M digital ports, the numbers of virtual ports of the different digital ports may be the same.

方式三、在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口属于Q组数字端口,每组数字端口包括一个或多个数字端口,Q为正整数;其中,该Q组数字端口中的不同组数字端口发送该参考信号的频域资源是不同的,该Q组数字端口中的同一组数字端口包含的一个或多个数字端口发送所述参考信号的频域资源是相同的,且该同一组数字端口组包含的一个或多个数字端口发送是码分复用(code division multiplexing,CDM)的。可选的,该同一组数字端口组包含的一个或多个数字端口的码分复用类型为频域码分复用。 Mode 3: In the resources of the reference signal, the M digital ports belong to Q groups of digital ports, each group of digital ports includes one or more digital ports, and Q is a positive integer; wherein the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different groups of digital ports in the Q groups of digital ports are different, the frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports in the Q groups of digital ports are the same, and the one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports send code division multiplexing (code division multiplexing, CDM). Optionally, the code division multiplexing type of the one or more digital ports included in the same group of digital ports is frequency domain code division multiplexing.

在方式三的一种可能的实现方式中,在该参考信号的资源中,该M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的资源在频域上均包括相同的M个频域单元。具体地,M大于1,在M个数字端口中的不同数字端口发送该参考信号的时域资源和频域资源是相同的,且不同数字端口是码分复用的情况下,不同数字端口发送该参考信号的资源在频域上均包括相同的M个频域单元。通过这种方式,能够使得不同数字端口在相同的频域单元上以码分复用的方式发送参考信号,可以尽可能地复用相同的频域单元,以节省通信资源并降低实现复杂度。In a possible implementation of the third method, in the resources of the reference signal, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports all include the same M frequency domain units in the frequency domain. Specifically, M is greater than 1, and the time domain resources and frequency domain resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports among the M digital ports are the same, and when different digital ports are code division multiplexed, the resources for sending the reference signal by different digital ports all include the same M frequency domain units in the frequency domain. In this way, different digital ports can send reference signals in a code division multiplexed manner on the same frequency domain unit, and the same frequency domain units can be reused as much as possible to save communication resources and reduce implementation complexity.

作为方式三的一种实现示例,如图9所示,M个数字端口包括图中的数字端口0、数字端口1、数字端口2和数字端口3这四个数字端口为例,第一数字端口和第二数字端口可以为该四个数字端口中的任意不同的两个数字端口。在该示例中,M个数字端口先按CDM组内OCC序列索引的升序,再按照CDM组的索引升序映射到测量资源。假设配置2个CDM组,每个CDM组包括M/2数字端口。即数字端口0~M/2-1属于第一个CDM组(即图示的包含数字端口0和数字端口1的CDM组0),数字端口M/2~M属于第二个CDM组(即图示的包含数字端口2和数字端口3的CDM组1)。As an implementation example of the third method, as shown in FIG9 , the M digital ports include the four digital ports of digital port 0, digital port 1, digital port 2 and digital port 3 in the figure as an example, and the first digital port and the second digital port can be any two different digital ports among the four digital ports. In this example, the M digital ports are first mapped to the measurement resources in ascending order of the OCC sequence index in the CDM group, and then in ascending order of the index of the CDM group. Assume that 2 CDM groups are configured, and each CDM group includes M/2 digital ports. That is, digital ports 0 to M/2-1 belong to the first CDM group (i.e., CDM group 0 including digital port 0 and digital port 1 as shown in the figure), and digital ports M/2 to M belong to the second CDM group (i.e., CDM group 1 including digital port 2 and digital port 3 as shown in the figure).

并且,在该示例中,数字端口0和数字端口1占用相同的时频资源,属于CDM组0,两个数字端口频域码分复用FD-CDM2;数字端口2和数字端口3占用相同的时频资源,属于CDM组1,两个数字端口频域码分复用FD-CDM2;数字端口0和数字端口1与数字端口2和数字端口3之间频分资源,即占用不同的频域资源。每个数字端口包含两个虚拟端口,占用两个时域符号,在频域上每个数字端口占用两个RE。Moreover, in this example, digital port 0 and digital port 1 occupy the same time-frequency resources, belong to CDM group 0, and the two digital ports use frequency domain code division multiplexing FD-CDM2; digital port 2 and digital port 3 occupy the same time-frequency resources, belong to CDM group 1, and the two digital ports use frequency domain code division multiplexing FD-CDM2; digital port 0 and digital port 1 and digital port 2 and digital port 3 use frequency division resources, that is, they occupy different frequency domain resources. Each digital port contains two virtual ports, occupying two time domain symbols, and each digital port occupies two REs in the frequency domain.

可以理解的是,在图9所示示例中,在2个符号上,同一CDM组内的不同数字端口在同一符号上可以是码分复用的。例如,在第一个符号上,在CDM 0中,数字端口0对应的码序列编码的OCC码为“+1”“-1”,数字端口1对应的码序列编码的OCC码为“+1”“+1”;在CDM 1中,数字端口2对应的码序列编码的OCC码为“+1”“-1”,数字端口3对应的码序列编码的OCC码为“+1”“+1”。It can be understood that in the example shown in FIG. 9 , on two symbols, different digital ports within the same CDM group can be code-division multiplexed on the same symbol. For example, on the first symbol, in CDM 0, the OCC code encoded by the code sequence corresponding to digital port 0 is "+1" "-1", and the OCC code encoded by the code sequence corresponding to digital port 1 is "+1" "+1"; in CDM 1, the OCC code encoded by the code sequence corresponding to digital port 2 is "+1" "-1", and the OCC code encoded by the code sequence corresponding to digital port 3 is "+1" "+1".

可选地,在示例二中,M大于1的情况下,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收指示该参考信号的资源满足上述方法一至方法三中的其中一项的指示信息。通过这种方式,使得终端设备能够基于该指示信息明确M个数字端口中不同数字端口的资源配置方式。Optionally, in Example 2, when M is greater than 1, the method further includes: the terminal device receives indication information indicating that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the above methods 1 to 3. In this way, the terminal device can clarify the resource configuration mode of different digital ports among the M digital ports based on the indication information.

可选地,该指示信息承载于参考信号的配置信息,或者是其他的消息/信息/信令等,此处不做限定。或者,终端设备通过预配置的方式确定该参考信号的资源满足上述方法一至方法三中的其中一项。Optionally, the indication information is carried in the configuration information of the reference signal, or other messages/information/signaling, etc., which are not limited here. Alternatively, the terminal device determines by pre-configuration that the resource of the reference signal satisfies one of the above methods 1 to 3.

请参阅图10,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置1000,该通信装置1000可以实现上述方法实施例中终端设备(或网络设备)的功能,因此也能实现上述方法实施例所具备的有益效果。在本申请实施例中,该通信装置1000可以是终端设备(或网络设备),也可以是终端设备(或网络设备)内部的集成电路或者元件等,例如芯片。下文实施例以该通信装置1000为终端设备或网络设备为例进行说明。Please refer to Figure 10. The embodiment of the present application provides a communication device 1000, which can implement the functions of the terminal device (or network device) in the above method embodiment, and thus can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiment. In the embodiment of the present application, the communication device 1000 can be a terminal device (or network device), or an integrated circuit or component inside the terminal device (or network device), such as a chip. The following embodiments are described by taking the communication device 1000 as a terminal device or a network device as an example.

一种可能的实现方式中,当该装置1000为用于执行前述实施例中终端设备所执行的方法时,该装置1000包括处理单元1001和收发单元1002;该收发单元1002用于接收参考信号,该参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,该M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,N1为大于等于1的整数;该处理单元1001用于确定测量信息,该收发单元1002还用于发送测量信息,该测量信息包括基于该第一数字端口发送的参考信号进行测量得到的第一信息;其中,该第一信息是基于N1个信道信息确定的,该N1个信道信息分别是通过该N1个虚拟端口发送的参考信号确定的,该第一信息用于确定该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值。In a possible implementation, when the apparatus 1000 is used to execute the method executed by the terminal device in the aforementioned embodiment, the apparatus 1000 includes a processing unit 1001 and a transceiver unit 1002; the transceiver unit 1002 is used to receive a reference signal, which is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port among the M digital ports includes N 1 virtual ports, where N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the processing unit 1001 is used to determine measurement information, and the transceiver unit 1002 is also used to send measurement information, wherein the measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, wherein the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port.

一种可能的实现方式中,当该装置1000为用于执行前述实施例中网络设备所执行的方法时,该装置1000包括处理单元1001和收发单元1002;该处理单元1001用于确定参考信号,该收发单元用于发送参考信号,该参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,该M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,N1为大于等于1的整数;该收发单元1002还用于接收测量信息,该测量信息包括基于该第一数字端口发送的参考信号进行测量得到的第一信息;其中,该第一信息是基于N1个信道信息确定的,该N1个信道信息分别是通过该N1个虚拟端口发送的参考信号确定的。In a possible implementation, when the device 1000 is used to execute the method executed by the network device in the aforementioned embodiment, the device 1000 includes a processing unit 1001 and a transceiver unit 1002; the processing unit 1001 is used to determine a reference signal, and the transceiver unit is used to send a reference signal, and the reference signal is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port among the M digital ports includes N1 virtual ports, and N1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the transceiver unit 1002 is also used to receive measurement information, and the measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N1 channel information, and the N1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signals sent by the N1 virtual ports.

需要说明的是,上述通信装置1000的单元的信息执行过程等内容,具体可参见本申请前述所示的方法实施例中的叙述,此处不再赘述。 It should be noted that the information execution process and other contents of the units of the above-mentioned communication device 1000 can be specifically referred to the description in the method embodiment shown in the above-mentioned application, and will not be repeated here.

请参阅图11,为本申请提供的通信装置1100的另一种示意性结构图,通信装置1100包括逻辑电路1101和输入输出接口1102。其中,通信装置1100可以为芯片或集成电路。Please refer to Fig. 11, which is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1100 provided in the present application. The communication device 1100 includes a logic circuit 1101 and an input/output interface 1102. The communication device 1100 may be a chip or an integrated circuit.

其中,图10所示收发单元1002可以为通信接口,该通信接口可以是图11中的输入输出接口1102,该输入输出接口1102可以包括输入接口和输出接口。或者,该通信接口也可以是收发电路,该收发电路可以包括输入接口电路和输出接口电路。The transceiver unit 1002 shown in Figure 10 may be a communication interface, which may be the input/output interface 1102 in Figure 11, which may include an input interface and an output interface. Alternatively, the communication interface may be a transceiver circuit, which may include an input interface circuit and an output interface circuit.

可选的,该输入输出接口1102用于接收参考信号,该参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,该M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,N1为大于等于1的整数;该逻辑电路1101用于确定测量信息,该输入输出接口1102还用于发送测量信息,该测量信息包括基于该第一数字端口发送的参考信号进行测量得到的第一信息;其中,该第一信息是基于N1个信道信息确定的,该N1个信道信息分别是通过该N1个虚拟端口发送的参考信号确定的,该第一信息用于确定该第一数字端口中的该N1个虚拟端口的权值。其中,逻辑电路1101和输入输出接口1102还可以执行前述实施例中终端设备执行的其他步骤并实现对应的有益效果,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the input/output interface 1102 is used to receive a reference signal, which is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port among the M digital ports includes N 1 virtual ports, where N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the logic circuit 1101 is used to determine measurement information, and the input/output interface 1102 is also used to send measurement information, which includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, which is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port. The logic circuit 1101 and the input/output interface 1102 may also perform other steps performed by the terminal device in the aforementioned embodiment and achieve corresponding beneficial effects, which will not be described in detail here.

可选的,该逻辑电路1101用于确定参考信号,该收发单元用于发送参考信号,该参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,该M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,N1为大于等于1的整数;该输入输出接口1102还用于接收测量信息,该测量信息包括基于该第一数字端口发送的参考信号进行测量得到的第一信息;其中,该第一信息是基于N1个信道信息确定的,该N1个信道信息分别是通过该N1个虚拟端口发送的参考信号确定的。其中,逻辑电路1101和输入输出接口1102还可以执行前述实施例中网络设备执行的其他步骤并实现对应的有益效果,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the logic circuit 1101 is used to determine a reference signal, and the transceiver unit is used to send a reference signal, the reference signal is sent through M digital ports, M is a positive integer; wherein the first digital port among the M digital ports includes N 1 virtual ports, N 1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the input-output interface 1102 is also used to receive measurement information, the measurement information includes first information obtained by measuring based on the reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, and the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signal sent by the N 1 virtual ports. Among them, the logic circuit 1101 and the input-output interface 1102 can also perform other steps performed by the network device in the aforementioned embodiment and achieve corresponding beneficial effects, which will not be repeated here.

在一种可能的实现方式中,图10所示处理单元1001可以为图11中的逻辑电路1101。In a possible implementation, the processing unit 1001 shown in FIG. 10 may be the logic circuit 1101 in FIG. 11 .

可选的,逻辑电路1101可以是一个处理装置,处理装置的功能可以部分或全部通过软件实现。其中,处理装置的功能可以部分或全部通过软件实现。Optionally, the logic circuit 1101 may be a processing device, and the functions of the processing device may be partially or completely implemented by software. The functions of the processing device may be partially or completely implemented by software.

可选的,处理装置可以包括存储器和处理器,其中,存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行任意一个方法实施例中的相应处理和/或步骤。Optionally, the processing device may include a memory and a processor, wherein the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor reads and executes the computer program stored in the memory to perform corresponding processing and/or steps in any one of the method embodiments.

可选地,处理装置可以仅包括处理器。用于存储计算机程序的存储器位于处理装置之外,处理器通过电路/电线与存储器连接,以读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序。其中,存储器和处理器可以集成在一起,或者也可以是物理上互相独立的。Alternatively, the processing device may include only a processor. A memory for storing a computer program is located outside the processing device, and the processor is connected to the memory via a circuit/wire to read and execute the computer program stored in the memory. The memory and the processor may be integrated together, or may be physically independent of each other.

可选地,该处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片,或一个或多个集成电路。例如,处理装置可以是一个或多个现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA)、专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、系统芯片(system on chip,SoC)、中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU)、网络处理器(network processor,NP)、数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP)、微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其它集成芯片,或者上述芯片或者处理器的任意组合等。Optionally, the processing device may be one or more chips, or one or more integrated circuits. For example, the processing device may be one or more field-programmable gate arrays (FPGA), application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), system on chip (SoC), central processor unit (CPU), network processor (NP), digital signal processor (DSP), microcontroller unit (MCU), programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips, or any combination of the above chips or processors.

请参阅图12,为本申请的实施例提供的上述实施例中所涉及的通信装置1200,该通信装置1200具体可以为上述实施例中的作为终端设备的通信装置,图12所示示例为终端设备通过终端设备(或者终端设备中的部件)实现。Please refer to Figure 12, which shows a communication device 1200 involved in the above embodiments provided in an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1200 can specifically be a communication device as a terminal device in the above embodiments. The example shown in Figure 12 is that the terminal device is implemented through the terminal device (or a component in the terminal device).

其中,该通信装置1200的一种可能的逻辑结构示意图,该通信装置1200可以包括但不限于至少一个处理器1201以及通信端口1202。Among them, a possible logical structure diagram of the communication device 1200 is shown, and the communication device 1200 may include but is not limited to at least one processor 1201 and a communication port 1202.

进一步可选的,该装置还可以包括存储器1203、总线1204中的至少一个,在本申请的实施例中,该至少一个处理器1201用于对通信装置1200的动作进行控制处理。Further optionally, the device may also include at least one of a memory 1203 and a bus 1204 . In an embodiment of the present application, the at least one processor 1201 is used to control and process the actions of the communication device 1200 .

此外,处理器1201可以是中央处理器单元,通用处理器,数字信号处理器,专用集成电路,现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。该处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,数字信号处理器和微处理器的组合等等。所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统,装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。 In addition, the processor 1201 can be a central processing unit, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a transistor logic device, a hardware component or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute various exemplary logic blocks, modules and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application. The processor can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, and the like. Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and simplicity of description, the specific working process of the above-described system, device and unit can refer to the corresponding process in the aforementioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.

需要说明的是,图12所示通信装置1200具体可以用于实现前述方法实施例中终端设备所实现的步骤,并实现终端设备对应的技术效果,图12所示通信装置的具体实现方式,均可以参考前述方法实施例中的叙述,此处不再一一赘述。It should be noted that the communication device 1200 shown in Figure 12 can be specifically used to implement the steps implemented by the terminal device in the aforementioned method embodiment, and to achieve the corresponding technical effects of the terminal device. The specific implementation methods of the communication device shown in Figure 12 can refer to the description in the aforementioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here one by one.

请参阅图13,为本申请的实施例提供的上述实施例中所涉及的通信装置1300的结构示意图,该通信装置1300具体可以为上述实施例中的作为网络设备的通信装置,图13所示示例为网络设备通过网络设备(或者网络设备中的部件)实现,其中,该通信装置的结构可以参考图13所示的结构。Please refer to Figure 13, which is a structural diagram of the communication device 1300 involved in the above-mentioned embodiments provided in an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1300 can specifically be a communication device as a network device in the above-mentioned embodiments. The example shown in Figure 13 is that the network device is implemented through the network device (or a component in the network device), wherein the structure of the communication device can refer to the structure shown in Figure 13.

通信装置1300包括至少一个处理器1311以及至少一个网络接口1314。进一步可选的,该通信装置还包括至少一个存储器1312、至少一个收发器1313和一个或多个天线1315。处理器1311、存储器1312、收发器1313和网络接口1314相连,例如通过总线相连,在本申请实施例中,该连接可包括各类接口、传输线或总线等,本实施例对此不做限定。天线1315与收发器1313相连。网络接口1314用于使得通信装置通过通信链路,与其它通信设备通信。例如网络接口1314可以包括通信装置与核心网设备之间的网络接口,例如S1接口,网络接口可以包括通信装置和其他通信装置(例如其他网络设备或者核心网设备)之间的网络接口,例如X2或者Xn接口。The communication device 1300 includes at least one processor 1311 and at least one network interface 1314. Further optionally, the communication device also includes at least one memory 1312, at least one transceiver 1313 and one or more antennas 1315. The processor 1311, the memory 1312, the transceiver 1313 and the network interface 1314 are connected, for example, through a bus. In an embodiment of the present application, the connection may include various interfaces, transmission lines or buses, etc., which are not limited in this embodiment. The antenna 1315 is connected to the transceiver 1313. The network interface 1314 is used to enable the communication device to communicate with other communication devices through a communication link. For example, the network interface 1314 may include a network interface between the communication device and the core network device, such as an S1 interface, and the network interface may include a network interface between the communication device and other communication devices (such as other network devices or core network devices), such as an X2 or Xn interface.

处理器1311主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个通信装置进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据,例如用于支持通信装置执行实施例中所描述的动作。通信装置可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。图13中的处理器1311可以集成基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,本领域技术人员可以理解,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解,终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式,终端设备可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端设备的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。该基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。该中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储器中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。The processor 1311 is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire communication device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program, for example, to support the communication device to perform the actions described in the embodiment. The communication device may include a baseband processor and a central processor. The baseband processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and the central processor is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program. The processor 1311 in Figure 13 can integrate the functions of the baseband processor and the central processor. It can be understood by those skilled in the art that the baseband processor and the central processor can also be independent processors, interconnected by technologies such as buses. It can be understood by those skilled in the art that the terminal device can include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network formats, and the terminal device can include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities. The various components of the terminal device can be connected through various buses. The baseband processor can also be described as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processor can also be described as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing the communication protocol and communication data can be built into the processor, or it can be stored in the memory in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.

存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。存储器1312可以是独立存在,与处理器1311相连。可选的,存储器1312可以和处理器1311集成在一起,例如集成在一个芯片之内。其中,存储器1312能够存储执行本申请实施例的技术方案的程序代码,并由处理器1311来控制执行,被执行的各类计算机程序代码也可被视为是处理器1311的驱动程序。The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data. The memory 1312 can exist independently and be connected to the processor 1311. Optionally, the memory 1312 can be integrated with the processor 1311, for example, integrated into a chip. Among them, the memory 1312 can store program codes for executing the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 1311. The various types of computer program codes executed can also be regarded as drivers of the processor 1311.

图13仅示出了一个存储器和一个处理器。在实际的终端设备中,可以存在多个处理器和多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以为与处理器处于同一芯片上的存储元件,即片内存储元件,或者为独立的存储元件,本申请实施例对此不做限定。FIG13 shows only one memory and one processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and multiple memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc. The memory may be a storage element on the same chip as the processor, i.e., an on-chip storage element, or an independent storage element, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.

收发器1313可以用于支持通信装置与终端之间射频信号的接收或者发送,收发器1313可以与天线1315相连。收发器1313包括发射机Tx和接收机Rx。具体地,一个或多个天线1315可以接收射频信号,该收发器1313的接收机Rx用于从天线接收该射频信号,并将射频信号转换为数字基带信号或数字中频信号,并将该数字基带信号或数字中频信号提供给该处理器1311,以便处理器1311对该数字基带信号或数字中频信号做进一步的处理,例如解调处理和译码处理。此外,收发器1313中的发射机Tx还用于从处理器1311接收经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号,并将该经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号转换为射频信号,并通过一个或多个天线1315发送该射频信号。具体地,接收机Rx可以选择性地对射频信号进行一级或多级下混频处理和模数转换处理以得到数字基带信号或数字中频信号,该下混频处理和模数转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。发射机Tx可以选择性地对经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号时进行一级或多级上混频处理和数模转换处理以得到射频信号,该上混频处理和数模转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。数字基带信号和数字中频信号可以统称为数字信号。The transceiver 1313 can be used to support the reception or transmission of radio frequency signals between the communication device and the terminal, and the transceiver 1313 can be connected to the antenna 1315. The transceiver 1313 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx. Specifically, one or more antennas 1315 can receive radio frequency signals, and the receiver Rx of the transceiver 1313 is used to receive the radio frequency signal from the antenna, convert the radio frequency signal into a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal, and provide the digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal to the processor 1311, so that the processor 1311 further processes the digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal, such as demodulation and decoding. In addition, the transmitter Tx in the transceiver 1313 is also used to receive a modulated digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal from the processor 1311, and convert the modulated digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal into a radio frequency signal, and send the radio frequency signal through one or more antennas 1315. Specifically, the receiver Rx can selectively perform one or more stages of down-mixing and analog-to-digital conversion processing on the RF signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal, and the order of the down-mixing and analog-to-digital conversion processing is adjustable. The transmitter Tx can selectively perform one or more stages of up-mixing and digital-to-analog conversion processing on the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal to obtain a RF signal, and the order of the up-mixing and digital-to-analog conversion processing is adjustable. The digital baseband signal and the digital intermediate frequency signal can be collectively referred to as a digital signal.

收发器1313也可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元也可以称为接收机、输入口、接收电路等,发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。 The transceiver 1313 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver device, etc. Optionally, a device in the transceiver unit for implementing a receiving function may be regarded as a receiving unit, and a device in the transceiver unit for implementing a sending function may be regarded as a sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a sending unit, the receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, an input port, a receiving circuit, etc., and the sending unit may be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.

需要说明的是,图13所示通信装置1300具体可以用于实现前述方法实施例中网络设备所实现的步骤,并实现网络设备对应的技术效果,图13所示通信装置1300的具体实现方式,均可以参考前述方法实施例中的叙述,此处不再一一赘述。It should be noted that the communication device 1300 shown in Figure 13 can be specifically used to implement the steps implemented by the network equipment in the aforementioned method embodiment, and to achieve the corresponding technical effects of the network equipment. The specific implementation methods of the communication device 1300 shown in Figure 13 can refer to the description in the aforementioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.

本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储一个或多个计算机执行指令,当计算机执行指令被处理器执行时,该处理器执行如前述实施例中通信装置(例如终端设备或网络设备)可能的实现方式所述的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing one or more computer-executable instructions. When the computer-executable instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the method described in the possible implementation method of the communication device (such as a terminal device or a network device) in the above-mentioned embodiment.

本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品(或称计算机程序),当计算机程序产品被该处理器执行时,该处理器执行上述通信装置(例如终端设备或网络设备)可能实现方式的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product (or computer program). When the computer program product is executed by the processor, the processor executes a method that may be implemented by the above-mentioned communication device (such as a terminal device or a network device).

本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括至少一个处理器,用于支持通信装置实现上述通信装置可能的实现方式中所涉及的功能。可选的,所述芯片系统还包括接口电路,所述接口电路为所述至少一个处理器提供程序指令和/或数据。在一种可能的设计中,该芯片系统还可以包括存储器,存储器,用于保存该通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片系统,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件,其中,该通信装置具体可以为前述方法实施例中的终端设备或网络设备。The embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system, which includes at least one processor for supporting a communication device to implement the functions involved in the possible implementation methods of the above-mentioned communication device. Optionally, the chip system also includes an interface circuit, which provides program instructions and/or data for the at least one processor. In one possible design, the chip system may also include a memory, which is used to store the necessary program instructions and data for the communication device. The chip system can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices, wherein the communication device can specifically be a terminal device or a network device in the aforementioned method embodiment.

本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,该网络系统架构包括上述任一实施例中的终端设备和网络设备。An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, and the network system architecture includes the terminal device and network device in any of the above embodiments.

在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统,装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.

所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.

另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。 In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into a processing unit, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit. If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), random access memory (RAM, Random Access Memory), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code.

Claims (26)

一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising: 接收参考信号,所述参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,所述M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,N1为大于等于1的整数;receiving a reference signal, wherein the reference signal is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein a first digital port among the M digital ports includes N1 virtual ports, where N1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; 发送测量信息,所述测量信息包括基于所述第一数字端口发送的参考信号进行测量得到的第一信息;其中,所述第一信息是基于N1个信道信息确定的,所述N1个信道信息分别是通过所述N1个虚拟端口发送的参考信号确定的,所述第一信息用于确定所述第一数字端口中的所述N1个虚拟端口的权值。Send measurement information, the measurement information comprising first information obtained by measuring based on a reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signals sent by the N 1 virtual ports, and the first information is used to determine the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一数字端口中的所述N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过第一权值向量得到的,所述第一权值向量包括N1个元素;The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained by a first weight vector, and the first weight vector includes N 1 elements; 其中,所述N1个虚拟端口分别对应N1个天线阵子集合,每个所述天线阵子集合包含一个或多个天线阵子,所述N1个元素分别用于调节所述N1个天线阵子集合的相位。The N 1 virtual ports correspond to N 1 antenna array sets respectively, each of the antenna array sets includes one or more antenna arrays, and the N 1 elements are used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets respectively. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 2, characterized in that 所述第一数字端口中的所述N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过第一权值向量得到的,包括:The weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained by a first weight vector, including: 所述第一数字端口中的所述N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过所述第一权值向量和第二权值向量得到的,所述第二权值向量包括N1个子向量;其中,所述N1个子向量中的第T个子向量的维度与所述N1个天线阵子集合中的第T个天线阵子集合的天线阵子数相同,T的取值为1至N1The weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through the first weight vector and the second weight vector, and the second weight vector includes N 1 sub-vectors; wherein the dimension of the T-th sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the T- th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets, and the value of T is 1 to N 1 . 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息满足以下任一项:The method according to claim 2 or 3, characterized in that the first information satisfies any of the following: 所述第一信息包括所述第一权值向量的量化处理结果;The first information includes a quantization processing result of the first weight vector; 所述第一信息包括对所述N1个虚拟端口中的其中一个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素中的一个元素,以及,除了所述其中一个虚拟端口之外的其他N1-1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素中的N1-1个元素相对于所述一个元素的差值对应的量化处理结果;The first information includes a quantization processing result corresponding to a difference between one of the N 1 elements corresponding to one of the N 1 virtual ports and N 1 -1 elements of the N 1 elements corresponding to other N 1 -1 virtual ports except the one of the virtual ports and the one element; 所述第一信息包括第一索引和第二索引,所述第一索引和所述第二索引用于在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中确定所述第一数字端口的第一权值向量;其中,所述第一索引为第一维度上的码本索引,所述第二索引为第二维度上的码本索引,在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中,每个权值向量是通过第一维度上的权值与第二维度上的权值确定的;The first information includes a first index and a second index, and the first index and the second index are used to determine a first weight vector of the first digital port in one or more weight vectors included in a codebook set; wherein the first index is a codebook index on a first dimension, and the second index is a codebook index on a second dimension, and in the one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set, each weight vector is determined by a weight on the first dimension and a weight on the second dimension; 所述第一信息包括第三索引,所述第三索引用于在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中确定所述第一数字端口的第一权值向量。The first information includes a third index, and the third index is used to determine a first weight vector of the first digital port among one or more weight vectors included in a codebook set. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 4, characterized in that the method further comprises: 接收第二信息,所述第二信息用于确定所述码本集合,所述码本集合是通过一个或多个数字端口中的虚拟端口的端口信息确定的,任一数字端口中的虚拟端口的端口信息包括以下至少一项:Receive second information, where the second information is used to determine the codebook set, where the codebook set is determined by port information of a virtual port in one or more digital ports, where the port information of the virtual port in any digital port includes at least one of the following: 数字端口包含的虚拟端口数为N1The number of virtual ports included in the digital port is N 1 ; 在所述数字端口的第一维度上的虚拟端口数为M1The number of virtual ports in the first dimension of the digital port is M 1 ; 在所述数字端口的第二维度上的虚拟端口数为M2The number of virtual ports in the second dimension of the digital port is M 2 ; 在所述数字端口的第一维度上的过采样因子为O1The oversampling factor in the first dimension of the digital port is O 1 ; 在所述数字端口的第二维度上的过采样因子为O2The oversampling factor in the second dimension of the digital port is O 2 . 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二信息满足以下至少一项;The method according to claim 5, characterized in that the second information satisfies at least one of the following: 所述第二信息包括所述第一数字端口包含的虚拟端口的端口信息;The second information includes port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port; 所述第二信息包括第四索引,所述第四索引用于在预配置或预定义的一种或多种虚拟端口的端口信息中确定第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息;The second information includes a fourth index, and the fourth index is used to determine the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port in the port information of one or more preconfigured or predefined virtual ports; 所述第二信息包括第五索引,所述第五索引用于在预配置或预定义的一个或多个码本集合中确定所 述码本集合;The second information includes a fifth index, wherein the fifth index is used to determine the Codebook collection; 所述第二信息用于指示所述第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息中的部分项,并且,所述第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息中的其他项通过所述部分项以及预配置的一种或多种虚拟端口的端口信息确定;The second information is used to indicate some items in the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port, and other items in the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port are determined by the partial items and the port information of one or more pre-configured virtual ports; 所述第二信息用于指示所述第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息,并且,所述虚拟端口的端口信息用于在预配置或预定义的一个或多个码本集合中确定所述码本集合。The second information is used to indicate port information of a virtual port included in the first digital port, and the port information of the virtual port is used to determine the codebook set from one or more preconfigured or predefined codebook sets. 根据权利要求1至6任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量信息包括所述M个信息和/或所述K个信息;The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, characterized in that the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information; 所述M个信息分别用于确定所述M个数字端口中的虚拟端口的权值;所述M个信息中的其中一个信息为所述第一信息;The M pieces of information are respectively used to determine the weights of the virtual ports in the M digital ports; one of the M pieces of information is the first information; 所述K个信息分别用于确定K组数字端口中的虚拟端口的权值,其中,K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包括所述M个数字端口中的一个或多个数字端口,K为小于或等于M的正整数;所述K个信息中的其中一个信息为所述第一信息。The K pieces of information are respectively used to determine the weights of the virtual ports in the K groups of digital ports, wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports in the M digital ports, and K is a positive integer less than or equal to M; and one of the K pieces of information is the first information. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量信息满足以下任一项:The method according to claim 7, wherein the measurement information satisfies any of the following: 所述参考信号的秩rank数满足第一条件时,所述测量信息包括所述M个信息;When the rank number of the reference signal satisfies the first condition, the measurement information includes the M pieces of information; 所述参考信号的rank数满足第二条件时,所述测量信息包括所述K个信息;When the rank number of the reference signal satisfies the second condition, the measurement information includes the K pieces of information; 所述参考信号的信道质量信息CQI满足第三条件时,所述测量信息包括所述M个信息;When the channel quality information CQI of the reference signal satisfies a third condition, the measurement information includes the M pieces of information; 所述参考信号的CQI满足第四条件时,所述测量信息包括所述K个信息。When the CQI of the reference signal satisfies a fourth condition, the measurement information includes the K pieces of information. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 7 or 8, characterized in that the method further comprises: 接收指示所述测量信息包括所述M个信息和/或所述K个信息的指示信息。Indication information indicating that the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information is received. 根据权利要求7至9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包含的一个或多个数字端口中,不同数字端口的虚拟端口的端口信息是相同的。The method according to any one of claims 7 to 9 is characterized in that, in one or more digital ports included in each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports, port information of virtual ports of different digital ports is the same. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising: 发送参考信号,所述参考信号是通过M个数字端口发送的,M为正整数;其中,所述M个数字端口中的第一数字端口包括N1个虚拟端口,N1为大于等于1的整数;Sending a reference signal, wherein the reference signal is sent through M digital ports, where M is a positive integer; wherein a first digital port among the M digital ports includes N1 virtual ports, where N1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1; 接收测量信息,所述测量信息包括基于所述第一数字端口发送的参考信号进行测量得到的第一信息;其中,所述第一信息是基于N1个信道信息确定的,所述N1个信道信息分别是通过所述N1个虚拟端口发送的参考信号确定的。Receive measurement information, the measurement information comprising first information measured based on a reference signal sent by the first digital port; wherein the first information is determined based on N 1 channel information, and the N 1 channel information is respectively determined by the reference signals sent by the N 1 virtual ports. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一数字端口中的所述N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过第一权值向量得到的,所述第一权值向量包括N1个元素;The method according to claim 11, characterized in that the weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained by a first weight vector, and the first weight vector includes N 1 elements; 其中,所述N1个虚拟端口分别对应N1个天线阵子集合,每个所述天线阵子集合包含一个或多个天线阵子,所述N1个元素分别用于调节所述N1个天线阵子集合的相位。The N 1 virtual ports correspond to N 1 antenna array sets respectively, each of the antenna array sets includes one or more antenna arrays, and the N 1 elements are used to adjust the phases of the N 1 antenna array sets respectively. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 12, characterized in that 所述第一数字端口中的所述N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过第一权值向量得到的,包括:The weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained by a first weight vector, including: 所述第一数字端口中的所述N1个虚拟端口的权值是通过所述第一权值向量和第二权值向量得到的,所述第二权值向量包括N1个子向量;其中,所述N1个子向量中的第T个子向量的维度与所述N1个天线阵子集合中的第T个天线阵子集合的天线阵子数相同,T的取值为1至N1The weights of the N 1 virtual ports in the first digital port are obtained through the first weight vector and the second weight vector, and the second weight vector includes N 1 sub-vectors; wherein the dimension of the T-th sub-vector in the N 1 sub-vectors is the same as the number of antenna arrays in the T- th antenna array set in the N 1 antenna array sets, and the value of T is 1 to N 1 . 根据权利要求12或13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息满足以下任一项: The method according to claim 12 or 13, characterized in that the first information satisfies any of the following: 所述第一信息包括所述第一权值向量的量化处理结果;The first information includes a quantization processing result of the first weight vector; 所述第一信息包括对所述N1个虚拟端口中的其中一个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素中的一个元素,以及,除了所述其中一个虚拟端口之外的其他N1-1个虚拟端口对应的N1个元素中的N1-1个元素相对于所述一个元素的差值对应的量化处理结果;The first information includes a quantization processing result corresponding to a difference between one of the N 1 elements corresponding to one of the N 1 virtual ports and N 1 -1 elements of the N 1 elements corresponding to other N 1 -1 virtual ports except the one of the virtual ports and the one element; 所述第一信息包括第一索引和第二索引,所述第一索引和所述第二索引用于在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中确定所述第一数字端口的第一权值向量;其中,所述第一索引为第一维度上的码本索引,所述第二索引为第二维度上的码本索引,在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中,每个权值向量是通过第一维度上的权值与第二维度上的权值确定的;The first information includes a first index and a second index, and the first index and the second index are used to determine a first weight vector of the first digital port in one or more weight vectors included in a codebook set; wherein the first index is a codebook index on a first dimension, and the second index is a codebook index on a second dimension, and in the one or more weight vectors included in the codebook set, each weight vector is determined by a weight on the first dimension and a weight on the second dimension; 所述第一信息包括第三索引,所述第三索引用于在码本集合所包含的一个或多个权值向量中确定所述第一数字端口的第一权值向量。The first information includes a third index, and the third index is used to determine a first weight vector of the first digital port among one or more weight vectors included in a codebook set. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 14, characterized in that the method further comprises: 发送第二信息,所述第二信息用于确定所述码本集合,所述码本集合是通过一个或多个数字端口中的虚拟端口的端口信息确定的,任一数字端口中的虚拟端口的端口信息包括以下至少一项:Sending second information, where the second information is used to determine the codebook set, where the codebook set is determined by port information of a virtual port in one or more digital ports, where the port information of the virtual port in any digital port includes at least one of the following: 数字端口包含的虚拟端口数为N1The number of virtual ports included in the digital port is N 1 ; 在所述数字端口的第一维度上的虚拟端口数为M1The number of virtual ports in the first dimension of the digital port is M 1 ; 在所述数字端口的第二维度上的虚拟端口数为M2The number of virtual ports in the second dimension of the digital port is M 2 ; 在所述数字端口的第一维度上的过采样因子为O1The oversampling factor in the first dimension of the digital port is O 1 ; 在所述数字端口的第二维度上的过采样因子为O2The oversampling factor in the second dimension of the digital port is O 2 . 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二信息满足以下至少一项;The method according to claim 15, characterized in that the second information satisfies at least one of the following: 所述第二信息包括所述第一数字端口包含的虚拟端口的端口信息;The second information includes port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port; 所述第二信息包括第四索引,所述第四索引用于在预配置或预定义的一种或多种虚拟端口的端口信息中确定第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息;The second information includes a fourth index, and the fourth index is used to determine the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port in the port information of one or more preconfigured or predefined virtual ports; 所述第二信息包括第五索引,所述第五索引用于在预配置或预定义的一个或多个码本集合中确定所述码本集合;The second information includes a fifth index, where the fifth index is used to determine the codebook set in one or more preconfigured or predefined codebook sets; 所述第二信息用于指示所述第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息中的部分项,并且,所述第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息中的其他项通过所述部分项以及预配置的一种或多种虚拟端口的端口信息确定;The second information is used to indicate some items in the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port, and other items in the port information of the virtual port included in the first digital port are determined by the partial items and the port information of one or more pre-configured virtual ports; 所述第二信息用于指示所述第一数字端口所包含的虚拟端口的端口信息,并且,所述虚拟端口的端口信息用于在预配置或预定义的一个或多个码本集合中确定所述码本集合。The second information is used to indicate port information of a virtual port included in the first digital port, and the port information of the virtual port is used to determine the codebook set from one or more preconfigured or predefined codebook sets. 根据权利要求11至16任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量信息包括所述M个信息和/或所述K个信息;The method according to any one of claims 11 to 16, characterized in that the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information; 所述M个信息分别用于确定所述M个数字端口中的虚拟端口的权值;所述M个信息中的其中一个信息为所述第一信息;The M pieces of information are respectively used to determine the weights of the virtual ports in the M digital ports; one of the M pieces of information is the first information; 所述K个信息分别用于确定K组数字端口中的虚拟端口的权值,其中,K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包括所述M个数字端口中的一个或多个数字端口,K为小于或等于M的正整数;所述K个信息中的其中一个信息为所述第一信息。The K pieces of information are respectively used to determine the weights of the virtual ports in the K groups of digital ports, wherein each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports includes one or more digital ports in the M digital ports, and K is a positive integer less than or equal to M; and one of the K pieces of information is the first information. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量信息满足以下任一项:The method according to claim 17, wherein the measurement information satisfies any of the following: 所述参考信号的秩rank数满足第一条件时,所述测量信息包括所述M个信息;When the rank number of the reference signal satisfies the first condition, the measurement information includes the M pieces of information; 所述参考信号的rank数满足第二条件时,所述测量信息包括所述K个信息;When the rank number of the reference signal satisfies the second condition, the measurement information includes the K pieces of information; 所述参考信号的信道质量信息CQI满足第三条件时,所述测量信息包括所述M个信息;When the channel quality information CQI of the reference signal satisfies a third condition, the measurement information includes the M pieces of information; 所述参考信号的CQI满足第四条件时,所述测量信息包括所述K个信息。 When the CQI of the reference signal satisfies a fourth condition, the measurement information includes the K pieces of information. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 17 or 18, characterized in that the method further comprises: 发送指示所述测量信息包括所述M个信息和/或所述K个信息的指示信息。Sending indication information indicating that the measurement information includes the M information and/or the K information. 根据权利要求17至19任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述K组数字端口中的每一组数字端口包含的一个或多个数字端口中,不同数字端口的虚拟端口的端口信息是相同的。The method according to any one of claims 17 to 19 is characterized in that, in one or more digital ports included in each group of digital ports in the K groups of digital ports, port information of virtual ports of different digital ports is the same. 根据权利要求1至20任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量信息满足以下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 20, characterized in that the measurement information satisfies at least one of the following: 所述测量信息为第一载波对应的测量信息,所述测量信息用于确定所述第一载波对应的M个数字端口的虚拟端口的权值,所述第一载波包括一个或多个载波;The measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first carrier, and the measurement information is used to determine a weight of a virtual port of M digital ports corresponding to the first carrier, where the first carrier includes one or more carriers; 所述测量信息为第一带宽部分BWP对应的测量信息,所述测量信息用于确定所述第一BWP对应的M个数字端口的虚拟端口的权值,所述第一BWP包括一个或多个BWP;The measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first bandwidth part BWP, and the measurement information is used to determine the weights of the virtual ports of the M digital ports corresponding to the first BWP, wherein the first BWP includes one or more BWPs; 所述测量信息为第一带宽对应的测量信息,所述测量信息用于确定所述第一带宽对应的M个数字端口的虚拟端口的权值,所述第一带宽包括一个或多个子带。The measurement information is measurement information corresponding to a first bandwidth, and the measurement information is used to determine weights of virtual ports of M digital ports corresponding to the first bandwidth, wherein the first bandwidth includes one or more sub-bands. 根据权利要求1至21任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述参考信号在L1个时间单元上分别是通过L1个第一权值发送的,L1为大于1的整数;所述L1个第一权值中的第i个第一权值是通过L1个第二权值中的第i个第二权值与第三权值得到的,所述L1个第二权值是正交的,i的取值为1至L1The method according to any one of claims 1 to 21 is characterized in that the reference signal is sent through L 1 first weights in L 1 time units respectively, and L 1 is an integer greater than 1; the i-th first weight among the L 1 first weights is obtained through the i-th second weight and the third weight among the L 1 second weights, and the L 1 second weights are orthogonal, and the value of i is 1 to L 1 . 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行如权利要求1至22任一项所述的方法的模块。A communication device, characterized by comprising a module for executing the method according to any one of claims 1 to 22. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器与存储器耦合;所述至少一个处理器用于执行如权利要求1至22中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it comprises at least one processor, wherein the at least one processor is coupled to a memory; the at least one processor is used to execute the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 22. 根据权利要求24所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置为芯片或芯片系统。The communication device according to claim 24 is characterized in that the communication device is a chip or a chip system. 一种可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被通信装置执行时,实现如权利要求1至22中任一项所述的方法。 A readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program or instruction is stored in the storage medium, and when the computer program or instruction is executed by a communication device, the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 22 is implemented.
PCT/CN2024/130084 2023-11-27 2024-11-06 Communication method and related device Pending WO2025113117A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202311611775.8A CN120050697A (en) 2023-11-27 2023-11-27 Communication method and related equipment
CN202311611775.8 2023-11-27

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025113117A1 true WO2025113117A1 (en) 2025-06-05

Family

ID=95760479

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2024/130084 Pending WO2025113117A1 (en) 2023-11-27 2024-11-06 Communication method and related device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN120050697A (en)
WO (1) WO2025113117A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105577318A (en) * 2014-10-15 2016-05-11 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 CSI feedback method and apparatus in FD-MIMO transmission
CN115623497A (en) * 2021-07-12 2023-01-17 华为技术有限公司 Channel information acquisition method and communication device
US20230113557A1 (en) * 2021-10-07 2023-04-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Derivation of channel features using a subset of channel ports

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105577318A (en) * 2014-10-15 2016-05-11 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 CSI feedback method and apparatus in FD-MIMO transmission
CN115623497A (en) * 2021-07-12 2023-01-17 华为技术有限公司 Channel information acquisition method and communication device
US20230113557A1 (en) * 2021-10-07 2023-04-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Derivation of channel features using a subset of channel ports

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HENRIK RYDEN, ERICSSON: "Discussion on general aspects of AIML framework", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2302877; TYPE DISCUSSION; FS_NR_AIML_AIR, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Online; 20230417 - 20230426, 6 April 2023 (2023-04-06), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052293452 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN120050697A (en) 2025-05-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN115088224B (en) A channel state information feedback method and communication device
JP5993006B2 (en) Apparatus and method for combining baseband processing and radio frequency beam steering in a wireless communication system
CN111342873B (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
US9369193B2 (en) Efficient feedback transmission method in multi-antenna wireless communication system and device for same
EP2899896B1 (en) Method for transmitting efficient feedback in multi-antenna wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
US9712219B2 (en) Method for transmitting signal in multi-antenna wireless communication system and apparatus for the same
CN111342913B (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
KR102381159B1 (en) Method for transmitting reference signal for channel measurement in multi-antenna wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor
WO2022002079A1 (en) Precoding matrix determination method and apparatus
CN112054824B (en) A channel measurement method and communication device
WO2017125152A1 (en) Communication device and methods thereof
CN110324070A (en) Communication means, communication device and system
CN116743217A (en) Channel state information feedback method and communication device
US10141989B2 (en) System and method for quantization of angles for beamforming feedback
WO2021081847A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2025113117A1 (en) Communication method and related device
WO2025113124A1 (en) Communication method and related device
WO2025060883A1 (en) Communication method and device
WO2025119297A1 (en) Communication method and related apparatus
WO2025232858A1 (en) Communication method, and apparatus
WO2025190022A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2025232880A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2025103345A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2025195393A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2025228158A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24896208

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1